HK40044766B - Game controller - Google Patents

Description

Game controllers

This application is a divisional application of the application with application number 2016800020619, filed on June 10, 2016, and with the invention name “Information processing system, information processing device, operating device and accessory equipment”.

Technical Field

The present invention relates to a game controller set.

Background Art

Conventionally, there is a portable information processing device including a display unit and an operation unit (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-108256

Summary of the Invention

Problems to be solved by the invention

It is desirable to utilize information processing devices in a variety of ways.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide an information processing device that can be used in multiple ways. In addition, another object of the present invention is to provide a new information processing device.

Solutions for solving problems

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the present invention adopts the following structure.

The present invention is an information processing system including a main device, a first operating device, and a second operating device. The main device includes a display unit. The first operating device is attachable to and detachable from the main device. Regardless of whether the first operating device is mounted on the main device, the first operating device transmits first operation data indicating an operation of the first operating device to the main device. The second operating device is attachable to and detachable from the main device. Regardless of whether the second operating device is mounted on the main device, the second operating device transmits second operation data indicating an operation of the second operating device to the main device. The main device displays the results of executing a predetermined information process based on the first operation data transmitted from the first operating device and the second operation data transmitted from the second operating device on the display unit.

The first operating device may include a first input unit and a second input unit. The second operating device may include a third input unit of the same type as the first input unit and a fourth input unit of the same type as the second input unit.

The input mechanism of the first input unit and the input mechanism of the third input unit may be substantially the same. The input mechanism of the second input unit and the input mechanism of the fourth input unit may also be substantially the same.

The shape of the first input portion and the shape of the third input portion may be substantially the same. The shape of the second input portion and the shape of the fourth input portion may be substantially the same.

It is also possible that, when the first operating device and the second operating device are detached from the main device, the positional relationship between the first input unit and the second input unit when the first operating device is facing a certain direction is the same as the positional relationship between the third input unit and the fourth input unit when the second operating device is facing a certain direction.

Alternatively, when the first operating device and the second operating device are mounted on the main device, the positional relationship between the first input unit and the second input unit is opposite to the positional relationship between the third input unit and the fourth input unit.

The first input unit and the third input unit may be direction input units that receive direction input.

The direction input unit may include an operation member that can be tilted or slid in a predetermined direction.

The second input unit and the fourth input unit may be depressible buttons.

The first operating device may be integrally mounted on the main body device in a state where a predetermined surface of its housing faces a predetermined surface of the main body device.

The first operating device may be integrally mounted on the main device so as to face one of the left and right side surfaces of the main device. The second operating device may be mounted on the main device so as to face the other of the left and right side surfaces of the main device.

The first operating device may include a light emitting unit provided on a predetermined surface for notifying the user of predetermined information.

The first operating device may include an operating unit provided on a predetermined surface.

The connection portion between a first side surface of the first operating device and an adjacent side surface may also be formed to have a shape with a larger rounded corner than the connection portion between a second side surface and an adjacent side surface, the second side surface being the side surface opposite to the first side surface. The connection portion between a third side surface of the second operating device and an adjacent side surface may also be formed to have a larger rounded corner than the connection portion between a fourth side surface and an adjacent side surface, the fourth side surface being the side surface opposite to the third side surface.

The first operating device may be mounted on the main device with its second side facing the fifth side of the four side surfaces of the main device. The second operating device may be mounted on the main device with its fourth side facing the sixth side opposite to the fifth side of the main device.

The second operating device may include an input unit having a first function, and the first operating device may not have the first function.

The second operating device may include an imaging device as an input unit having the first function.

The second operating device may include a button as an input unit having the first function.

The first operating device may include an input unit having a second function different from the first function. The second operating device may also include an input unit having a second function.

The first operating device may include one or more input units having a predetermined number of types of functions. The second operating device may include one or more input units having a number of types of functions different from the predetermined number.

Alternatively, when the first operating device is installed on the main device, communication between the main device and the first operating device is performed using a first communication method; and when the first operating device is separated from the main device, communication between the main device and the first operating device is performed using a second communication method different from the first communication method.

Alternatively, when the first operating device is detached from the main device, the communication between the main device and the first operating device may be wireless communication.

Alternatively, when the first operating device is installed in the main device, the communication between the main device and the first operating device may be wired communication.

The wired communication between the main device and the first operating device may be performed via a wired communication path formed by electrically connecting a first terminal of the main device and a second terminal of the first operating device.

Alternatively, when the first operating device is installed on the main device, the first terminal of the main device is electrically connected to the second terminal of the first operating device, and communication between the main device and the first operating device and power supply from the main device to the first operating device are carried out via the first terminal and the second terminal.

The information processing system may also include: a first detection unit that detects whether the first operating device is attached to the main device; and a second detection unit that detects whether the second operating device is attached to the main device. The main device may also set a pair of the first operating device and the second operating device based on the detection results of the first detection unit and the second detection unit.

When both the first operating device and the second operating device are mounted on the main body device, the first operating device and the second operating device in the mounted state may be set as the same group.

Alternatively, when operation data are received respectively from the first operating device and the second operating device set to the same group while the first operating device and the second operating device are separated from the main device, the main device treats the two received operation data as a group to perform prescribed information processing.

The main device may also include a shell having a first engaging portion and a second engaging portion, wherein the first engaging portion engages with the shell of the first operating device when the first operating device is installed, and the second engaging portion engages with the shell of the second operating device when the second operating device is installed.

The first operating device may include a housing having a third engaging portion formed thereon, the third engaging portion engaging with the first engaging portion of the main device. The second operating device may include a housing having a fourth engaging portion formed thereon, the fourth engaging portion engaging with the second engaging portion of the main device.

The main device may selectively output the execution result of the information processing to either the display unit or a display device independent of the main device.

Another example of the present invention may include an information processing device comprising a first attachment and detachment mechanism, a second attachment and detachment mechanism, and a display unit. The first operating device can be attached to and detached from the first attachment and detachment mechanism. The second operating device can be attached to and detached from the second attachment and detachment mechanism. Regardless of whether the first operating device and the second operating device are attached to the information processing device, the information processing device displays the results of a predetermined information processing based on the operation data transmitted from the first operating device and the second operating device on the display unit.

Another example of the present invention is an information processing system including a main device and a first operating device.

The main device includes a display unit and a housing having a main body-side engaging portion that engages with the housing of the first operating device. The first operating device is detachably engaged with the main device via the main body-side engaging portion.

The first operating device may include a housing having an operating device-side engaging portion formed thereon to engage with the main body-side engaging portion.

The main body-side engaging portion may be a first sliding member disposed along a surface of the housing of the main device. The first operating device may also include a second sliding member that engages with the first sliding member in a manner that allows for sliding relative to and detachable from the first sliding member. The first and second sliding members may also form a sliding mechanism.

The first sliding member may be formed to engage with the second sliding member so as to be slidable in a predetermined direction, and the second sliding member may be inserted into and removed from one end of the predetermined direction.

The first sliding member may be provided along the vertical direction of the main body device and formed so that the second sliding member can be inserted into and removed from the upper end thereof.

The first sliding member may be provided on the surface of the housing of the main device over substantially the entire range in a predetermined direction.

The first sliding member may have a concave cross-sectional shape, and the second sliding member may have a convex cross-sectional shape.

The first operating device may include a terminal for communicating with the main device. The main device may include a terminal at a position of the housing that can be connected to the terminal of the first operating device when the first operating device is attached.

The first operating device may include an input unit provided on a predetermined surface.

Another example of the present invention is an information processing system including a main device and an operating device that is attachable to and detachable from the main device. The main device includes a display unit. When the operating device is attached to the main device, communication between the main device and the operating device utilizes a first communication method. When the operating device is detached from the main device, communication between the main device and the operating device utilizes a second communication method different from the first communication method.

The main device and the operating device may also perform wired communication as the first communication method.

Alternatively, when the operating device is mounted on the main body device, the first terminal of the main body device and the second terminal of the operating device may be electrically connected by abutting against each other.

The main device and the operating device may also perform wireless communication as a second communication method.

Another example of the present invention is an information processing system including a main device, a first operating device, a second operating device, and an accessory device. The first operating device is attachable to and detachable from the main device and also attachable to and detachable from the accessory device. The second operating device is attachable to and detachable from the main device and also attachable to and detachable from the accessory device. The main device includes a display unit that displays the results of predetermined information processing based on operations on the first and second operating devices. The accessory device can be equipped with both the first and second operating devices.

The accessory device may include a charging unit configured to charge the first operating device and/or the second operating device attached to the accessory device using the power supplied to the accessory device.

The first operating device may be installed on the left side of the center of the accessory device. The second operating device may be installed on the right side of the center of the accessory device.

The accessory device may include a first grip portion provided on the left side and a second grip portion provided on the right side.

The first grip portion may be provided on the left side of the portion where the first operating device is mounted. The second grip portion may be provided on the right side of the portion where the second operating device is mounted.

When the first operating device is installed in the accessory device, the communication between the main device and the first operating device may also be wireless communication. When the second operating device is installed in the accessory device, the communication between the main device and the second operating device may also be wireless communication.

The first operating device may be attached to the accessory device while being tilted in a first direction relative to a predetermined reference posture. The second operating device may be attached to the accessory device while being tilted in a direction opposite to the first direction relative to the predetermined reference posture.

Alternatively, when at least one of the first operating device and the second operating device is mounted on an accessory device, the main device may correct operating data from the mounted operating device and/or information obtained from the operating data to perform predetermined information processing.

The main device may also correct the data of the direction input unit in the operation data.

Another example of the present invention is an accessory device, in which a first operating device and a second operating device are attachable to and detachable from the accessory device.

The first operating device is attachable and detachable to a main device that is independent of the accessory device. The second operating device is attachable and detachable to the main device. The main device includes a display unit that displays the results of executing predetermined information processing based on operations on the first and second operating devices. The accessory device includes a first engaging portion that detachably engages the first operating device, and a second engaging portion that detachably engages the second operating device.

Another example of the present invention is a gaming system comprising a main device, a first operating device, and a second operating device. The main device includes a display unit. The first operating device is attachable to and detachable from the main device. The second operating device is attachable to and detachable from the main device. At least when the first and second operating devices are detached from the main device, the first and second operating devices transmit, respectively, operation data indicating operations performed on the first and second operating devices to the main device via wireless communication.

Another example of the present invention is a handheld information processing device. The information processing device includes a main body having a display unit, a first operating unit, and a second operating unit. The device performs predetermined information processing based on an operation on either the first operating unit or the second operating unit. The first operating unit is attachable to and detachable from the main body. The second operating unit is attachable to and detachable from the main body. When the first operating unit and the second operating unit are detached from the main body, the main body performs predetermined information processing based on at least operational data indicating an operation on either the first operating unit or the second operating unit, and causes the display unit to display the result of the information processing.

The first operating portion and the second operating portion may be arranged so that a user can operate the first operating portion with one hand and the second operating portion with the other hand when the first operating portion and the second operating portion are attached to the main body.

Another example of the present invention may be an information processing device, operating device, or accessory device in the above-mentioned information processing system. Another example of the present invention may be a method executed in the above-mentioned information processing system. Another example of the present invention may be an information processing program that causes a computer to execute several of the processes executed in the above-mentioned information processing system or information processing device (in other words, causes the computer to function as several of the various units in the information processing system or information processing device).

Effects of the Invention

According to the present invention, the information processing device and/or the information processing system can be utilized in a variety of ways.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an example of an information processing device according to this embodiment.

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a state in which each controller is removed from the main device.

FIG3 is a six-sided view showing an example of the main body device.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a state where the main body device is placed upright.

FIG. 5 is a six-view diagram showing an example of a left controller.

FIG. 6 is a six-view diagram showing an example of a right controller.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of a state in which the left rail member and the slider are engaged.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an example of the situation before and after the slider is fixed to the left rail member.

FIG9 is a left side view showing an example of the main body device in the second structural example.

FIG10 is a perspective view showing an example of the left side portion of the main body device in the second structural example.

FIG11 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a cross section of the left rail member on the A-A’ cross section shown in FIG9 .

FIG12 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a cross section of the left rail member on the B-B’ cross section shown in FIG9 .

FIG13 is a perspective view showing an example of a terminal provided in the main body device.

FIG14 is a six-sided view showing an example of a left controller in the second structural example.

FIG. 15 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a cross section near the lower end portion of the slider in the second configuration example.

FIG. 16 is a perspective view showing an example of a protruding portion of the slider in the second configuration example.

FIG. 17 is an exploded view showing an example of a reinforcing member and an insulating sheet provided in a slider.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of a state in which a hook portion is inserted into a slit.

FIG19 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the configuration of internal components of the left controller 3. In FIG.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of how terminals and ground connection portions are connected in an electronic circuit.

FIG. 21 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the positional relationship between the slider and the locking member in the second structural example.

FIG. 22 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the positional relationship between the slider and the locking member in another embodiment.

FIG. 23 is a perspective view schematically showing an example of a locking member and a release button.

FIG. 24 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the configuration of the slider near the second L button in the second configuration example.

Figure 25 is a six-sided view of an example of the right controller in the second structural example.

FIG. 26 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a situation near each left terminal before and after the slider is mounted on the left rail member.

FIG. 27 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a situation in the vicinity of a locking member before and after the slider is attached to the left rail member.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an overall configuration of an example of an information processing system according to this embodiment.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an external appearance structure of an example of a bracket.

FIG30 is a block diagram showing an example of the internal structure of the main device.

FIG31 is a block diagram showing an example of the internal structure of an information processing device.

FIG32 is a block diagram showing an example of the internal structure of the bracket.

FIG33 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which the information processing device is used with each controller mounted on the main device.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which a user uses the information processing device by holding two controllers in the detached state.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which two users each hold a controller and use the information processing device in the disconnected state.

FIG36 is a diagram showing an example of a method of holding the right controller with one hand.

FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of a usage pattern when three or more controllers are used.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of a usage mode when an image is displayed on a television.

FIG39 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of operations when an image is displayed on a television.

FIG40 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of registration processing executed in the main device.

FIG41 is a diagram showing an example of registration information.

FIG42 is a diagram showing an example of group information.

FIG43 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of wireless setting processing executed in the main device.

FIG44 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the mode setting process executed in the main device.

FIG45 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of information processing performed in the main device.

FIG46 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of information processing performed in the main device.

FIG47 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of information processing performed in the main device.

FIG48 is a diagram showing another example of a left controller.

FIG49 is a diagram showing another example of a left controller.

FIG50 is a diagram showing an example of an information processing device equipped with a right controller different from that in FIG1 .

FIG51 is a diagram showing another example of a left controller.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of accessory equipment to which the controller can be mounted.

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing another example of accessory equipment.

Figure 54 is a six-sided view showing another example of an extended grip.

Figure 55 is a three-dimensional view of an example of the extended grip shown in Figure 54.

Figure 56 is a diagram showing an example of a state in which two controllers are installed on the extended grip shown in Figure 54.

Figure 57 is a block diagram showing an example of the internal structure of the extended grip shown in Figure 54.

FIG58 is a diagram showing an example of the structure of an extended grip in which the main body is movable.

FIG59 is a diagram showing an example of a structure of an extended grip in which the distance between the grip portion and the controller is variable.

FIG60 is a diagram showing an example of an accessory device that can be mounted on the main device.

FIG61 is a diagram showing another example of a sliding member provided in the main device.

FIG62 is a diagram showing another example of a sliding member provided in the right controller.

FIG63 is a diagram showing an example of terminal arrangement in another embodiment.

Description of Reference Numerals

1: Information processing device; 2: Main device; 3: Left controller; 4: Right controller; 5: Bracket; 6: TV; 11: Housing; 12: Display; 15: Left rail member; 17: Left terminal; 19: Right rail member; 21: Right terminal; 27: Lower terminal; 40, 62: Sliders; 42, 64: Terminals; 73: Main terminal; 81: CPU; 83: Controller communication unit; 101, 111: Communication control unit; 300: Left rail member; 301: Bottom portion; 302: Side portion ; 303: protrusion; 304: facing portion; 310, 330: main body; 311, 331: slider; 319, 339: locking member; 313, 333: release button; 321: protrusion; 325: shaft; 326: top portion; 350: extended grip; 351: main body; 352: supporting portion; 353: left grip; 354: right grip; 355: connecting portion; 358: light guide portion; 366: power supply control portion; 367: left terminal; 368: right terminal.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

The following describes an information processing system, an information processing device, an operating device, and ancillary equipment involved in an example of the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the information processing system includes an information processing device 1 and a cradle 5 (refer to FIG28 ). In the information processing device 1 in the present embodiment, the main device 2 and the controllers 3 and 4 can be loaded and unloaded, and the controllers 3 and 4 can be used independently relative to the main device 2 (refer to FIG2 ). In addition, the information processing device 1 can have two utilization modes: a mode of displaying an image on the main device 2 and a mode of displaying an image on other display devices such as a television. In the former mode, the information processing device 1 is used as a portable device (for example, a portable game console), and in the latter mode, the information processing device 1 is used as a stationary device (for example, a stationary game console).

[1. System appearance and structure]

[1-1. Configuration of Information Processing Device]

FIG1 is a diagram illustrating an example of an information processing device 1 according to this embodiment. As shown in FIG1 , information processing device 1 includes a main device 2, a left controller 3, and a right controller 4. Main device 2 includes a display 12 and executes various processes within information processing device 1. Controllers 3 and 4 each include an operation unit for user input.

Figure 2 is a diagram showing an example of a state after the controllers 3 and 4 are removed from the main device 2. As shown in Figures 1 and 2, the controllers 3 and 4 can be loaded and unloaded relative to the main device 2. The left controller 3 can be installed on the left side of the main device 2 (the positive side of the x-axis shown in Figure 1). The right controller 4 can be installed on the right side of the main device 2 (the negative side of the x-axis shown in Figure 1). In addition, hereinafter, it is sometimes recorded as a general term for the left controller and the right controller as "controller". Below, an example of the specific structure of the main device 2 and the controllers 3 and 4 is described.

[1-1-1. Structure of the main device]

FIG3 is a six-sided view showing an example of a main device. As shown in FIG3 , the main device 2 includes a housing 11 that is roughly plate-shaped. In the present embodiment, the main surface of the housing 11 (in other words, the surface on the front side, i.e., the surface on which the display 12 is provided) is roughly rectangular. In the present embodiment, the housing 11 is horizontally long. That is, in the present embodiment, the long side direction of the main surface of the housing 11 (i.e., the x-axis direction shown in FIG1 ) is set to the horizontal direction (also called the left-right direction), the short side direction of the main surface (i.e., the y-axis direction shown in FIG1 ) is set to the vertical direction (also called the up-down direction), and the direction perpendicular to the main surface (i.e., the z-axis direction shown in FIG1 ) is set to the depth direction (also called the front-back direction). In addition, the main device 2 can be used in a manner such that the long side direction of the main device 2 is oriented horizontally, or it can be used in a manner such that the long side direction of the main device 2 is oriented vertically.

The shape and size of the housing 11 are arbitrary. For example, in other embodiments, the housing 11 may have a protrusion or a grip portion for making it easier for the user to hold the housing 11.

(Structure provided on the main surface of the housing 11)

As shown in FIG3 , the main device 2 includes a display 12 provided on the main surface of the housing 11. The display 12 displays images (which may be still images or moving images) acquired or generated by the main device 2. In this embodiment, the display 12 is a liquid crystal display (LCD), but the display 12 may be any type of display device.

In addition, the main device 2 includes a touch panel 13 on the screen of the display 12. The touch panel 13 can also detect touch position, touch pressure, and/or other characteristics related to touch input. In this embodiment, the touch panel 13 is a touch panel capable of multi-touch input (e.g., a capacitive touch panel). However, the touch panel 13 can be any type of touch panel, for example, a touch panel capable of single-touch input (e.g., a resistive touch panel).

The main unit 2 includes a speaker (i.e., the speaker 88 shown in FIG30 ) inside the housing 11. As shown in FIG3 , speaker holes 11a and 11b are formed on the main surface of the housing 11. The output sound of the speaker 88 is output from these speaker holes 11a and 11b. In this embodiment, the main unit 2 includes two speakers, and each speaker hole is provided at the position of the left speaker and the right speaker. The speaker hole 11a for the left speaker is formed on the left side of the display 12. The speaker hole 11b for the right speaker is formed on the right side of the display 12.

In addition, the main device 2 includes an ambient light sensor (i.e., ambient light sensor 94 shown in FIG30 ) inside the housing 11. As shown in FIG3 , a window 14 is provided on the main surface of the housing 11 for inputting light from outside the housing 11 into the ambient light sensor 94. The window 14 is formed, for example, from a transparent member that transmits light or a filter member that transmits light of a predetermined wavelength that can be detected by the ambient light sensor 94.

Furthermore, the position, shape, and number of the speaker holes 11a and 11b and the window 14 are arbitrary. For example, in other embodiments, the speaker holes 11a and 11b may be formed on the side or back of the housing 11. Furthermore, while the window 14 is positioned to the lower left of the display 12 in this embodiment, it may also be positioned elsewhere on the main surface of the housing 11, or even on the side of the housing 11.

(Structure provided on the left side of the housing 11)

As shown in Figure 3, the main device 2 has a left rail member 15 on the left side of the shell 11. The left rail member 15 is a member for mounting the left controller 3 on the main device 2 in a detachable manner. The user can easily mechanically and electrically connect the left controller 3 to the main device 2, and can make the left controller 3 and the main device 2 function as a single device. In addition, the user can easily remove the left controller 3 from the main device 2, and can operate the left controller 3 and the main device 2 in a state where the left controller 3 is mechanically separated from the main device 2. The left rail member 15 is arranged to extend in the up and down direction on the left side of the shell 11. The left rail member 15 has a shape that can engage with the slider of the left controller 3 (i.e., the slider 40 shown in Figure 5). A sliding mechanism is formed by the left rail member 15 and the slider 40, and the details will be described later. Through this sliding mechanism, the left controller 3 can be mounted on the main device 2 in a manner that is slidable and detachable relative to the main device 2.

In the present embodiment, the left rail member 15 is in the shape of a groove. In other words, the cross section of the left rail member 15 (specifically, the cross section perpendicular to the up and down directions) has a concave shape. More specifically, the cross section of the left rail member 15 is a shape in which the end of the cross section faces in a direction from the outside to the center. Therefore, the slider 40 engaged with the left rail member 15 is fixed in a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction (in other words, the direction in which the left rail member 15 extends) and will not fall off (refer to Figure 7 described later).

As shown in Figure 3, an engaging hole 16 is formed at the left rail member 15. The engaging hole 16 is provided at a position opposite to the protrusion 41 provided on the slider 40 when the left controller 3 is installed on the main device 2. The specific position of the engaging hole 16 is arbitrary. In the present embodiment, the engaging hole 16 is provided on the bottom surface of the left rail member 15 (in other words, the bottom surface of the groove of the left rail member 15). In addition, the engaging hole 16 is formed into a shape capable of engaging the above-mentioned protrusion (i.e., the protrusion 41 shown in Figure 5). When the left controller 3 is installed on the main device 2, the protrusion 41 is inserted into the engaging hole 16 to engage with the engaging hole 16, thereby fixing the left controller 3 to the main device 2, and the details will be described later. In addition, in other embodiments, the protrusion may be provided at the left rail member 15 and the engaging hole may be provided at the slider 40.

In addition, the main unit 2 has a left terminal 17. The left terminal 17 is a terminal for wired communication between the main unit 2 and the left controller 3. That is, when the left controller 3 is installed on the main unit 2, the left controller 3 and the main unit 2 can communicate via the left terminal 17. The left terminal 17 is arranged at a position that contacts the terminal of the left controller 3 (the terminal 42 shown in Figure 5) when the left controller 3 is installed on the main unit 2. The specific position of the left terminal 17 is arbitrary. In the present embodiment, as shown in Figure 3, the left terminal 17 is arranged on the bottom surface of the left rail member 15. In addition, in the present embodiment, the left terminal 17 is arranged near the lower end of the bottom surface of the left rail member 15. The left terminal 17 is arranged at a position lower than the above-mentioned engaging hole 16 (in other words, the deep side when the direction of inserting the slider 40 into the left rail member 15 is used as a reference).

A stopper 18 is provided on the left side of the housing 11. As shown in FIG3 , the stopper 18 is provided near the end of the left rail member 15 (in this embodiment, near the lower end). The stopper 18 is provided inside a groove of the left rail member 15. The stopper 18 is provided to stop the sliding movement of the slider 40 engaged with the left rail member 15, and details will be described later.

(Structure provided on the right side of the housing 11)

As shown in Figure 3, a structure identical to the structure provided on the left side is provided on the right side of the shell 11. That is, the main device 2 has a right rail member 19 on the right side of the shell 11. The right rail member 19 is provided to extend in the up and down directions on the right side of the shell 11. The right rail member 19 has a shape that can be engaged with the slider of the right controller 4 (that is, the slider 62 shown in Figure 6). A sliding mechanism is formed by the right rail member 19 and the slider 62, and the details will be described later. Through this sliding mechanism, the right controller 4 can be installed on the main device 2 in a manner that is slidable and removable relative to the main device 2.

In the present embodiment, the right rail member 19 has the same shape as the left rail member 15. That is, the right rail member 19 has a shape having a groove that forms the same cross-sectional shape as the left rail member 15. However, the right rail member 19 does not have to be exactly the same shape as the left rail member 15. For example, in other embodiments, the size and/or shape of the groove of the left rail member 15 and the groove of the right rail member 19 may be different, so that the slider 62 of the right controller 4 cannot engage with the left rail member 15 (and/or the slider 40 of the left controller 3 cannot engage with the right rail member 19).

As shown in Figure 3, an engaging hole 20 is formed at the right rail member 19. The engaging hole 20 is provided at a position opposite to the protrusion 63 provided on the slider 62 when the right controller 4 is installed on the main device 2. The specific position of the engaging hole 20 is arbitrary. In the present embodiment, the engaging hole 20 is provided on the bottom surface of the right rail member 19 (in other words, the bottom surface of the groove of the right rail member 19). The engaging hole 20 is formed into a shape capable of engaging the above-mentioned protrusion (i.e., the protrusion 63 shown in Figure 6). When the right controller 4 is installed on the main device 2, the protrusion 63 is inserted into the engaging hole 20 to engage with the engaging hole 20, thereby fixing the right controller 4 to the main device 2, and the details will be described later. In addition, in other embodiments, the protrusion may be provided at the right rail member 19 and the engaging hole may be provided at the slider 62.

In addition, the main unit 2 has a right-side terminal 21. The right-side terminal 21 is a terminal for wired communication between the main unit 2 and the right controller 4. The right-side terminal 21 is arranged at a position that contacts the terminal of the right controller 4 (terminal 64 shown in Figure 6) when the right controller 4 is installed on the main unit 2. The specific position of the right-side terminal 21 is arbitrary. In the present embodiment, as shown in Figure 3, the right-side terminal 21 is arranged on the bottom surface of the right rail member 19. In addition, in the present embodiment, the right-side terminal 21 is arranged near the lower end of the bottom surface of the right rail member 19. The right-side terminal 21 is arranged at a position lower than the above-mentioned engaging hole 20 (in other words, the deep side when the direction of inserting the slider 62 into the right rail member 19 is used as a reference).

A stopper 22 is provided on the right side of the housing 11. As shown in FIG3 , the stopper 22 is provided near the end of the right rail member 19 (in this embodiment, near the lower end). The stopper 22 is provided inside a groove of the right rail member 19. The stopper 22 is provided to stop the sliding movement of the slider 62 engaged with the right rail member 19, and details will be described later.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a left rail member 15 and a right rail member 19 are provided at the housing 11 of the main device 2. In this way, the housing 11 becomes a structure based on the installation of the controller. In addition, the position, shape and size of each of the above-mentioned rail members 15 and 19 are arbitrary. For example, in other embodiments, each of the rail members 15 and 19 may also be respectively provided at the left and right ends of the main surface and/or back of the housing 11. In addition, the mechanism for installing the main device 2 and each of the controllers 3 and 4 in a manner that allows them to be loaded and unloaded is arbitrary, and a sliding mechanism different from the sliding mechanism in the present embodiment may be used, and a mechanism different from the sliding mechanism may also be used.

(Structure provided on the upper side of the housing 11)

As shown in Figure 3, the main device 2 has a first slot 23. The first slot 23 is provided on the upper side of the housing 11. The first slot 23 has a shape that can be used to install a first type of storage medium. In addition, in the present embodiment, a cover portion that can be opened and closed is provided at the opening portion of the first slot 23, and when the cover portion is opened, the first type of storage medium can be inserted into the first slot 23. The first type of storage medium is, for example, a storage medium dedicated to the information processing device 1 and an information processing device of the same type (for example, a dedicated memory card). The first type of storage medium is used, for example, to store data used in the main device 2 (for example, saved data of an application, etc.) and/or a program executed in the main device 2 (for example, a program of an application, etc.).

In addition, the main device 2 has a power button 28. As shown in Figure 3, the power button 28 is provided on the upper side of the housing 11. The power button 28 is a button for switching the power of the main device 2 on/off. In addition, in this embodiment, it is provided that the power button 28 can be used to switch between an on mode and a sleep mode. Here, the on mode is, for example, a mode in which the screen display of the display 12 is performed, and the sleep mode is, for example, a mode in which the screen display of the display 12 is suspended. In addition, in the sleep mode, a specified process in the application being executed (for example, a game process in a game application) can also be suspended while (or instead of) the screen display of the display 12 is suspended. When the power button 28 is long-pressed (specifically, when the power button 28 is pressed for more than a specified time), the main device 2 performs the process of switching the power of the main device 2 on/off. On the other hand, when the power button 28 is short-pressed (specifically, when the power button 28 is pressed for a time shorter than the above-mentioned specified time), the main device 2 performs processing to switch between the on mode and the sleep mode.

As described above, in this embodiment, the power button 28 can switch the power on/off and switch between the on mode and the sleep mode. In addition, in other embodiments, a button having only the function of switching the power on/off or only the function of switching between the on mode and the sleep mode may be provided in the main device 2.

The main device 2 includes an audio input/output terminal (specifically, an earphone jack) 25. Specifically, the main device 2 can be connected to a microphone or earphones at the audio input/output terminal 25. As shown in FIG3 , the audio input/output terminal 25 is provided on the upper side of the housing 11.

The main device 2 includes volume buttons 26a and 26b. As shown in FIG3 , the volume buttons 26a and 26b are located on the upper side of the housing 11. The volume buttons 26a and 26b are used to adjust the volume output by the main device 2. Specifically, the volume button 26a is used to decrease the volume, and the volume button 26b is used to increase the volume.

Furthermore, an exhaust hole 11c is formed in the housing 11. As shown in FIG3 , the exhaust hole 11c is formed on the upper side of the housing 11. The exhaust hole 11c is formed to discharge (in other words, release) heat generated inside the housing 11 to the outside of the housing 11.

(Structure provided on the lower side of the housing 11)

The main device 2 has a lower terminal 27. The lower terminal 27 is a terminal used for communication between the main device 2 and the bracket 5 described later. As shown in Figure 3, the lower terminal 27 is provided on the lower side of the housing 11. When the main device 2 is mounted on the bracket 5, the lower terminal 27 is connected to the terminal of the bracket 5 (the main terminal 73 shown in Figure 29), as described in detail later. In this embodiment, the lower terminal 27 is a USB connector (more specifically, a female side connector).

In addition, the main unit 2 has a second slot 24. In the present embodiment, the second slot 24 is provided on the lower side surface of the housing 11. However, in other embodiments, the second slot 24 may be provided on the same surface as the first slot 23. The second slot 24 has a shape capable of installing a second type of storage medium that is different from the first type. In addition, in the present embodiment, a cover portion that can be opened and closed is provided at the opening portion of the second slot 24, and the second type of storage medium can be inserted into the second slot 24 when the cover portion is opened. The second type of storage medium may be, for example, a general-purpose storage medium or an SD card. The second type of storage medium is used, for example, like the first type of storage medium, to store data used in the main unit 2 (for example, saved data of an application, etc.) and/or programs executed in the main unit 2 (for example, programs of an application, etc.).

In addition, an air intake hole 11d is formed in the housing 11. As shown in Figure 3, the air intake hole 11d is formed on the lower side of the housing 11. The air intake hole 11d is formed to draw (in other words, introduce) air from outside the housing 11 into the interior of the housing 11. In this embodiment, the air intake hole 11d is formed on the surface opposite to the surface where the exhaust hole 11c is formed, thereby enabling efficient heat dissipation within the housing 11.

The main device 2 also includes a stand member 29 for supporting the housing in an upright position. As shown in FIG3 , the stand member 29 is disposed on the lower side of the housing 11. The stand member 29 is rotatably connected to the housing 11 via a shaft 29a. In FIG3 , the stand member 29 is housed in the housing 11.

FIG4 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which the main device 2 is placed upright. In addition, in FIG4, in order to make the structure of the key part explained using this figure easier to observe, several other structures in the main device 2 are omitted. Here, the rod-shaped portion of the bracket member 29 is rotated about the shaft portion 29a as an axis so as to protrude from the housing 11. Therefore, by making the bracket member 29 protrude from the housing 11, the main device 2 can be placed upright as shown in FIG4. In addition, the mechanism for placing the main device 2 upright is arbitrary and is not limited to the bracket member 29 shown in FIG3.

The shape, number, and placement of the various components (specifically, buttons, slots, terminals, etc.) provided on the housing 11 described above are arbitrary. For example, in other embodiments, the power button 28 and some of the slots 23 and 24 may be provided on other side surfaces or the back surface of the housing 11. Furthermore, in other embodiments, the main device 2 may not include some of the aforementioned components.

[1-1-2. Structure of the left controller]

FIG5 is a six-sided view showing an example of the left controller 3. As shown in FIG5 , the left controller 3 has a roughly plate-shaped housing 31. In the present embodiment, the main surface of the housing 31 (in other words, the surface on the front side, i.e., the surface on the negative side of the z-axis shown in FIG1 ) is roughly rectangular. In addition, in the present embodiment, the housing 31 is longitudinally elongated, i.e., long in the up-down direction (i.e., the y-axis direction shown in FIG1 ). In addition, when the left controller 3 is detached from the main unit 2, the left controller 3 can be held with the long side of the left controller 3 facing longitudinally (see FIG38 ), or can be held with the long side of the left controller 3 facing transversely (see FIG35 ). In addition, the shape of the housing 31 is arbitrary, and in other embodiments, the housing 31 may not be roughly plate-shaped. In addition, the housing 31 may not be rectangular, for example, it may be semicircular, etc. In addition, the housing 31 may not be longitudinally elongated.

The vertical length of the housing 31 is substantially the same as the vertical length of the housing 11 of the main device 2. Furthermore, the thickness of the housing 31 (i.e., the length in the front-to-back direction, in other words, the length in the z-axis direction shown in FIG1 ) is substantially the same as the thickness of the housing 11 of the main device 2. Therefore, when the left controller 3 is attached to the main device 2 (see FIG1 ), the user can hold the main device 2 and the left controller 3 as if they were a single unit.

In addition, as shown in FIG5 , the main surface of the housing 31 is shaped as follows: the corner portion on the left side has a larger rounded corner than the corner portion on the right side. That is, the connection portion between the upper side surface of the housing 31 and the left side surface, as well as the connection portion between the lower side surface of the housing 31 and the left side surface, are more rounded (in other words, the chamfer R is larger) than the connection portion between the upper side surface of the housing 31 and the right side surface, as well as the connection portion between the lower side surface of the housing 31 and the right side surface. Therefore, when the left controller 3 is installed on the main device 2 (refer to FIG1 ), the left side of the information processing device 1 has a rounded corner shape, making it easy for the user to hold.

The left controller 3 has an analog stick 32. As shown in Figure 5, the analog stick 32 is provided on the main surface of the shell 31. The analog stick 32 is an example of a directional input unit capable of inputting a direction. The analog stick 32 has a stick component that can be tilted in all directions parallel to the main surface of the shell 31 (i.e., 360° directions including up, down, left, right, and diagonal directions). The user can input a direction corresponding to the tilting direction (and input a size corresponding to the tilting angle) by tilting the stick component. In addition, the directional input unit can also be a cross key or a sliding stick. The sliding stick is an input unit having a stick component that can slide in all directions parallel to the main surface of the shell 31, and the user can input an input corresponding to the sliding direction (and input a size corresponding to the sliding amount) by sliding the stick component. In addition, in this embodiment, input can be performed by pressing the stick component (in a direction perpendicular to the shell 31). That is, the analog joystick 32 is an input unit that enables input of a direction and a size according to the tilting direction and tilting amount of the joystick member, as well as input of pressing the joystick member.

The left controller 3 has four operation buttons 33 to 36 (specifically, a right direction button 33, a down direction button 34, an up direction button 35, and a left direction button 36). As shown in Figure 5, these four operation buttons 33 to 36 are provided on the main surface of the housing 31 on the lower side of the analog joystick 32. In addition, in this embodiment, the operation buttons provided on the main surface of the left controller 3 are set to 4, but the number of operation buttons is arbitrary. These operation buttons 33 to 36 are used to perform instructions corresponding to various programs (for example, OS programs, applications) executed in the main device 2. In addition, in this embodiment, each operation button 33 to 36 can also be used for directional input, so each operation button 33 to 36 is referred to as the right direction button 33, the down direction button 34, the up direction button 35, and the left direction button 36. However, each operation button 33 to 36 can also be used for instructions other than directional input.

The left controller 3 also includes a record button 37. As shown in Figure 5, the record button 37 is located on the main surface of the housing 31, more specifically, in the lower right area of the main surface. The record button 37 is used to instruct the user to save an image displayed on the display 12 of the main device 2. For example, if a game image is displayed on the display 12, the user can press the record button 37 to save the game image displayed at the time of the press, for example, to the storage unit of the main device 2.

The left controller 3 also includes a - (minus) button 47. As shown in Figure 5, the - button 47 is located on the main surface of the housing 31, more specifically, in the upper right area of the main surface. The - button 47 is used to issue instructions corresponding to various programs (e.g., OS programs, applications) executed on the main device 2. The - button 47 is used, for example, as a selection button (e.g., a button for switching selected items) in gaming applications.

When the left controller 3 is attached to the main unit 2, the operating units (specifically, the analog stick 32 and the aforementioned buttons 33 to 37, 47) provided on the main surface of the left controller 3 are operated by, for example, the thumb of the left hand of the user holding the information processing device 1 (see FIG33 ). Furthermore, when the left controller 3 is used while detached from the main unit 2, the operating units are operated by, for example, the thumbs of the left and right hands of the user holding the left controller 3 (see FIG34 ). Specifically, in this case, the analog stick 32 is operated by the thumb of the user's left hand, and the operating buttons 33 to 36 are operated by the thumb of the user's right hand.

The left controller 3 has a first L button 38. In addition, the left controller 3 has a ZL button 39. These operation buttons 38 and 39, like the above-mentioned operation buttons 33 to 36, are used to perform instructions corresponding to various programs executed in the main device 2. As shown in Figure 5, the first L button 38 is provided in the upper left part of the side of the shell 31. In addition, the ZL button 39 is provided in the upper left part from the side to the back of the shell 31 (strictly speaking, the upper left part when the shell 31 is viewed from the front side). In other words, the ZL button 39 is provided on the rear side of the first L button 38 (the positive direction side of the z-axis shown in Figure 1). In this embodiment, the upper left part of the shell 31 has a rounded shape, so the first L button 38 and the ZL button 39 have a shape with rounded corners corresponding to the rounded corners of the upper left part of the shell 31.

When the left controller 3 is attached to the main device 2, the first L button 38 and the ZL button 39 are located in the upper left portion of the information processing device 1 (see FIG1 ). Therefore, a user holding the information processing device 1 can operate the first L button 38 and the ZL button 39 with the index and middle fingers of their left hand (see FIG33 ).

As shown in FIG5 , the portion of the back surface of the housing 31 where the ZL button 39 is provided (more specifically, at least a portion around the ZL button 39) protrudes more than the other portions of the housing 31. Furthermore, the ZL button 39 is provided so as to protrude relative to the other portions of the back surface of the housing 31. Thus, when the main unit 2 with the left controller 3 mounted thereon is placed on a loading surface in an orientation such that the back surface of the left controller 3 faces the horizontal loading surface, the protruding portion of the housing 31 abuts against the loading surface. As a result, the information processing device 1 is placed so that the upper side of the main unit 2 is slightly higher than the lower side. When the information processing device 1 is placed as described above, it is easy for the user to view the display 12.

Furthermore, in other embodiments, when the main unit 2 on which the left controller 3 is mounted is placed on a loading surface in an orientation such that the back of the left controller 3 faces the horizontal loading surface, the ZL button 39 may abut against the loading surface. Here, in this embodiment, the ZL button 39 can be pressed mainly in the up-down direction (y-axis direction). That is, the ZL button 39 is supported on the housing 31 in a manner that allows it to move mainly in the up-down direction. Therefore, even when the information processing device 1 is placed in a manner such that the ZL button 39 abuts against the loading surface as described above, the ZL button 39 is not easily pressed because the force is mainly applied to the ZL button 39 in the front-to-back direction (z-axis direction). That is, even when the information processing device 1 is placed as described above, the possibility of accidentally pressing the ZL button 39 is small.

In other embodiments, the ZL button 39 may be formed so as not to protrude from the rear surface of the housing 31. For example, the ZL button 39 may be provided on the side surface of the housing 31. Alternatively, for example, the portion of the rear surface of the housing 31 where the ZL button 39 is provided may be formed to be recessed relative to other portions (i.e., thinner than other portions), thereby preventing the ZL button 39 from protruding relative to the other portions.

The left controller 3 has the above-mentioned slider 40. As shown in Figure 5, the slider 40 is arranged to extend in the up-down direction on the right side of the housing 31. The slider 40 has a shape that can be engaged with the left rail member 15 of the main device 2 (more specifically, the groove of the left rail member 15). Specifically, the cross-section of the slider 40 (specifically, the cross-section perpendicular to the up-down direction) has a convex shape. More specifically, the cross-section of the slider 40 has a T-shape corresponding to the cross-sectional shape of the left rail member 15 (refer to Figure 7). Therefore, the slider 40 engaged with the left rail member 15 is fixed in a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction (in other words, the direction in which the left rail member 15 extends) and will not fall off (refer to Figure 7 described later).

In addition, as shown in Figure 5, a protrusion 41 is provided at the slider 40. The protrusion 41 is arranged at a position to be inserted into the above-mentioned engaging hole 16 when the left controller 3 is installed on the main device 2. The specific position of the protrusion 41 is arbitrary. In the present embodiment, the protrusion 41 is provided on the mounting surface of the slider 40. In addition, the mounting surface of the slider 40 refers to the surface facing the bottom surface of the left rail member 15 when the left controller 3 is installed on the main device 2. In addition, the protrusion 41 is formed into a shape that can be engaged with the engaging hole 16 of the left rail member 15.

In the present embodiment, a force is applied to the protrusion 41 from the inner side to the outer side of the slider 40. Thus, by applying a force from the outer side to the inner side of the slider 40 to the protrusion 41, the protrusion 41 moves toward the inside of the slider 40 (i.e., retreats toward the inner side of the slider 40). The structure for applying the force to the protrusion 41 as described above is arbitrary. For example, in the present embodiment, the protrusion 41 is connected to the elastic body inside the slider 40 so that a portion of the protrusion 41 is configured to protrude from the hole formed in the slider 40 relative to the mounting surface of the slider 40. In addition, in other embodiments, the protrusion 41 may also be provided to be fixed relative to the slider 40.

In addition, the left controller 3 has a terminal 42 for wired communication between the left controller 3 and the main device 2. The terminal 42 is provided at a position in contact with the left terminal 17 (FIG. 3) of the main device 2 when the left controller 3 is mounted on the main device 2. The specific position of the terminal 42 is arbitrary. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG5 , the terminal 42 is provided on the mounting surface of the slider 40. In addition, in the present embodiment, the terminal 42 is provided near the lower end of the mounting surface of the slider 40. The terminal 42 is provided at a position lower than the above-mentioned protrusion 41 (in other words, the top side when the slider 40 is inserted into the left rail member 15).

The left controller 3 also includes a second L button 43 and a second R button 44. These buttons 43 and 44, like the other operation buttons 33 to 36, are used to issue instructions corresponding to various programs executed on the main device 2. As shown in Figure 5, the second L button 43 and the second R button 44 are located on the mounting surface of the slider 40. The second L button 43 is located above the center in the vertical direction (the y-axis direction shown in Figure 1) of the mounting surface of the slider 40. The second R button 44 is located below the center in the vertical direction of the mounting surface of the slider 40. The second L button 43 and the second R button 44 are located in a position that cannot be pressed when the left controller 3 is mounted on the main device 2. In other words, the second L button 43 and the second R button 44 are used when the left controller 3 is detached from the main device 2. The second L button 43 and the second R button 44 are operated, for example, by the index or middle finger of the left or right hand of the user holding the left controller 3 detached from the main device 2 (see Figure 35).

The left controller 3 is provided with a notification LED 45. The notification LED 45 is a notification unit for notifying the user of specified information. The information notified by the notification LED 45 is arbitrary. In the present embodiment, when the main device 2 communicates with a plurality of controllers, the notification LED 45 shows the user information for identifying each controller. Specifically, the left controller 3 is provided with LEDs as the number of left controllers (here, 4) that the main device 2 can communicate with simultaneously as notification LEDs 45. Moreover, the LED corresponding to the number of the controller among the 4 LEDs lights up. Accordingly, the user can be notified of the above number through the notification LED 45.

In other embodiments, the notification LED 45 may also notify the user of a status related to communication between the left controller 3 and the main device 2. For example, the notification LED 45 may light up when communication with the main device 2 is established. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of LEDs (in other words, light-emitting units) functioning as the notification LED 45 is set to four, but the number of LEDs is arbitrary.

In this embodiment, the notification LED 45 is provided on the mounting surface of the slider 40 as shown in FIG5 . Thus, the notification LED 45 is arranged in a position that is not visible when the left controller 3 is mounted on the main unit 2. In other words, the notification LED 45 is used when the left controller 3 is detached from the main unit 2.

The left controller 3 includes a pairing button 46. In this embodiment, the pairing button 46 is used to instruct the setup process (also called pairing) related to wireless communication between the left controller 3 and the main device 2, and to instruct the reset process of the left controller 3. In other embodiments, the pairing button 46 may have only one of the above-mentioned setup and reset functions.

That is, when the pairing button 46 is short-pressed (specifically, when the pairing button 46 is pressed for a time shorter than a predetermined time), the left controller 3 executes the above-mentioned setting process.

In addition, when the pairing button 46 is long-pressed (specifically, when the pairing button 46 is pressed for more than the above-mentioned prescribed time), the left controller 3 performs a reset process. The reset process is a process for resetting the state of the left controller 3, and is a process that should be performed, for example, when the left controller 3 is frozen (for example, when the main device 2 cannot obtain data from the left controller 3). The specific content of the reset process is arbitrary, and the reset process can be, for example, a process of temporarily turning off the power of the left controller 3 and then turning it on again, a process of temporarily cutting off the communication with the main device 2 and then restarting it, a process of re-executing the process executed at the beginning of the communication, and/or the above-mentioned setting process. Through the above-mentioned pairing button 46, in this embodiment, even if the left controller 3 is frozen for some reason, the left controller 3 can be reset to a usable state.

In this embodiment, the pairing button 46 is provided on the mounting surface of the slider 40, as shown in FIG5 . Thus, the pairing button 46 is located in a position that is invisible when the left controller 3 is mounted on the main device 2. In other words, the pairing button 46 is used when the left controller 3 is detached from the main device 2. In this embodiment, the likelihood of pressing the pairing button 46 while the left controller 3 is detached from the main device 2 is lower than when the left controller 3 is mounted on the main device 2. Therefore, the pairing button 46 is located in the aforementioned position to prevent accidental operation of the pairing button 46 while the left controller 3 is mounted on the main device 2.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the buttons (specifically, the second L button 43, the second R button 44, and the pairing button 46) provided on the mounting surface of the slider 40 are arranged so as not to protrude relative to the mounting surface. Specifically, the upper surfaces (in other words, the lower surfaces) of these buttons are positioned flush with the mounting surface of the slider 40, or recessed relative to the mounting surface. This allows the slider 40 to slide smoothly relative to the left rail member 15 when the slider 40 is mounted on the left rail member 15 of the main device 2.

[1-1-3. Structure of the right controller]

Figure 6 is a six-sided view of an example of the right controller 4. As shown in Figure 6, the right controller 4 has a roughly plate-shaped shell 51. In the present embodiment, the main surface of the shell 51 (in other words, the surface on the front side, that is, the surface on the negative side of the z-axis shown in Figure 1) is roughly rectangular. In addition, in the present embodiment, the shell 51 is a longitudinal shape, that is, a shape that is long in the up and down direction. In addition, when the right controller 4 is detached from the main device 2, the right controller 4 can be held in a manner such that the long side direction of the right controller 4 is facing the longitudinal direction (refer to Figure 38), and the right controller 4 can also be held in a manner such that the long side direction of the right controller 4 is facing the transverse direction (refer to Figure 35).

The housing 51 of the right controller 4, like the housing 31 of the left controller 3, has a vertical length that is substantially the same as the vertical length of the housing 11 of the main device 2, and a thickness that is substantially the same as the thickness of the housing 11 of the main device 2. Therefore, when the right controller 4 is mounted on the main device 2 (see FIG. 1 ), the user can hold the main device 2 and the right controller 4 as if they were a single unit.

In addition, as shown in FIG6 , the main surface of the housing 51 is shaped as follows: the right corner portion has a larger rounded corner than the left corner portion. That is, the connection portion between the upper side surface of the housing 51 and the right side surface, and the connection portion between the lower side surface of the housing 51 and the right side surface are more rounded (in other words, the chamfer R is larger) than the connection portion between the upper side surface of the housing 51 and the left side surface, and the connection portion between the lower side surface of the housing 51 and the left side surface. Therefore, when the right controller 4 is installed on the main device 2 (refer to FIG1 ), the right side of the information processing device 1 has a rounded corner shape, which is easy for the user to hold.

The right controller 4, like the left controller 3, has an analog joystick 52 as a direction input unit. In the present embodiment, the analog joystick 52 has the same structure as the analog joystick 32 of the left controller 3. In addition, the right controller 4, like the left controller 3, has four operation buttons 53 to 56 (specifically, A button 53, B button 54, X button 55, and Y button 56). In the present embodiment, these four operation buttons 53 to 56 are the same mechanism as the four operation buttons 33 to 36 of the left controller 3. As shown in Figure 6, these analog joysticks 52 and each operation button 53 to 56 are provided on the main surface of the housing 51. In addition, in the present embodiment, the operation buttons provided on the main surface of the right controller 4 are set to 4, but the number of operation buttons is arbitrary.

In this embodiment, the positional relationship between the two operating components (the analog stick and the operating buttons) in the right controller 4 is reversed from that in the left controller 3. Specifically, in the right controller 4, the analog stick 52 is positioned below the operating buttons 53-56, while in the left controller 3, the analog stick 32 is positioned above the operating buttons 33-36. This arrangement allows the left and right controllers 3 and 4 to be used with a similar feel when separated from the main unit 2. Details will be described later.

In addition, the right controller 4 includes a + (positive) button 57. As shown in Figure 6, the + button 57 is located on the main surface of the housing 51, more specifically, in the upper left area of the main surface. Like the other operation buttons 53-56, the + button 57 is used to issue instructions corresponding to various programs (e.g., OS programs, application programs) executed on the main device 2. For example, the + button 57 is used as a start button in game applications (e.g., a button for instructing the start of a game).

The right controller 4 has a Home button 58. As shown in Figure 6, the Home button 58 is provided on the main surface of the housing 51, more specifically, in the lower left area of the main surface. The Home button 58 is a button for causing the display 12 of the main device 2 to display a specified menu screen. The menu screen is, for example, a screen that can start an application specified by the user from one or more applications that can be executed in the main device 2. The menu screen can also be displayed, for example, when the main device 2 is started. In this embodiment, when the Home button 58 is pressed while an application is being executed in the main device 2 (that is, the image of the application is displayed on the display 12), a specified operation screen is displayed on the display 12 (in this case, a menu screen can also be displayed instead of the operation screen). In addition, the operation screen is, for example, a screen that can indicate that the menu screen is displayed on the display 12 after the application is ended and that the application is restarted.

When the right controller 4 is attached to the main unit 2, the various operating components (specifically, the analog stick 52 and the aforementioned buttons 53 to 59) provided on the main surface of the right controller 4 are operated by, for example, the thumb of the right hand of the user holding the information processing device 1 (see FIG33 ). Alternatively, when the right controller 4 is used while detached from the main unit 2, the aforementioned operating components are operated by, for example, the thumbs of the left and right hands of the user holding the right controller 4 (see FIG34 ). Specifically, in this case, the analog stick 52 is operated by the thumb of the user's left hand, and the various operating buttons 53 to 56 are operated by the thumb of the user's right hand.

The right controller 4 includes a first R button 60. In addition, the right controller 4 includes a ZR button 61. As shown in FIG6 , the first R button 60 is provided in the upper right portion of the side surface of the housing 51. In addition, the ZR button 61 is provided in the upper right portion from the side surface to the back surface of the housing 51 (strictly speaking, the upper right portion when the housing 51 is viewed from the front side). In other words, the ZR button 61 is provided on the rear side of the first R button 60 (the positive z-axis side shown in FIG1 ). In this embodiment, the upper right portion of the housing 51 has a rounded shape, and therefore the first R button 60 and the ZR button 61 have shapes with rounded corners corresponding to the rounded corners of the upper right portion of the housing 31.

When the right controller 4 is attached to the main device 2, the first R button 60 and the ZR button 61 are located in the upper right portion of the information processing device 1 (see FIG1 ). Therefore, a user holding the information processing device 1 can operate the first R button 60 and the ZR button 61 with the index and middle fingers of their right hand (see FIG34 ).

As shown in FIG6 , the ZR button 61 in the right controller 4, like the ZL button 39 in the left controller 3, is configured to protrude from the housing 51. Specifically, the portion of the back surface of the housing 51 where the ZR button 61 is located (more specifically, at least a portion surrounding the ZR button 61) protrudes relative to the rest of the housing 51. Furthermore, the ZR button 61 is configured to protrude relative to the rest of the back surface of the housing 51. Therefore, when the right controller 4 is mounted on the main device 2, similar to the case where the left controller 3 is mounted on the main device 2, when the main device 2 is placed on a horizontal mounting surface with the back surface of the right controller 4 facing the mounting surface, the protruding portion of the housing 51 abuts the mounting surface. As a result, the main device 2 is positioned so that the top side is slightly higher than the bottom side, making it easier for the user to view the display 12.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the ZR button 61 in the right controller 4, like the ZL button 39 in the left controller 3, can be pressed primarily in the vertical direction (y-axis direction). Therefore, even when the information processing device 1 is placed so that the ZR button 61 abuts the placement surface, the ZR button 61 is difficult to press, similar to the ZL button 39, and the possibility of accidental pressing is low. Furthermore, in other embodiments, the housing 51 may be formed so that the back surface of the housing 51 protrudes beyond the ZR button 61. Furthermore, in other embodiments, the ZR button 61 may be formed so that it does not protrude from the back surface of the housing 51, similar to the ZL button 39 in the left controller 3.

In this embodiment, the shapes of the first L button 38 and the first R button 60 are not bilaterally symmetrical, and the shapes of the ZL button 39 and the ZR button 61 are not bilaterally symmetrical. However, in other embodiments, the shapes of the first L button 38 and the first R button 60 may be bilaterally symmetrical, and the shapes of the ZL button 39 and the ZR button 61 may be bilaterally symmetrical.

The right controller 4 has the same slider mechanism as the left controller 3. That is, the right controller 4 has the above-mentioned slider 62. As shown in Figure 6, the slider 62 is arranged to extend in the up-down direction on the left side of the housing 51. The slider 62 has a shape that can be engaged with the right rail member 19 of the main device 2 (more specifically, the groove of the right rail member 19). Specifically, the cross-section of the slider 62 (specifically, the cross-section perpendicular to the up-down direction) has a convex shape. More specifically, the cross-section of the slider 62 has a T-shape corresponding to the cross-sectional shape of the right rail member 19 (refer to Figure 7). Therefore, the slider 62 engaged with the right rail member 19 is fixed in a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction (in other words, the direction in which the right rail member 19 extends) and will not fall off (refer to Figure 7).

In addition, a protrusion 63 is provided at the slider 62. The protrusion 63 is arranged at a position to be inserted into the above-mentioned engaging hole 20 when the right controller 4 is mounted on the main device 2. The specific position of the protrusion 63 is arbitrary. In the present embodiment, the protrusion 63 is provided on the mounting surface of the slider 62. In addition, the mounting surface of the slider 62 refers to the surface facing the bottom surface of the right rail member 19 when the right controller 4 is mounted on the main device 2. In addition, the protrusion 63 is formed into a shape that can be engaged with the engaging hole 20 of the right rail member 19.

In this embodiment, the protrusion 63 of the right controller 4, like the protrusion 41 of the left controller 3, is subjected to a force from the inside to the outside of the slider 62. Therefore, by applying a force from the outside to the inside of the slider 62 to the protrusion 63, the protrusion 63 moves toward the inside of the slider 62 (i.e., retreats toward the inside of the slider 62). The structure for applying the force to the protrusion 63 as described above is arbitrary and may be the same structure as the protrusion 41 of the left controller 3 described above.

In addition, the right controller 4 has a terminal 64 for wired communication between the right controller 4 and the main device 2. The terminal 64 is provided at a position in contact with the right terminal 21 (FIG. 3) of the main device 2 when the right controller 4 is mounted on the main device 2. The specific position of the terminal 64 is arbitrary. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG6 , the terminal 64 is provided on the mounting surface of the slider 62. In the present embodiment, the terminal 64 is provided near the lower end of the mounting surface of the slider 62. The terminal 64 is provided at a position lower than the above-mentioned protrusion 63 (in other words, the top side when the slider 62 is inserted into the right rail member 19).

In addition, the right controller 4, like the left controller 3, includes a second L button 65 and a second R button 66. These buttons 65 and 66, like the other operation buttons 53-56, are used to issue commands corresponding to various programs executed on the main device 2. As shown in Figure 6, the second L button 65 and the second R button 66 are located on the mounting surface of the slider 62. The second L button 65 is located below the center in the vertical direction (the y-axis direction shown in Figure 1) of the mounting surface of the slider 62. The second R button 66 is located above the center in the vertical direction of the mounting surface of the slider 62. Like the second L button 43 and the second R button 44 of the left controller 3, the second L button 65 and the second R button 66 are located in a position that cannot be pressed when the right controller 4 is mounted on the main device 2. They are buttons used when the right controller 4 is detached from the main device 2. The second L button 65 and the second R button 66 are operated, for example, by the index or middle finger of the left or right hand of the user holding the right controller 4 detached from the main device 2 (see Figure 35).

The right controller 4 includes a notification LED 67. Like the notification LED 45 of the left controller 3, the notification LED 67 is a notification unit for notifying the user of specified information. Furthermore, like the left controller 3, the right controller 4 includes four LEDs serving as notification LEDs 67, with the LED corresponding to the number assigned to the right controller 4 being illuminated. In this embodiment, the notification LED 67, like the notification LED 45, is provided on the mounting surface of the slider 62 ( FIG. 6 ). Thus, the notification LED 67 is located in a position that is invisible when the right controller 4 is attached to the main unit 2. The notification LED 67 is used when the right controller 4 is detached from the main unit 2.

The right controller 4 is equipped with a pairing button 69. Similar to the pairing button 46 of the left controller 3, the pairing button 69 is used to instruct the setting (also called pairing) process related to the wireless communication between the right controller 4 and the main device 2, and to instruct the reset process of the right controller 4. The above-mentioned setting process and reset process are the same as those in the left controller 3, so detailed description is omitted. In addition, in this embodiment, the pairing button 69 is mounted on the mounting surface of the slider 62 as shown in Figure 6. In other words, the pairing button 69 is arranged at a position that is invisible when the right controller 4 is mounted on the main device 2 for the same reason as the pairing button 46 of the left controller 3.

In addition, in the right controller 4, similar to the left controller 3, the buttons (specifically, the second L button 65, the second R button 66, and the pairing button 69) provided on the mounting surface of the slider 62 are arranged so as not to protrude relative to the mounting surface. As a result, when the slider 62 is mounted on the right rail member 19 of the main device 2, the slider 62 can slide smoothly relative to the right rail member 19.

In addition, a window portion 68 is provided on the lower side surface of the housing 51. The right controller 4 is provided with an infrared camera unit (the infrared camera unit 123 shown in FIG31 ), which detects the user's hand movements and/or gestures, etc., through the infrared camera unit 123, and the details will be described later. The window portion 68 is provided to allow the camera of the infrared camera unit 123 disposed inside the housing 51 to photograph the surroundings of the right controller 4. The window portion 68 is used to protect the lens of the camera of the infrared camera unit 123, and is made of a material (for example, a transparent material) that allows light of a wavelength detected by the camera to pass through. In addition, the window portion 68 may also be a hole formed in the housing 51. In addition, in the present embodiment, the infrared camera unit 123 itself has a filter component that suppresses the transmission of light of a wavelength other than the light detected by the camera (in the present embodiment, infrared light). However, in other embodiments, the above-mentioned window portion may also have a filtering function.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned controllers 3 and 4, the shape, number and setting position of each structural element (specifically, sliders, joysticks, buttons and LEDs, etc.) provided in the shell 31 or 51 are arbitrary. For example, in other embodiments, each controller 3 and 4 may also have a directional input unit of a type different from that of the analog joystick. In addition, the slider 40 or 62 can be arranged at a position corresponding to the position of the track member 15 or 19 provided in the main device 2, for example, it can also be arranged on the main surface or back surface of the shell 31 or 51. In addition, in other embodiments, the controllers 3 and 4 may also have a structure that does not have some of the above-mentioned structural elements.

[1-1-4: Installation Action]

Next, the action of loading and unloading the controller relative to the main device 2 will be described with reference to Figures 7 and 8. In addition, the following description will be given using the action of loading and unloading the left controller 3 relative to the main device 2 as an example, but the action of loading and unloading the right controller 4 relative to the main device 2 can also be performed in the same way as the case of the left controller 3.

When the left controller 3 is to be installed on the main device 2, the user first inserts the lower end of the slider 40 of the left controller 3 into the groove of the left rail member 15 from the upper end of the left rail member 15 of the main device 2. Figure 7 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which the left rail member 15 and the slider 40 are engaged. In addition, in Figure 7, in order to make the accompanying figure easy to observe, the structure of the main device 2 is shown in dotted lines. As shown in Figure 7, the slider 40 is inserted into the left rail member 15 in a manner that the convex cross-section of the slider 40 is engaged (also called interlocking) with the concave cross-section of the left rail member 15 (in other words, the groove of the left rail member 15).

After inserting the lower end of the slider 40 into the groove of the left rail member 15, the user inserts the slider 40 deeper into the groove of the left rail member 15. In other words, the user slides the left controller 3 downward relative to the main device 2. Then, when the left controller 3 is slid downward until the lower end of the slider 40 reaches the position of the stopper 18 of the main device 2, the left controller 3 is fixed to the main device 2.

FIG8 is a diagram showing an example of the situation before and after the slider 40 is fixed to the left rail member 15. In addition, FIG8 shows a cross section perpendicular to the front-to-back direction (z-axis direction) of the left rail member 15. In addition, in FIG8, in order to make the structural elements used as the description object easier to observe, the positional relationship and size of the structural elements are shown in a manner that is changed relative to FIG3 and the like.

As shown in (a) of Figure 8, when the left controller 3 is not fully installed on the main device 2 (i.e., the lower end of the slider 40 has not reached the stopper 18 of the main device 2), the protrusion 41 of the slider 40 collides with the bottom surface of the track member 15 and is received on the inner side of the slider 40.

When the slider 40 slides toward the deep side of the left rail member 15 after the state shown in (a) of Figure 8, the lower end of the slider 40 reaches the position of the stopper 18 of the main device 2 (refer to (b) of Figure 8). At this time, as shown in (b) of Figure 8, the protrusion 41 of the slider 40 is located at a position facing the engaging hole 16 of the left rail member 15. Therefore, the protrusion 41 is in a state of protruding from the mounting surface of the slider 40 and being inserted into the engaging hole 16. As a result, the protrusion 41 engages with the engaging hole 16, so that the left controller 3 is fixed to the main device 2 to the extent that it does not come off even if a certain degree of force is applied (in other words, the slider 40 is fixed to the left rail member 15).

In addition, when the left controller 3 is fixed to the main device 2, as shown in Figure 8 (b), the terminal 42 of the slider 40 is located at a position facing the left terminal 17 of the left rail member 15. Therefore, the terminal 42 and the left terminal 17 are connected. As a result, wired communication between the left controller 3 and the main device 2 is possible (in other words, communication performed by physically connecting the terminals). In addition, power can be supplied from the main device 2 to the left controller 3.

In addition, either one or both of the terminal on the controller side (i.e., terminal 42) and the terminal on the main device side (i.e., the left terminal 17) are arranged to protrude (slightly) from the surface on which the terminal is provided. In the present embodiment, as shown in (a) of FIG8 , the left terminal 17 on the main device side is arranged to protrude slightly from the surface on which the left terminal 17 is provided (i.e., the bottom surface of the left rail member 15). In addition, the metal portion 17a, which serves as the contact of the protruding terminal, is capable of deforming in a direction approaching the surface on which the terminal is provided. Thus, in the case of contact between the terminals, as shown in (b) of FIG8 , one terminal is subjected to a force pressed from the other terminal and is forced in the direction of the protrusion. As a result, reliable contact between the terminals can be achieved.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the left terminal 17 of the main device 2 is provided below the engagement hole 16. Furthermore, the terminal 42 of the left controller 3 is provided below the protrusion 41. Therefore, when the slider 40 is inserted into the left rail member 15, the protrusion 41 does not come into contact with the left terminal 17, thereby reducing the possibility of the left terminal 17 being damaged by the protrusion 41.

To remove the left controller 3 from the main device 2, the user slides the left controller 3 upward on the main device 2. Furthermore, when the left controller 3 is attached to the main device 2, the left controller 3 is secured to the main device 2 by the protrusion 41 and the engagement hole 16. However, by applying a force greater than a certain magnitude to slide the left controller 3 upward, the protrusion 41 deviates from the position of the engagement hole 16, resulting in the release of the secured state. Therefore, after the secured state is released, the left controller 3 can be removed from the main device 2 by further sliding it upward.

Furthermore, in other embodiments, the left controller 3 may include a mechanism that allows the protrusion 41 to be retracted into the inner side of the slider 40. For example, the left controller 3 may include a mechanism that allows the protrusion 41 to be retracted into the inner side of the slider 40 in response to the user pressing a predetermined button provided on the left controller 3. This allows the user to easily release the state in which the left controller 3 is fixed to the main device 2 via the protrusion 41 by performing the above-mentioned operation.

As described above, in this embodiment, the controllers 3 and 4 can be detachably mounted on the main unit 2 by utilizing a sliding mechanism of a rail member and a slider. According to the sliding mechanism, the controllers 3 and 4 can be relatively firmly fixed to the main unit 2 in directions other than the sliding direction. Therefore, when the user holds the information processing device 1 on which the controllers 3 and 4 are mounted on the main unit 2, the controllers 3 and 4 shake less, and an information processing device 1 that is easy to hold can be provided. In addition, in this embodiment, the controllers 3 and 4 can be fixed to the main unit 2 to a certain extent in the sliding direction by the structure of the protrusion and the engaging hole. This can also reduce the shaking of the controllers 3 and 4 mounted on the main unit 2, thereby providing an information processing device 1 that is easy to hold.

[1-2. Other Configuration Examples Related to Information Processing Devices]

Furthermore, the configuration related to the installation of the controller in the main unit 2 may be the second configuration example described below, replacing the configuration example described in "[1-1. Configuration of Information Processing Device]" (hereinafter referred to as the "first configuration example"). The second configuration example related to the main unit 2 and the controllers 3 and 4 will be described below, focusing on the differences from the first configuration example.

[1-2-1. Second Configuration Example Related to Main Device]

Figure 9 is a left side view of an example of the main device in the second structural example. In addition, Figure 10 is a stereoscopic view of an example of the left side portion of the main device in the second structural example. In the second structural example, the main device 2 has a left rail member 300 on the left side of the shell 11. As shown in Figure 9, the left rail member 300 is arranged to extend in the up and down direction (the y-axis direction shown in Figure 9). The left rail member 300 is the same as the left rail member 15 in the first structural example, and is a member for mounting the left controller 3 on the main device 2 in a manner that is slidable and removable relative to the main device 2. In the second structural example, the left rail member 300 can engage with the slider 311 of the left controller 3 described later, and the sliding mechanism is composed of the left rail member 300 and the slider 311. Below, the structure of the left rail member 300 in the second structural example is explained with the differences from the first structural example as the center.

Fig. 11 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a cross section of the left rail member on the A-A' section shown in Fig. 9. In addition, in this specification, "schematically showing" means that the size and shape of the structural element as the illustration object (for example, the left rail member in Fig. 11) and the positional relationship between the structural elements are shown in a manner different from those in other drawings in order to make the structural element to be explained (for example, the left rail member) easier to observe.

As shown in Figures 9 to 11, the left rail member 300 has a bottom portion 301, side portions 302a and 302b, and top portions 303a and 303b. Hereinafter, the side portions 302a and 302b may be collectively referred to as "side portion 302." Furthermore, the top portions 303a and 303b may be collectively referred to as "top portion 303." In the second structural example, each portion 301 to 303 is a substantially plate-shaped member.

As shown in Figures 9 and 10, the bottom portion 301 is arranged on the left side of the housing 11, substantially parallel to the left side. Furthermore, in this specification, the term "substantially (in a certain state)" encompasses both strictly and approximately parallel states. For example, "substantially parallel" means either strictly parallel or approximately parallel.

The bottom portion 301 has a bottom surface 3011 of the left rail member 300. In addition, as shown in Figure 11, the side portion 302 has a side surface 3021 (specifically, side surfaces 3021a and 3021b) that is substantially perpendicular to the bottom surface 3011. The side portion 302 extends substantially perpendicularly to the bottom portion 301 from both ends in the front-to-back direction (i.e., the z-axis direction) of the bottom portion 301. Specifically, the side portion 302a extends from the rear end side (i.e., the positive z-axis side) of the bottom portion 301, and the side portion 302b extends from the front end side (i.e., the negative z-axis side) of the bottom portion 301. As shown in Figure 11, a groove portion is formed by the bottom portion 301 and the side portion 302.

As shown in Figure 11, the top surface 303 has a top surface 3031 (specifically, top surfaces 3031a and 3031b) that is substantially parallel to the bottom surface 3011. The top surface 303 extends from the side of the side surface 302 opposite to the side connected to the bottom surface 301 (i.e., the positive x-axis side) in a direction substantially parallel to the bottom surface 3011. Specifically, the top surface 303a extends from the end of the side surface 302a on the positive x-axis side, and the top surface 303b extends from the end of the side surface 302b on the positive x-axis side. The top surface 303a and the top surface 303b extend from the side surface 302 in a direction approaching each other. The top surface 303 is configured to face the bottom surface 301. In the second structural example, the top surface 303 and the bottom surface 301 are configured substantially parallel. The top surface portions 303a and 303b are provided so as to protrude from the side surface portion 302 toward the inner side of the left rail member 300 (in other words, protrude in a direction toward each other). In addition, the top surface portion 303a and the top surface portion 303b are arranged at a distance from each other so that the slider 311 of the left controller 3 can be inserted into the groove portion formed by the bottom surface portion 301 and the side surface portion 302 (Figures 9 to 11).

As described above, when the left controller 3 is mounted on the main device 2, similarly to the first structural example, the slider 311 of the left controller 3 is inserted into the above-mentioned groove, and the left rail member 300 is engaged with the slider 311 (see FIG. 7 in the first structural example). At this time, the slider 311 engaged with the left rail member 300 is fixed in a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction (in other words, the direction in which the left rail member 300 extends) by the top surface portion 303 so as not to fall off.

As described above, the sliding mechanism in the second structural example (in other words, the mechanism for mounting the controllers 3 and 4 on the main device 2 in a slidable manner) is roughly the same as that in the first structural example.

In the second configuration example, as shown in Figures 9 and 10, a notch C1 is formed at a portion of the upper end portion of the top surface portion 303. The notch C1 is formed so that the locking member 319 of the left controller 3 is locked with the notch C1 (strictly speaking, the top surface portion 303 around the notch C1) when the left controller 3 is mounted on the main device 2. Details will be described later.

Here, "the state in which the controller is installed in the main device 2" refers to the following state: a part of the controller (for example, a part of the slider, more specifically, the top end of the lower side of the slider) that is moved downward after being inserted into the track member of the main device 2 abuts against a part of the main device 2 (for example, a part of the track member) and cannot move further. Hereinafter, the state in which the controller is completely installed in the main device 2 like this will sometimes be referred to as the "installation state". The above-mentioned installation state can also be referred to as the state in which the controller is connected to the main device 2 (that is, the connection state). In the case where the main device 2 and the controller have terminals as in the present embodiment, the installation state can also be referred to as the "state in which the terminals are connected."

As described above, in the second structural example, the portion of the top surface portion 303 that forms the notch C1 (in other words, the portion around the notch C1) functions as a locked portion for the above-mentioned locking member to be locked. In the second structural example, instead of the engaging hole 16 and the protrusion 41 in the first structural example, the sliding movement of the left controller 3 installed on the main device 2 is locked (also called locked) by the above-mentioned locked portion and the locking member 319, and the details will be described later. In addition, the state of locking the sliding movement (in other words, locking) is the following state: the locking member 319 is stuck in the locked portion, thereby hindering the sliding movement. In addition, it can also be that "locking (or locking)" is sufficient as long as it can hinder the sliding movement under a force less than a certain size. When a force greater than a certain size is applied, (the result of the locking of the locked portion by the locking member 319 being released) the sliding movement is performed.

In the second structural example, the locked portion is arranged near the upper end (i.e., the end on the positive side of the y-axis) of the left rail member 300 (Figure 9). In addition, in other embodiments, the locked portion can also be arranged at an arbitrary position. For example, the locked portion can also be arranged near the center of the left rail member 300 in the up and down direction (i.e., the y-axis direction), and can also be arranged near the lower end. In addition, it is also possible not to form a notch in the top surface portion 303, and for the upper end portion of the top surface portion 303 to function as the locked portion. That is to say, it is also possible that, in the installed state, the locking member 319 of the left controller 3 is locked with the upper end portion of the top surface portion 303.

In other embodiments, the left rail member 300 may also be a structure without a locked portion. Moreover, even with this structure, a force for hindering the sliding movement of the left controller 3 mounted on the main device 2 can be applied through contact between the terminals described later and/or pressure by the leaf spring 305, thereby making it difficult for the left controller 3 to separate from the main device 2.

In the second structural example, the locked portion is respectively provided on the two top surface portions 303a and 303b (Figure 9). The locked portion provided on the top surface portion 303a and the locked portion provided on the top surface portion 303b are provided at substantially the same position in the up and down directions. In this way, in the second structural example, the left rail member 300 has a substantially left-right symmetrical shape (Figure 9). Accordingly, as the rail member provided on the left side surface of the main device 2 and the rail member provided on the right side surface, members of the same shape can be used. Thus, the manufacturing of the main device 2 can be simplified and cost-effective.

Furthermore, if the top surface 303 is provided with a latching portion on both sides, the left controller 3 only needs to include a latching member that latches with either of the two latching portions. Therefore, according to this second structural example, the main device 2 can support a wider variety of controllers. Furthermore, according to this second structural example, the degree of freedom in the design of controllers that can be installed in the main device 2 can be increased. Furthermore, in other embodiments, the latching portion can be provided on either of the two top surface portions 303a and 303b.

As shown in Figures 9 and 10, the left rail member 300 has a facing portion 304. In the second structural example, the facing portion 304 realizes the role of the stopper 18 in the first structural example (i.e., the role of stopping the sliding movement of the slider 311 of the left controller 3). That is, the facing portion 304 stops the sliding movement of the slider 311 by abutting against the slider 311 inserted from the upper side in the sliding direction. In addition, in the second structural example, the left terminal 17 is provided on the facing portion 304. In addition, in other embodiments, instead of the facing portion 304 abutting against the slider 311 (or at the same time), the top end of the slider 311 (specifically, the top end of the protrusion 321 described later) abuts against the wall 306 provided deep in the facing portion 304, thereby stopping the sliding movement of the slider 311.

Figure 12 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a cross section of the left rail member on the B-B’ section shown in Figure 9. As shown in Figure 12, the facing portion 304 is provided at a position facing a portion of the bottom portion 301 (specifically, a portion near the lower end of the bottom portion 301) in a manner spaced apart from the bottom portion 301. That is, the facing portion 304 has a facing surface 304a facing the bottom portion 301. The facing surface 304a is a surface facing the side of the shell 11 of the main device 2. In the second structural example, when the left controller 3 is mounted on the main device 2, the slider 311 of the left controller 3 (the top portion) is inserted into the space between the bottom portion 301 and the facing portion 304.

As shown in Figures 10 and 12, the left terminal 17 is provided on the above-mentioned facing surface 304a. Therefore, the left terminal 17 is configured in a state of being exposed toward one side of the bottom portion 301. In this way, in the second structural example, in the component (i.e., the facing portion 304) that is spaced apart from the side of the main device 2 (i.e., the bottom portion 301), the left terminal 17 is configured on the inner side of the component (i.e., the side facing the bottom portion 301). Accordingly, the possibility of the left terminal 17 contacting the user's hand or other objects can be reduced, thereby protecting the left terminal 17. According to the second structural example, for example, the possibility of the user's hand accidentally touching the left terminal 17 or damaging the left terminal 17 can be reduced.

Figure 13 is a stereoscopic diagram showing an example of a terminal provided on the main device 2. As shown in Figure 13, in the second structural example, the facing portion 304 has a base portion 307 provided on the facing surface 304a. The left terminal 17 is provided on the base portion 307. In addition, in the present embodiment, the base portion 307 is provided to be movable (at least in a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction) to the extent that it can slightly move its position relative to the facing surface 304a. This is to make it easy to adjust the position of the left terminal 17 when aligning the left terminal 17 of the main device 2 with the terminal 42 of the left controller 3 (the details of the alignment will be described later). In addition, in other embodiments, the base portion 307 (in other words, the left terminal 17) may not be provided to be movable relative to the facing surface 340 (that is, it may be provided to be fixed relative to the facing surface 340). Even in this case, the alignment is performed by at least one of the following methods.

Deformation of any one of the components of the left rail member 300 of the main device 2 (e.g., the left rail member 300 itself, the base portion 307, and the left terminal 17) by utilizing the elasticity of the component

Deformation of any one of the components in the slider 311 of the left controller 3 (e.g., the slider 311 itself, the protrusion 321 described later, and the terminal 42, etc.) by utilizing the elasticity of the component

When a small gap is formed between the engaged left rail member 300 and the slider 311, the positional relationship between the left rail member 300 and the slider 311 changes.

In addition, in other embodiments, the terminal 42 of the left controller 3 may be set to be movable instead of the base portion 307 (or at the same time) to adjust the position during alignment.

As shown in FIG13 , the base portion 307 is formed with the same number of slits 307 a as the number of left terminals 17 (here, ten). The slits 307 a are formed to extend along the sliding direction (i.e., the y-axis direction). Furthermore, the slits 307 a are formed side by side in a direction parallel to the facing surface 304 a and substantially perpendicular to the sliding direction (i.e., the z-axis direction). Therefore, it can be said that the facing portion 304 (specifically, the base portion 307) has a wall portion 307 b between adjacent slits 307 a.

Each left terminal 17 is arranged in the above-mentioned slit 307a. As shown in Figure 13, the left terminal 17 is arranged on the inner side of the slit 307a, that is, it is arranged so as not to protrude outside the slit 307a. When the direction perpendicular to the facing surface 304a (i.e., the x-axis direction) is used as the height direction, the left terminal 17 is arranged at a position lower than the wall portion 307b (in other words, a position close to the facing surface 304a). Here, in the above-mentioned installation state, when the left terminal 17 is connected to the terminal 42 of the left controller 3, a part of the terminal 42 of the left controller 3 enters the slit 307a. In other words, a part of the terminal 42 of the left controller 3 is located between the two wall portions 307b. In addition, a part of the terminal 42 corresponding to the left terminal 17 in each slit 307a respectively enters the inner side of each slit 307a. As a result, the possibility of the terminal 42 of the left controller 3 offset in the side-by-side direction (i.e., the z-axis direction) of the left terminal 17 of the main device 2 can be reduced. That is, the possibility of the following situations occurring: the result of the terminal 42 of the left controller 3 contacting the left terminal 17 of the main device 2 other than the correct left terminal 17, causing an error in communication between the main device 2 and the left controller 3, or the occurrence of an electrical fault due to an unexpected current flowing between the incorrectly contacted terminals. In addition, by arranging the left terminal 17 within the slit 307a, the possibility of damage to the left terminal 17 can be further reduced.

In addition, there is also concern that a short circuit may occur when conductive foreign matter is attached between the terminals. In this regard, in the present embodiment, a wall portion 307b is provided between each left terminal 17, thereby reducing the possibility of conductive foreign matter being attached across the terminals, thereby reducing the possibility of a short circuit.

In the second structural example, as shown in Figures 9 and 10 , the top surface portion 303 is integrally formed with the facing portion 304. In other words, the upper surface of the facing portion 304 (i.e., the surface facing the positive x-axis direction) is continuous with the upper surface of the top surface portion 303 (i.e., the surface facing the positive x-axis direction). This simplifies the shape of the left rail member 300, making it easier to manufacture the rail member.

Furthermore, in the second structural example, the left rail member 300 including the aforementioned components 301 to 304 is made of metal. This improves the strength of the rail member. Furthermore, this improved strength also contributes to the strength of the main body device 2 to which the rail member is mounted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the facing portion 304 realizes the function of stopping the sliding movement of the slider 311 of the left controller 3. Here, in the second structural example, as shown in Figures 9 and 10, the facing portion 304 has a first portion arranged on one side of the axis (i.e., the y-axis) along the sliding direction and a second portion arranged on the other side. In the present embodiment, the first portion and the second portion are arranged with a gap therebetween. The gap between the first portion and the second portion is a narrow gap to the extent that the slider 311 cannot be inserted. Therefore, when the slider 311 is inserted into the left rail member 300, the sliding movement of the slider 311 will stop at a position where the portion near the top of the slider 311 (specifically, the top of the shaft portion 325 described later) abuts against the facing portion 304 (details will be described later). In addition, in other embodiments, the gap between the first portion and the second portion may not exist. That is, the first portion and the second portion may also be formed integrally.

In addition, in the second structural example, as shown in Figure 9, the left terminal 17 and the locked portion (in other words, the notch C1) are arranged on opposite sides of each other in the sliding direction of the left track member 300. That is, the left terminal 17 is provided on the portion of the left track member 300 on one side in the sliding direction (that is, the portion on the negative side of the y-axis), and the locked portion is provided on the portion of the left track member 300 on the other side in the sliding direction (that is, the portion on the positive side of the y-axis). Here, in the installed state, the sliding movement of the left controller 3 is hindered by the locking member 319 and the locked portion, and the sliding movement is also hindered by the contact between the terminals, which will be described in detail later. Therefore, in the second structural example, the sliding movement can be hindered on both sides of the left track member 300 in the sliding direction, so that the force used to hinder the sliding movement can be applied in a well-balanced manner. That is, the force applied to the left track member 300 can be dispersed, thereby reducing the possibility of damage to the left track member 300. In addition, similar to the left rail member 300, the force applied to the slider 311 of the left controller can also be dispersed, thereby reducing the possibility of damage to the slider 311.

As shown in Figures 9 and 10, the left rail member 300 has a leaf spring 305. The leaf spring 305 is provided on the bottom portion 301 of the left rail member 300. The leaf spring 305 is an example of an elastic member that applies a force in a direction away from the main device 2 (the positive direction of the x-axis) to the left controller 3 when the left controller 3 is mounted on the main device 2. In other embodiments, an elastic member such as rubber may be used instead of the leaf spring.

When installed, the leaf spring 305 abuts the slider 311 of the left controller 3, pressing (in other words, applying force) the left controller 3 in a direction away from the main device 2 (i.e., the positive x-axis direction), as described in detail later. This reduces the shaking of the main device 2 and the left controller 3. As a result, the main device 2 and the left controller 3 can be more securely connected. Furthermore, the sound (so-called flutter sound) produced when the left controller 3 vibrates due to the vibrator 107 described later can be reduced.

9 , in the second structural example, two of the four leaf springs 305 are arranged at a position above the center of the bottom portion 301 (i.e., the positive y-axis direction side), and the remaining two leaf springs 305 are arranged at a position below the center of the bottom portion 301 (i.e., the negative y-axis direction side). In addition, two of the four leaf springs 305 are arranged at a position frontward of the center of the bottom portion 301 (i.e., the positive z-axis direction side), and the remaining two leaf springs 305 are arranged at a position rearward of the center of the bottom portion 301 (i.e., the negative z-axis direction side). In this way, a plurality of (here, four) leaf springs 305 are provided on both sides relative to the center of the left rail member 300 in the up-down direction (y-axis direction) and/or the front-back direction (z-axis direction). Accordingly, each leaf spring 305 can maintain a good balance while applying force to the left controller 3 installed on the main device 2, thereby more effectively reducing the shaking of the main device 2 and the left controller 3 and/or the above-mentioned vibration sound.

Furthermore, in the second structural example, the number of leaf springs 305 is four, but in other embodiments, the number of leaf springs can be any. Furthermore, in other embodiments, the placement of leaf springs 305 is arbitrary and not limited to the position shown in FIG9 . Furthermore, in the second structural example, leaf springs 305 are positioned so as to abut against the upper surface 311d (see FIG24 ) of the slider 311 of the left controller 3 when installed.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the main device 2 has a right rail member on the right side of the shell 11. The right rail member can engage with the slider 331 of the right controller 4 described later, and the right rail member and the slider 331 constitute a sliding mechanism. The right rail member in the second structural example is similar to the right rail member 19 in the first structural example. The right controller 4 is installed on the main device 2 in a manner that is slidable and removable relative to the main device 2, and can be called a sliding member. In the second structural example, the mechanism on the right side of the main device 2 (including the right rail member) is symmetrical with the mechanism on the left side including the left rail member 300 (in addition, the functions assigned to the terminals are not symmetrical).

In the second structural example, the right rail member (including the base portion and the right terminal provided on the right rail member) has the same structure as the above-mentioned left rail member 300. As described above, in the second structural example, the left rail member 300 has a shape that is symmetrical about an axis perpendicular to the front-to-back direction (i.e., the y-axis), so that the same member can be used in the right rail member and the left rail member. That is, in the second structural example, a right rail member having the same shape as the left rail member 300 is provided on the right side surface of the main body device 2. Accordingly, the manufacturing of the main body device 2 can be simplified and the cost can be reduced.

In addition, in the second structural example, the structure of the main device 2 other than the structure described above (for example, the structure arranged on the main surface, back surface, upper surface and lower surface of the shell) can be the same as the first structural example.

[1-2-2. Second Configuration Example Related to the Left Controller]

Figure 14 is a six-sided view of an example of the left controller in the second structural example. In the second structural example, the left controller 3 has a difference from the first structural example in the structure of the slider 311 and the various parts provided on the slider 311. Below, the structure of the left controller 3 in the second structural example is described with a focus on the differences from the first structural example. In Figure 14, for the same structure as that shown in Figure 5, the same reference mark is marked and the detailed description is omitted. In addition, in Figure 14, several operating parts (for example, the record button 37, the - button 47, etc.) have a shape different from that in Figure 5, but these operating parts have the same functions as the operating parts in the first structural example marked with the same reference mark as the operating part.

As shown in FIG14 , in the second configuration example, the left controller 3 includes a main body 310 and a slider 311. The main body 310 has the same function as the housing 31 in the first configuration example and may be the same as the housing 31. The slider 311, like the slider 40 in the first configuration example, is a member for attaching the left controller 3 to the main device 2 in a manner that allows it to slide relative to the main device 2 and be attached and detached.

As shown in Figure 14, the slider 311 is arranged to extend in the up-down direction (i.e., the y-axis direction) on the right side surface (i.e., the side surface on the negative side of the x-axis) of the main body 310 of the left controller 3. The slider 311 has a shape that can be engaged with the left rail member 300 of the main device 2 (more specifically, the various parts 301 to 303 of the left rail member 300). Specifically, the cross-section of the slider 311 (specifically, the cross-section perpendicular to the up-down direction) has a shape protruding from the main body 310, similar to the first structural example, and specifically has a T-shape corresponding to the cross-sectional shape of the left rail member 300 (refer to the "(enlarged view)" shown in Figure 14).

As shown in the "(Enlarged View)" in Figure 14, the slider 311 includes a shaft portion 325 and a top portion 326. The shaft portion 325 is provided so as to protrude from the main body portion 310. The top portion 326 is provided on the side of the shaft portion 325 opposite the main body portion 310 (i.e., the negative x-axis side). As described above, the cross-section of the slider 311 perpendicular to the y-axis direction is T-shaped. In other words, the width of the top portion 326 (i.e., the length in the z-axis direction) is greater than the width of the shaft portion 325. Furthermore, the end of the top portion 326 in the z-axis direction is positioned so as to protrude (in other words, outwardly) from the end of the shaft portion 325 in the z-axis direction.

Thus, as the cross-sectional shape of the slider 311 on the cross-section perpendicular to the sliding direction, the slider 311 has the following shape: the width of the first portion (the shaft portion 325) protruding from the right side of the main body 310 (in other words, adjacent to the right side) is shorter than the width of the second portion (the top surface portion 326) located at a position farther from the right side of the main body 310 than the first portion. Therefore, the slider 311 inserted into the groove portion of the left rail member 300 engages with the left rail member 300 in the same manner as the engagement state shown in FIG. 7 in the first structural example. Thus, the slider 311 engaged with the left rail member 300 is fixed relative to the left rail member 300 in a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction (in other words, the direction in which the left rail member 300 extends) and does not come off.

(Structure related to terminals)

As shown in Figure 14, in the second structural example, as in the first structural example, the terminal 42 is provided at the end of the lower side of the slider 311. That is, the terminal 42 is provided at the end of the slider 311 that can be inserted relative to the main device 2 (in other words, the part on the top side of the insertion direction in which the slider 311 can be inserted relative to the left rail member 300 of the main device 2, that is, the end of the lower side). Accordingly, as the slider 311 is inserted toward the deep side of the left rail member 300 (that is, the negative direction of the y-axis), the terminal 42 moves toward the left terminal 17 of the left rail member 300. Thus, the terminal 42 can be guided toward the side of the left terminal 17 to which the terminal 42 should be connected, so that the terminals can be easily connected. In addition, when the slider 311 is inserted to the end (or approximately the end) relative to the left rail member 300 of the main device 2, the terminal 42 of the slider 311 and the left terminal 17 of the main device 2 will contact each other. Accordingly, when the user installs the left controller 3 to the main device 2, the slider 311 is inserted to the end relative to the left rail component 300 of the main device 2 in order to connect the terminals, so that the left controller 3 can be installed on the main device 2 in the correct installation method.

Here, in the second configuration example, the arrangement of the terminals 42 and the like are different from those in the first configuration example. Detailed description will be given below of the arrangement of the terminals 42 in the second configuration example.

Figure 15 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a cross section near the lower end of the slider 311 in the second structural example. Figure 15 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a partial cross section of the slider 311 on the C-C’ section shown in Figure 14. As shown in Figures 14 and 15, the slider 311 has a protrusion 321 on the lower end side of the slider 311. The protrusion 321 is arranged to protrude in the sliding direction (more specifically, the downward direction, i.e., the negative direction of the y-axis) on the lower end side of the slider 311. The protrusion 321 is arranged on the side of the slider 311 away from the main body 310 (i.e., the negative direction of the x-axis). In other words, the protrusion 321 is arranged at a distance from the right side of the main body 310. The protrusion 321 has a facing surface 321a facing the side of the main body 310 of the left controller 3. The facing surface 321a faces a predetermined surface (specifically, the right side) of the left controller 3.

In addition, in the second structural example, the above-mentioned protrusion 321 is not provided at the upper end of the slider 311 (i.e., the end on the positive side of the y-axis) (refer to FIG14 ). Here, the following situation is considered: when inserting the slider 311 into the left rail member 300 of the main device 2, the user mistakenly inserts the slider 311 into the left rail member 300 from the upper end of the slider 311. Even in this case, according to the second structural example, the upper end of the slider 311 will not reach the left terminal 17 of the left rail member 300, thereby reducing the possibility of the upper end of the slider 311 damaging the left terminal 17.

The terminal 42 is provided on the facing surface 321a of the above-mentioned protrusion 321. Therefore, the terminal 42 is configured in a state of being exposed toward one side of the main body 310. Thus, in the second structural example, the terminal 42 is configured on the back side of the mounting surface of the slider 311 (specifically, the protrusion 321). As described above, the terminal 42 is configured to be exposed toward one side of the main body 310, thereby reducing the possibility of the terminal 42 coming into contact with the user's hand or other objects, thereby protecting the terminal 42. According to the second structural example, for example, the possibility of the user's hand accidentally touching the terminal 42 or the terminal 42 being damaged can be reduced. In addition, in other embodiments, the terminal 42 can also be provided on the inclined surface 323a (Figure 15) of the top end portion 323 described later. The inclined surface 323a is also a surface facing the side of the main body 310 like the facing surface 321a, so the effect of protecting the terminal 42 can be obtained.

As shown in Figure 15, the terminal 42 is arranged to be spaced apart from the right side of the main body 310. When the left controller 3 is installed on the main device 2, the above-mentioned facing portion 304 of the main device 2 is inserted into the space between the terminal 42 (in other words, the protrusion 321) and the right side of the main body 310 (Figure 26), which will be described in detail later. By configuring the terminal 42 and the main body 310 in such a manner as to form the above-mentioned space, the result of the facing portion 304 being inserted into the space is that the terminal 42 of the left controller 3 can contact the left terminal 17 of the main device 2 when the left controller 3 is installed on the main device 2.

Figure 16 is a perspective view showing an example of the protrusion 321 of the slider 311 in the second structural example. Figure 16 is a view of the protrusion 321 as viewed from the inside (i.e., from the side of the facing surface 321a). As shown in the "(enlarged view)" of Figure 16, a hole 311a is formed on the surface of the shaft 325 of the slider 311 on which the protrusion 321 is provided (i.e., the end surface on the negative side of the y-axis). The terminal 42 is provided so as to protrude from the inside of the slider 311 through the hole 311a. In addition, the facing surface 321a of the protrusion 321 has the same number of slits 321b as the number of terminals 42 (here, 10). The slits 321b are connected to the above-mentioned holes 311a. The slits 321b are formed so as to extend along the sliding direction (i.e., the y-axis direction). As shown in FIG. 16 , the slits 321 b are formed side by side in a direction parallel to the facing surface 321 a and perpendicular to the sliding direction (ie, the z-axis direction).

As shown in Figure 16, the terminal 42 is arranged on the facing surface 321a along the slit 321b. Each terminal 42 is arranged side by side in a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction (i.e., the z-axis direction) in the same manner as each slit 321b. In the second structural example, a portion of the terminal 42 (e.g., the top portion) is arranged inside the slit 321b, and another portion of the terminal 42 is arranged outside the slit 321b (Figures 15 and 16). When the terminal 42 of the left controller 3 is connected to the left terminal 17 of the main device 2 in the installed state, the terminal 42 is pressed by the left terminal 17 and deformed, moving in a direction close to the slit 321b (i.e., the negative direction of the x-axis), and the details will be described later. That is, each terminal 42 is bent in such a way that at least a portion of the terminal 42 enters the interior of the slit 321b provided on the facing surface 321a. It can be said that the slit 321b is provided to allow the deformed terminal 42 to retreat so that the terminal 42 does not contact the facing surface 321a when deformed. Thus, in the second structural example, the terminal 42 is disposed at a position that does not contact the facing surface 321a but corresponds to the slit 321b disposed on the facing surface 321a, and is disposed at a position that would contact the facing surface 321a if the slit 321b were not present. In this sense, in the second structural example, the terminal 42 can be said to be disposed on the facing surface 321a. Furthermore, in other embodiments, the slit 321b may not be disposed on the facing surface 321a, and the terminal 42 may be disposed so as to contact the facing surface 321a. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 16, the terminal 42 extends along the facing surface 321a.

As shown in Figures 15 and 16, the terminal 42 is arranged to protrude from the facing surface 321a (specifically, to protrude toward the positive x-axis direction). Here, as described above, when the terminal 42 of the left controller 3 is connected to the left terminal 17 of the main device 2 in the installed state, a portion of the terminal 42 enters the interior of the slit 307a (refer to Figure 13) on the side of the main device 2 (in other words, between the two wall portions 307b). The terminal 42 is arranged to protrude from the facing surface 321a to avoid the facing surface 321a and the wall portion 307b from abutting against each other when the terminal 42 enters the slit 307a.

As shown in Figures 15 and 16, the terminal 42 has a shape that is bent into a mountain shape in a manner that protrudes in a direction away from the facing surface 321a (that is, toward the positive direction of the x-axis). By having this shape, the part of the vertex of the mountain shape is easy to contact with the left terminal 17 of the main device 2. In other words, the surface of the terminal 42 that contacts the left terminal 17 of the main device 2 (that is, the surface toward the side of the main body 310) can be visually identified from the sliding direction, so it can be said that the lower end side of the slider 311 (that is, the negative direction side of the y-axis) is exposed. As a result, the terminal 42 is easy to contact with the left terminal 17 of the main device 2.

In the second structural example, the protrusion 321 has a wall portion 322 (refer to Figure 16). The wall portion 322 is provided on both sides of the above-mentioned facing surface 321a in a direction parallel to the facing surface 321a and substantially perpendicular to the sliding direction (i.e., the z-axis direction). The wall portion 322 can further reduce the possibility of the terminal 42 coming into contact with the user's hand or other objects, thereby more reliably protecting the terminal 42. As shown in Figure 16, in this embodiment, the wall portion 322 is provided to the top of the protrusion 321. That is, the wall portion 322 extends to a position closer to the top of the protrusion 321 than the terminal 42. Thus, the terminal 42 can be more reliably protected. In addition, in other embodiments, the wall portion 322 may not extend to the top of the protrusion 321.

In addition, as described above, the terminal 42 is configured to protrude from the opposing surface 321a. Here, the wall portion 322 is formed to be higher than the height of the terminal 42 protruding from the opposing surface 321a (refer to Figure 15). As a result, the protection of the terminal 42 by the wall portion 322 can be made more reliable. In addition, in other embodiments, the wall portion 322 can also be formed to be the same as or lower than the height of the terminal 42 protruding from the opposing surface 321a. In addition, the wall portion 322 can also be provided only on one side of the terminal 42 in the front-to-back direction (i.e., the z-axis direction). Even in these ways, the wall portion 322 also plays a certain role in protecting the terminal 42. In addition, in other embodiments, the protrusion 321 can also be a structure without the wall portion 322.

In addition, in the second structural example, at the top portion of the protrusion 321 (in other words, the lower end portion of the slider 311, i.e., the end portion on the negative side of the y-axis), the interval between the two inner walls 322a of the wall portion 322 is formed to gradually widen toward the top of the protrusion 321 (Figure 16). As a result, when the left controller 3 is installed on the main device 2, the left terminal 17 of the main device 2 is guided to the correct position relative to the terminal 42 of the left controller 3. That is, when the left controller 3 is installed on the main device 2, if the position of the left terminal 17 is slightly offset relative to the terminal 42 (in the z-axis direction), the position of the left terminal 17 is corrected by the base portion 307 of the left terminal 17 abutting against the inner wall of the wall portion 322. As a result, the left terminal 17 is guided to the correct position relative to the terminal 42, thereby performing position alignment. In this way, the wall portion 322 has the function of aligning the left terminal 17 with the terminal 42. Furthermore, the inclined surface 323 a may be a curved surface, and the boundary between the facing surface 321 a and the inclined surface 323 a may be rounded (in other words, may be chamfered).

As shown in Figures 15 and 16, the protrusion 321 has a top portion 323. The top portion 323 is provided at a position closer to the top side (i.e., the negative side of the y-axis) than the terminal 42 in the sliding direction of the slider 311 (i.e., the y-axis direction). Accordingly, the terminal 42 is configured to be slightly closer to the inside than the top of the slider 311 (specifically, the top on the negative side of the y-axis). Thus, even if the top of the slider 311 contacts other objects, such as when the controller 3 is mounted on the main device 2, the possibility of the terminal 42 contacting the object can be reduced. In this way, the terminal 42 can be protected by the top portion 323.

In addition, as shown in Figure 15, the top portion 323 has a shape that becomes thinner toward the top (specifically, the top of the lower end side of the slider 311). More specifically, the top portion 323 has an inclined surface 323a (Figure 15) that is inclined from the facing surface 321a on which the terminal 42 is provided toward the direction approaching the surface on the back side of the facing surface 321a (in other words, in the direction away from the right side of the main body 310). Accordingly, when the left controller 3 is installed on the main unit 2, the left terminal 17 of the main unit 2 (in other words, the facing portion 304) is guided to the correct position relative to the terminal 42 of the left controller 3 (in other words, the protrusion 321). That is, when the left controller 3 is installed on the main unit 2, if the position of the left terminal 17 is slightly offset relative to the terminal 42 (in the x-axis direction), the position of the left terminal 17 is corrected by the base portion 307 or the facing portion 304 of the left terminal 17 contacting the above-mentioned inclined surface 323a. As a result, the terminal 42 is guided to the correct position, thereby performing position alignment. In this way, the inclined surface 323 a of the tip portion 323 has the function of performing position alignment between the left terminal 17 and the terminal 42 .

As shown in Figure 14, the slider 311 has a reinforcing member 312. The reinforcing member 312 is provided on the mounting surface of the slider 311. Specifically, the reinforcing member 312 is provided at least in the portion of the mounting surface corresponding to the facing surface 321a where the terminal 42 is provided (in other words, the portion on the back side of the facing surface 321a) (refer to Figure 17). In other words, the reinforcing member 312 is provided at least at the position of the above-mentioned protrusion 321. That is, a portion of the protrusion 321 is composed of the reinforcing member 312. Here, in the second structural example, the other parts of the components forming the surface of the slider 311 except the reinforcing member 312 are made of resin. On the other hand, the reinforcing member 312 is made of metal. Therefore, the strength of the portion of the slider 311 where the terminal 42 is provided (i.e., the protrusion 321) can be enhanced by the reinforcing member 312. In addition, the reinforcing member 312 can suppress the following situation: when the slider 311 is inserted into the left rail member 300 of the main device 2, the slider 311 and the left rail member 300 rub against each other and wear. Furthermore, in the second structural example, protrusion 321 is thinned to achieve a slim sliding mechanism and miniaturization of the device. While protrusion 321 is thin, its strength is maintained by forming it from reinforcement member 312. Furthermore, if protrusion 321 is thinned using resin, there is a concern that molding protrusion 321 may be difficult. In contrast, the second structural example allows for easy manufacture of protrusion 321, including the aforementioned components.

Figure 17 is an exploded view showing an example of a reinforcing member and insulating sheet provided on a slider. As shown in Figure 17, a recessed portion 311b is formed near the lower end of the mounting surface of slider 311 (i.e., the end on the negative side of the y-axis). The reinforcing member 312 is mounted in this recessed portion 311b. In the second structural example, the insulating sheet 316 is first inserted into the recessed portion 311b, and then the reinforcing member 312 is mounted outside the insulating sheet 316. This allows the reinforcing member 312 to be attached to the slider 311 (more precisely, the portion of the slider 311 excluding the reinforcing member 312). Furthermore, the recessed portion 311b is formed not only at the location of the protrusion 321 but also extends to the portion of the slider 311 that is not the protrusion 321. Therefore, in the second structural example, the reinforcing member 312 is provided on the protrusion 321 and the portion (of the slider 311) that is continuous with the protrusion 321. This can reinforce the protrusion 321 and reduce the possibility that the protrusion 321 is broken and falls off from the main body portion of the slider 311 (ie, the portion other than the protrusion 321 ).

As shown in Figure 17, the aforementioned slit 321b is formed on the bottom surface of the recessed portion 311b. Specifically, the slit 321b provided on the facing surface 321a extends all the way to the bottom surface of the recessed portion 311b on the back side of the facing surface 321a. Furthermore, the terminal 42 extends not only to the position of the protrusion 321 but also into the interior of the slider 311. The slit 321b on the bottom side of the recessed portion 311b is formed along the terminal 42. In other words, the slit 321b on the bottom side of the recessed portion 311b is formed so as to extend not only to the position behind the protrusion 321 but also to the main body of the slider 311. Accordingly, when the terminal 42 is pressed and deformed by the left terminal 17 of the main device 2 in the installed state, the terminal 42 contacts the bottom surface of the recessed portion 311b (to be precise, the bottom surface if the slit 321b is not set in the recessed portion 311b but the bottom surface is set at the position of the slit 321b), which can reduce the possibility of applying large force to the terminal 42.

As shown in Figure 17, the reinforcing member 312 includes a top portion 312a, side portions 312b, a hook portion 312c, and a ground connection portion 312d. Furthermore, in the second structural example, the reinforcing member 312 including the above-described portions 312a to 312d can be manufactured by bending a single metal plate, thereby making the reinforcing member 312 easy to manufacture.

The top surface portion 312a is a portion having a top surface. When the reinforcing member 312 is mounted on the slider 311, this top surface forms part of the mounting surface of the slider 311. In the second structural example, the top surface portion 312a is generally rectangular. The reinforcing member 312 has four side surfaces 312b, each extending substantially perpendicularly from one of the four sides of the top surface portion 312a. When the reinforcing member 312 is mounted on the recessed portion 311b of the slider 311, the side surfaces 312b abut against the side surfaces of the recessed portion 311b.

The hook portion 312c is provided so as to protrude from the side portion 312b. In the second structural example, the hook portion 312c is provided on three of the four side portions 312b: two side portions 312b extending from the long sides of the top portion 312a, and the side portion 312b on which the ground connection portion 312d is provided. Furthermore, as shown in the enlarged view in Figure 17, the ground connection portion 312d is provided so as to protrude from the hook portion 312c. The number of hook portions 312c is arbitrary and may be provided on two or four side portions 312b. Here, the bottom surface of the recessed portion 311b is a rectangular shape substantially identical to that of the top portion 312a, and slits 311c are formed on the four sides of the bottom surface corresponding to the side portions 312b on which the hook portions 312c are provided. That is, in the second configuration example, slits 311 c are formed on three sides of the bottom surface of the recessed portion 311 b. When the reinforcing member 312 is attached to the slider 311 , the hooks 312 c are inserted into the slits 311 c, respectively, thereby attaching the reinforcing member 312 to the slider 311 .

Figure 18 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which the hook portion 312c is inserted into the slit 311c. Figure 18(a) shows an example of a state before the hook portion 312c is inserted into the slit 311c. As shown in Figure 18, the hook portion 312c has claw portions 312e on both sides in a direction perpendicular to the insertion direction of the hook portion 312c into the slit 311c (i.e., the positive x-axis direction). The first end portion of the claw portion 312e in the insertion direction is formed so that the width of the hook portion 312c narrows as it moves toward the top end of the insertion direction. In addition, the second end portion of the claw portion 312e on the opposite side of the insertion direction is formed to have an edge substantially perpendicular to the insertion direction. In other embodiments, the edge of the second end portion may also be formed in a direction that approaches the inner side of the hook portion 312c as it moves toward the top end of the insertion direction (refer to the dotted line shown in Figure 18(a)). Thus, the claw portion 312e has a shape such that the hook portion 312c can be relatively easily moved in the insertion direction, and the second end portion is hooked on the slit 311c in the opposite direction to the insertion direction, so that the hook portion 312c is relatively difficult to move.

Figure 18(b) shows an example of a state after the hook portion 312c is inserted into the slit 311c. As shown in Figure 18(b), in this state, the claw portion 312e is hooked onto the side portion of the slit 311c. Furthermore, in Figure 18(b), a portion of the claw portion 312e is embedded in the slider 311 (specifically, the side portion of the slit 311c formed in the slider 311). With the hook portion 312c inserted into the slit 311c, the second end portion of the claw portion 312e is hooked onto the side portion of the slit 311c, making it difficult for the hook portion 312c to exit the slit 311c. In other words, the reinforcing member 312 is not easily detached from the slider 311.

As described above, in the second structural example, the terminal 42 is arranged relatively close to the reinforcing member 312 as a metal member. Here, if the terminal 42 is arranged close to the metal member, there is the possibility that the terminal 42 is electrically affected by the incorrect contact with the metal member, resulting in an error in the communication between the left controller 3 and the main device 2 via the terminal 42, or an unexpected current is generated. For example, as described above, in the installed state, there is a situation where the terminal 42 is pressed and deformed by the left terminal 17 of the main device 2, thereby moving into the slit 321b. In this case, if the terminal 42 contacts the reinforcing member 312 as a metal member, there is the possibility that the communication between the left controller 3 and the main device 2 via the terminal 42 is incorrect, or an unexpected current is generated.

To reduce the possibility of this, in the second structural example, an insulating sheet 316 ( FIG. 17 ) is provided between the terminal 42 and the reinforcing member 312. Specifically, in the second structural example, the reinforcing member 312 is attached to the slider 311 after the insulating sheet 316 is inserted into the recess 311b. This reduces the possibility of the terminal 42 being adversely affected by the reinforcing member 312, thereby improving the accuracy of communication between the left controller 3 and the main device 2.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the insulating sheet 316 also has a waterproof function. Specifically, the insulating sheet 316 can prevent water entering from the boundary between the reinforcing member 312 and the slider 311 from entering the slit 321b, thereby reducing the possibility of water entering the slit 321b adhering to the terminal 42. In this way, the insulating sheet 316 has a waterproof function and can therefore be called a waterproof sheet. Furthermore, the insulating sheet 316 can be made of either a water-absorbing material or a waterproof material. In the case where the insulating sheet 316 is made of a water-absorbing material, the possibility of water adhering to the terminal 42 can be reduced by utilizing the insulating sheet 316 to absorb moisture. In the case where the insulating sheet 316 is made of a waterproof material, the possibility of water entering the slit 321b can be reduced by utilizing the insulating sheet 316 to block the slit 321b.

Furthermore, even in a configuration where the terminal 42 and the metal reinforcement member 312 (via the insulating sheet 316) are not in contact, the reinforcement member 312 may become charged due to current flowing through the terminal 42 or static electricity from the outside. When the reinforcement member 312 becomes charged in this manner, there is a possibility that the terminal 42 may be adversely affected by the reinforcement member 312. Therefore, in the second configuration example, the ground connection portion 312d described above is used to set the reinforcement member 312 to a reference potential (ground).

Figure 19 schematically illustrates an example of the internal configuration of components within the left controller 3. As shown in Figure 19 , the left controller 3 includes an internal electronic circuit 318. This electronic circuit 318 may be, for example, a printed circuit board (PCB), or a flexible printed circuit board (FPC) formed from a thin film substrate. Terminal 42 and ground connection portion 312d are connected to the electronic circuit 318.

Figure 20 is a diagram showing an example of connecting a terminal 42 and a ground connection portion 312d on an electronic circuit 318. In addition, Figure 20 shows only a through hole and a land formed around the through hole of the electronic circuit 318, and printed wiring, etc., are omitted. As shown in Figure 20, the electronic circuit 318 has a terminal land portion 318a for connecting the terminal 42. The terminal 42 is inserted into the through hole of the terminal land portion 318a and is (electrically) connected to the terminal land portion 318a by soldering, etc. In addition, Figure 20 shows a state in which one terminal 42 is connected to one terminal land portion 318a, but in reality, ten terminals 42 are connected to ten terminal land portions 318a, with one terminal connected to each terminal land portion.

Electronic circuit 318 also includes a ground land portion 318b for connecting to ground connection portion 312d. Ground connection portion 312d is inserted into a through-hole in ground land portion 318b and (electrically) connected to ground land portion 318b by soldering or other means. Here, ground land portion 318b is a ground portion that is connected to a reference potential (in other words, has a reference potential). Furthermore, although not shown in the figure, in electronic circuit 318, terminal land portion 318a, which connects to the ground terminal among the ten terminals 42, is electrically connected to ground land portion 318b via printed wiring. In other words, the ground terminal is electrically connected to ground land portion 318b.

As described above, in the second structural example, the reinforcing member 312 is electrically connected to the ground, thereby reducing the possibility of the reinforcing member 312 being charged. Accordingly, the possibility of the terminal 42 being adversely affected by the reinforcing member 312 can be reduced, and as a result, the accuracy of communication between the left controller 3 and the main device 2 can be improved.

(Structure related to the locking member)

As shown in FIG14 , in the second configuration example, the left controller 3 includes a locking member 319. The locking member 319 is used to lock the sliding movement of the slider 311 of the left controller 3 relative to the main device 2 in the above-mentioned installed state. In other words, in the second configuration example, instead of the protrusion 41 in the first configuration example, the sliding movement of the slider 311 is locked (in other words, locked) by the locking member 319.

As shown in Figure 14, the locking member 319 is arranged at a position above the center (i.e., the positive direction side of the y-axis) in the sliding direction of the slider 311. More specifically, the locking member 319 is arranged at the upper end portion of the slider 311. In addition, the position of the locking member 319 on the slider 311 is determined according to the position of the locked portion on the left rail member 300 of the main device 2. That is, the position of the locking member 319 is determined in such a way that the locking member 319 is located at the position of the notch C1 of the top surface portion 303 of the left rail member 300 in the installed state (Figure 27). In addition, the locking member 319 is arranged at a portion close to the upper end of the slider 311 in the sliding direction of the slider 311 rather than a portion close to the lower end. In addition, for example, in the case where the locked portion is arranged at the upper end of the left rail member 300, the locking member 319 may also be arranged at the upper end of the slider 311.

When the locking member 319 is provided on the upper portion of the slider 311 as in the second structural example, the period of contact between the locking member 319 and the left rail member 300 can be shortened when the slider 311 is inserted into the left rail member 300. This allows the user to smoothly slide the slider 311. Furthermore, the position of the locking member 319 is arbitrary, and in other embodiments, it may also be provided on the lower portion of the slider 311.

Figure 21 schematically illustrates an example of the positional relationship between the slider 311 and the locking member 319 in the second structural example. As shown in Figure 21(a), the locking member 319 is configured to protrude from the slider 311 (specifically, the side surface of the slider 311). Furthermore, the locking member 319 is configured to protrude from the right side surface of the main body 310. Thus, in the second structural example, the locking member 319 is configured to protrude from both the side surface of the slider 311 and the right side surface of the main body 310.

As described above, the slider 311 includes the shaft portion 325 and the top portion 326 having a width wider than the shaft portion 325. In the second structural example, the locking member 319 is provided so that at least a portion thereof protrudes from a hole 325a (see FIG. 23 ) formed in the side surface of the shaft portion 325. Furthermore, the locking member 319 is provided so that at least a portion thereof protrudes from a hole (not shown) formed in the right side surface of the main body 310.

In addition, the locking member 319 can be set at any position that can be locked with the locked portion of the left rail member 300 in the installed state. Therefore, the locking member 319 can also be set to protrude from other positions of the left controller 3 other than the side portion, instead of being set to protrude from the side portion of the above-mentioned shaft portion 325. For example, the locking member 319 can also be set to protrude from the surface forming the recess H (refer to Figure 21) formed by the main body 310 and the slider 311 of the left controller 3. In addition, the recess H is a portion of the slider 311 that is perpendicular to the sliding direction and is formed into a concave shape by one or both of the main body 310 and the slider 311 of the left controller 3.

In other embodiments, the locking member 319 may be provided at the position shown in FIG. 22 , for example. FIG. 22 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the positional relationship between the slider 311 and the locking member 319 in another embodiment. As shown in FIG. 22 , the locking member 319 may be provided so as to protrude (only) from the main body 310. In addition, although not shown, the locking member 319 may be provided so as to protrude (only) from the side surface of the slider 311. In addition, the locking member 319 may be provided so as to protrude from the top surface portion 326 (more specifically, from the hole provided in the top surface portion 326) forming the above-mentioned recess H. The locking member 319 may also be provided so as to protrude from the side surface of the main body 310, the side surface of the shaft portion 325, and the top surface portion 326. For example, in the case shown in FIG. 21 (a), the locking member 319 may also be provided so as to enter the inner side of the top surface portion 326 in addition to the side surface of the main body 310 and the side surface of the shaft portion 325.

As described above, according to the second structural example, the locking member 319 is provided to protrude from the surface forming the recess, thereby reducing the possibility of the locking member 319 coming into contact with other objects and being damaged.

In addition, the locking member 319 is configured so as not to protrude from the space within the recess (the area enclosed by the dotted line and the oblique line in FIG21(a)) to the space outside the left controller 3. Accordingly, the possibility of the locking member 319 being damaged by contact with other objects can be further reduced, thereby more reliably protecting the locking member 319.

In the second structural example, the locking member 319 is movable, as shown in (b) of Figure 21, and can be in a state of being accommodated inside the left controller 3 (specifically, inside the slider 311 or the main body 310). That is, the locking member 319 can take two states: the protruding state shown in (a) of Figure 21 and the accommodated state shown in (b) of Figure 21. In the installed state, the locking member 319 releases the state of being locked with the locked portion of the left rail member 300 by becoming a accommodated state (that is, no longer locked with the locked portion), and the details will be described later. As a result, the locking (of the sliding movement of the slider 311) performed by the locking member 319 is released.

In the second structural example, the locking member 319 can be moved in a direction parallel to the right side of the left controller 3 (i.e., the z-axis direction) as shown in Figure 21. Specifically, the locking member 319 is moved in a direction close to the inside of the slider 311 (i.e., the negative direction of the z-axis) to enter the storage state. In addition, the direction in which the locking member 319 can move can be any direction perpendicular to the sliding direction. For example, in other embodiments, as shown in Figure 22, the locking member 319 can also be moved in a direction perpendicular to the right side of the left controller 3 (i.e., the x-axis direction). At this time, the locking member 319 is moved in a direction close to the inside of the main body 310 (i.e., the positive direction of the x-axis) to enter the storage state.

Furthermore, in the second structural example, the locking member 319 can be moved to a position where its entirety is housed inside the left controller 3. That is, in the housed state, the locking member 319 is housed inside the left controller 3 as a whole. Here, in other embodiments, the locking member 319 may not necessarily be housed inside the left controller 3 as a whole in the housed state. That is, the locking member 319 may also be able to move between a first position protruding from the surface forming the above-mentioned recess and a second position closer to the interior of the left controller 3 than the first position (the second position may also be a position where a portion of the locking member 319 protrudes from the left controller 3). In addition, the locking member 319 may also be a member that is provided in a state of protruding from the surface forming the above-mentioned recess and deforms itself by receiving a force from elsewhere.

Figure 23 is a perspective view schematically illustrating an example of a locking member and a release button. In Figure 23 , to facilitate visualization of the structural elements (i.e., locking member 319, release button 313, slider 311, and spring 327), portions of the structure (such as the main body 310) are removed. Furthermore, for the same purpose, a portion of the top surface 326 of slider 311 is removed.

The locking member 319 is urged into the protruding position described above by an elastic member (specifically, a spring 327). Specifically, the left controller 3 includes a spring 327 therein. The spring 327 is positioned further inward of the slider 311 than the locking member 319. The spring 327 abuts against the locking member 319, urging it outward of the slider 311.

In the second configuration example, the left controller 3 includes a release button 313 (Figures 14 and 23). By pressing the release button 313, the user can shift the locking member 319 to the retracted state, thereby releasing the lock established by the locking member 319. The following describes in detail the structure for shifting the locking member 319 to the retracted state.

As shown in Figure 23, the release button 313 is configured to abut against the locking member 319. In other words, the release button 313 is connected to the locking member 319. The release button 313 and the locking member 319 move in pairs. In addition, the locking member 319 and the release button 313 can also be formed as one. In addition, although not shown, a groove (in other words, space) is provided inside the main body 310 and the slider 311 in which the locking member 319 and the release button 313 can move. The locking member 319 and the release button 313 are configured to be able to move along the above-mentioned groove in the front-back direction (i.e., the z-axis direction). Therefore, when the release button 313 is pressed (i.e., when moving in the negative direction of the z-axis), the locking member 319 also moves in the pressing direction together with the release button 313. In addition, as mentioned above, the locking member 319 is forced in the rear direction (i.e., the positive direction of the z-axis) by the spring 327. Therefore, when no force other than that of the spring 327 is applied (for example, when the release button 313 is not pressed), the locking member 319 is in the protruding state described above, and the release button 313 is in a state of being pushed up from the back of the main body 310 (specifically, the state of being pushed up from the inside to the outside of the main body 310 in a manner protruding from the back of the main body 310. This is referred to as the "pushed up state"). In other words, the release button 313 is, like the locking member 319, subjected to a backward force by the spring 327.

The user can press the release button 313 in the raised state. As the release button 313 is pressed, the release button 313 and the locking member 319 move toward the inside of the left controller 3. As a result, the release button 313 becomes a pressed state compared to the above-mentioned raised state (referred to as the "pressed state"). In addition, the result of the locking member 319 passing through the hole 325a and moving to the inside of the slider 311 is that it becomes the above-mentioned storage state. As described above, the user can press the release button 313 to put the locking member 319 into the storage state, and can release the lock performed by the locking member 319.

In addition, in the second structural example, the locking member 319 has an inclined surface 319a (Figure 23) at the lower end (i.e., the end on the negative side of the y-axis). That is, the locking member 319 has a shape in which the lower end becomes thinner as it goes toward the top. Specifically, the inclined surface 319a is inclined in a manner that approaches the direction in which the locking member 319 can move as it goes toward the top (in other words, the direction of movement from the protruding state to the retracted state, i.e., the negative side of the z-axis). The inclined surface 319a is provided to prevent the locking member 319 from being easily stuck on the top surface portion 303 of the left rail member 300 when the slider 311 is inserted into the left rail member 300 of the main device 2. Details will be described later.

Furthermore, the upper end of the locking member 319 (i.e., the end on the positive y-axis side) is provided with an end surface substantially perpendicular to the sliding direction ( FIG. 23 ). In other words, the upper end is not provided with an inclined surface like the lower end, and is shaped less inclined than the lower end. Consequently, the upper end is shaped to be more easily engaged with the top surface 303 of the left rail member 300 than the lower end.

In the second configuration example, similar to the first configuration example, a ZL button 39 is provided on the back of the main body 310, protruding from the back. Furthermore, the left controller 3 has a protrusion 314 (Figure 14) near the ZL button 39, which protrudes relative to the rest of the back of the main body 310. As shown in Figure 14, the release button 313 is provided near the ZL button 39 on the back of the main body 310 (in other words, near the protrusion 314). Furthermore, in the second configuration example, the ZL button 39 and the protrusion 314 are positioned higher than the release button 313, based on the "rest of the back" described above. Therefore, when viewing the left controller 3 from a predetermined direction parallel to the back (for example, from the left side as in Figure 14(b) or from above as in Figure 14(d)), at least a portion of the release button 313 is not visible. Consequently, the second configuration example reduces the possibility of a user accidentally pressing the release button 313 or the release button 313 accidentally hitting another object. In this way, the ZL button 39 and/or the protrusion 314 function as a protrusion protecting the release button 313. Providing the protrusion reduces the likelihood of the release button 313 being accidentally operated, causing the lock to be released and the left controller 3 to become detached from the main unit 2. Furthermore, in other embodiments, the ZL button 39 and/or the protrusion 314 may be positioned lower than the release button 313 relative to other portions of the rear surface. Even in this case, as long as they are positioned so as to protrude from the rear surface of the main unit 310, they can still function to protect the release button 313.

In the second configuration example, the release button 313 is provided on the back surface of the main body 310 ( FIG. 14 ). Thus, when the user holds the information processing device 1 (with the left controller 3 attached) so that the user's thumb operates the operating components 32 to 36 on the main surface (i.e., the front surface) (see FIG. 33 ), the user can easily operate the release button 313 with their index finger. In other words, the second configuration example provides a highly convenient information processing device that allows easy operation of the release button 313 while the user is holding the information processing device 1.

Furthermore, the release button 313 may be positioned at any location. For example, in other embodiments, the release button 313 may be provided on the main surface of the main body 310. This allows the user to visually identify the release button 313 while holding the information processing device 1, thereby providing a controller having an easy-to-operate release button 313.

In addition, in other embodiments, the release button 313 may also be provided on both the main surface and the back surface of the main body 310. In this case, the mechanism for moving the locking member 319 to the storage state in response to the pressing of the release button 313 may be either (a) a mechanism in which the locking member 319 is moved to the storage state in response to any one of the two release buttons 313 being pressed, or (b) a mechanism in which the locking member 319 is moved to the storage state in response to both of the two release buttons 313 being pressed. According to the structure of (a) above, the user only needs to operate the release button 313 of the two release buttons 313 that feels easy to operate, thereby improving the convenience of the information processing device. In addition, according to the structure of (b) above, even if any one of the two release buttons 313 is mistakenly operated, the lock will not be released, thereby reducing the possibility of the lock being mistakenly released.

In other embodiments, the left controller 3 may not include the release button 313. In this case, the user can release the lock of the locking member 319 by applying a force greater than a certain amount to the left controller 3 to slide the left controller 3 upward, thereby detaching the left controller 3 from the main device 2.

(Structure of the Mounting Surface of Slider 311)

As shown in FIG14 , in the second configuration example, similar to the first configuration example, a second L button 43, a second R button 44, a notification LED 45, and a pairing button 46 are provided on the mounting surface of the slider 311. In the second configuration example, two recesses are formed on the mounting surface of the slider 311, and the second L button 43 and the second R button 44 are provided in each recess.

FIG24 schematically illustrates an example of the structure of slider 311 near the second L button in the second configuration example. FIG24 shows slider 311 as viewed from the front (i.e., from the positive to the negative z-axis direction). FIG24 illustrates the structure of slider 311 near second L button 43, but the structure of slider 311 near second R button 44 is also the same as that shown in FIG24 .

As shown in Figure 24, the mounting surface of the slider 311 has an upper surface 311d, an inclined surface 311e, and a lower surface 311f. The upper surface 311d is a surface that is arranged at a position relatively (i.e., compared to the other surfaces 311e and 311f) away from the main body 310 of the left controller 3. The lower surface 311f is a surface that is arranged at a position relatively (i.e., compared to the upper surface 311d) close to the main body 310 of the left controller 3. In other words, the lower surface 311f is formed at a position lower than the upper surface 311d. The inclined surface 311e is a surface that connects the upper surface 311d and the lower surface 311f. In the second structural example, the inclination angle of the inclined surface 311e is set to be less than 90° (for example, less than 45°).

As shown in Figure 24, the second L-shaped button 43 is located on the lower surface 311f. Furthermore, in the second configuration example (unlike the first configuration example), the lower surface 311f and the inclined surface 311e extend from one end to the other in the width direction (i.e., the z-axis direction) of the slider 311. In other words, the recess formed by the lower surface 311f and the inclined surface 311e extends from one end to the other in the width direction of the slider 311. Thus, in the second configuration example, the second L-shaped button 43 is visually recognizable when viewing the slider 311 from the width direction.

Furthermore, in the second structural example, the recess formed by the lower surface 311f and the inclined surface 311e is provided at a position different from the end portion in the sliding direction of the slider 311. However, in other embodiments, the recess may also be provided at the end portion in the sliding direction of the slider 311. In other words, the end portion of the mounting surface in the sliding direction may also be formed by the lower surface.

In addition, in the second structural example, similarly to the first structural example, the second L button 43 is configured not to protrude beyond the above-mentioned upper layer 311d (Figure 24). In other words, the distance from the right side of the main body 310 to the second L button 43 (specifically, the distance in the x-axis direction) is greater than the distance from the right side to the lower layer 311f and is less than the distance from the right side to the upper layer 311d. Accordingly, the possibility of the second L button 43 contacting the bottom surface of the left rail member 300 when the slider 311 is installed on the left rail member 300 of the main device 2 can be reduced. As a result, the slider 311 can slide smoothly relative to the left rail member 300.

As described above, in the second configuration example, the operating portion (second L button 43 and second R button 44) is provided with inclined surfaces on both sides, making it easier to press the operating portion. Furthermore, the user's finger pressing the operating portion contacts the inclined surfaces, thereby reducing the discomfort the user might experience due to contact with the step between the lower and upper surfaces. Thus, according to the second configuration example, the operability of the left controller 3 can be improved.

Furthermore, inclined surface 311e can be a flat surface as shown in Figure 24, or a curved surface with a varying inclination angle. Furthermore, the inclination at the boundary between lower surface 311f and inclined surface 311e, and at the boundary between upper surface 311d and inclined surface 311e, can also change smoothly. This can further reduce the user's sense of discomfort.

Furthermore, as described above, in the second configuration example, the lower surface forming the recessed portion where the second L button 43 and the second R button 44 are located is formed to extend around the perimeter of the mounting surface ( FIG. 24 ). In contrast, the second configuration example also employs the same configuration as the first configuration example regarding pairing button 46. Specifically, instead of a lower surface extending around the perimeter of the mounting surface, pairing button 46 has an upper surface formed around the entire perimeter of pairing button 46. Furthermore, in the second configuration example, as in the first configuration example, pairing button 46 is configured so as not to protrude beyond the upper surface. Pairing button 46 is a button used to instruct the pairing process described above, and it is not expected that pairing button 46 will be pressed frequently during use of information processing device 1 (e.g., during game play). Therefore, in the second configuration example, to reduce the possibility of accidental operation of pairing button 46 during use of information processing device 1, as described above, it is configured to be more difficult to press than second L button 43 and second R button 44.

[1-2-3. Second Configuration Example Related to the Right Controller]

Figure 25 is a six-sided view of an example of the right controller 4 in the second structural example. In the second structural example, the right controller 4 has a difference from the first structural example in the structure of the slider and the various parts provided on the slider. Below, the structure of the right controller 4 in the second structural example is explained with the difference from the first structural example as the center. In Figure 25, for the same structure as that shown in Figure 6, the same reference mark is marked and the detailed description is omitted. In addition, in Figure 25, several operating parts (for example, the + button 57, etc.) have a shape different from that in Figure 6, but these operating parts have the same function as the operating parts in the first structural example marked with the same reference mark as the operating part.

In the second structural example, the right controller 4 includes a main body 330. The main body 330 has the same function as the housing 51 in the first structural example, and may be the same as the housing 51. As a structure for being mounted on the main device 2, the right controller 4 has the same structure as the left controller 3. As shown in FIG25 , the right controller 4 includes a slider 331. The slider 331, like the slider 62 in the first structural example, is a component for mounting the right controller 4 on the main device 2 in a manner that allows it to slide relative to the main device 2 and to be attached and detached.

The slider 331 is arranged to extend in the up-down direction (i.e., the y-axis direction) on the left side surface (i.e., the side surface on the positive side of the x-axis) of the main body 330 of the right controller 4. In the second structural example, the structure of the slider 331 of the right controller 4 (including the shape of the slider 331 and the various components provided on the slider 331) is the same as the structure of the slider 311 of the left controller 3 except for the position of the hole formed for locking the component. In the slider 311 of the left controller 3, a hole 325a is formed on one side surface of the shaft 325, whereas in the slider 331 of the right controller 4, a hole is formed on the other side surface of the shaft. Thus, in each of the controllers 3 and 4, a hole is formed on the back side of the controller (i.e., the surface on the positive side of the z-axis).

In addition, the slider 311 used in the left controller 3 and the slider 331 used in the right controller 4 may not be completely identical. For example, the positions of the operating parts provided on the sliders (for example, the second L button and the second R button, etc.) may also be different in the left controller 3 and the right controller 4.

In addition, in other embodiments, the slider 311 used in the left controller 3 and the slider 331 used in the right controller 4 may be the same. Accordingly, the slider used in the left controller 3 and the slider used in the right controller 4 can be shared, thereby achieving efficient manufacturing of the controllers.

As shown in Figure 25, the right controller 4 is provided with a locking member 339 and a release button 333 in the same manner as the left controller 3. The shapes of the locking member 339 and the release button 333 of the right controller 4 are the same as the shapes of the locking member 319 and the release button 313 of the left controller 3 (refer to Figure 23), except that they are opposite in shape. In addition, the locking member 339 of the right controller 4 is arranged at the same position as the locking member 319 of the left controller 3. That is, the locking member 339 is arranged at a position that is higher than the center (i.e., the positive direction side of the y-axis) in the sliding direction of the slider 331. In addition, the locking member 339 is arranged to protrude from the surface of the recess formed by the main body 330 of the right controller 4 (specifically, the left side of the main body 330) and the slider 331, and is arranged not to protrude from the space within the recess to the space outside the right controller 4.

Furthermore, the position of the release button 333 on the right controller 4 is the same as the position of the release button 313 on the left controller 3. Specifically, the release button 333 is located near the ZR button 61 formed on the back surface of the main body 330 (in other words, near the protrusion 334) ( FIG. 14 ). Thus, on the right controller 4, the ZR button 61 and/or the protrusion 334 function as a protrusion that protects the release button 333.

As described above, the locking member 339 and release button 333 of the right controller 4 have the same mechanism as the locking member 319 and release button 313 of the left controller 3. Thus, when the right controller 4 is mounted on the main device 2, the locking member 339 is locked with the locked portion of the right rail member of the main device 2, thereby locking the sliding movement of the right controller 4 mounted on the main device 2. Furthermore, in the above-described state, when the release button 333 is pressed, the locking member 339 enters the retracted state, and the lock established by the locking member 339 is released.

[1-2-4. Installation Operation in Second Configuration Example]

Next, the action of attaching and detaching the controller relative to the main device 2 in the second structural example will be described with reference to Figures 26 and 27. In addition, the following description will be given using the action of attaching and detaching the left controller 3 relative to the main device 2 as an example, but the action of attaching and detaching the right controller 4 relative to the main device 2 can also be performed in the same manner as the case of the left controller 3.

(Actions related to terminal connection)

When the left controller 3 is to be installed on the main device 2, in the second structural example, as in the first structural example, the user first inserts the lower end of the slider 311 of the left controller 3 from the upper end of the left rail member 300 of the main device 2 into the groove portion of the left rail member 300. As a result, the slider 311 is engaged with the left rail member 300 (in a sliding manner). In the second structural example, as in the first structural example, the engaged state of the slider 311 and the left rail member 300 is approximately the state shown in Figure 7. Then, the user moves the slider 311 inserted into the left rail member 300 toward the deep side of the left rail member 300 (i.e., downward).

FIG26 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a situation in which the slider 311 is installed in the vicinity of the left terminals 17 and 42 in front of and behind the left rail member 300. In addition, FIG26 shows a cross-sectional view perpendicular to the front-to-back direction (i.e., the z-axis direction) (a cross-sectional view on the same cross-sectional area as the C-C’ cross-sectional area shown in FIG14 with respect to the slider 311), and in order to make the structural elements of the main device 2 and the structural elements of the left controller 3 easier to understand, the structural elements of the left controller 3 are shown with oblique lines added.

FIG26(a) shows a state where the left controller 3 is not installed on the main device 2 (i.e., a state where the lower end of the slider 311 does not reach the deep end of the left rail member 300 of the main device 2). In addition, FIG26(b) shows a state where the left controller 3 is installed on the main device 2 (the aforementioned installed state). By sliding the slider 311 toward the deep side of the left rail member 300 (i.e., downward) from the state shown in FIG26(a), the installed state shown in FIG26(b) is achieved.

In addition, as described above, a member (specifically, wall portion 322 and top end portion 323) having a function of aligning the position of the left terminal 17 with the terminal 42 is provided at the protruding portion 321. Thus, according to the second structural example, when the terminals are in an installed state, contact can be made with a correct positional relationship.

In the installed state, the protrusion 321 of the slider 311 is inserted between the bottom surface 301 and the facing portion 304 of the left rail member 300. At this time, the terminal 42 of the left controller 3 contacts the left terminal 17 of the main device 2. As a result, the terminal 42 of the left controller 3 is electrically connected to the left terminal 17 of the main device 2.

Furthermore, as described above, in the installed state, a portion of the terminal 42 of the left controller 3 is positioned between the wall portion 307b of the left rail member 300 of the main device 2. Therefore, according to the second structural example, the possibility of the terminal 42 of the left controller 3 being offset in the parallel direction (i.e., the z-axis direction) relative to the left terminal 17 of the main device 2 can be reduced.

In addition, in the installed state, the terminal 42 of the left controller 3 is in contact with the left terminal 17 of the main device 2, so that the friction between the terminals can provide a force for preventing the slider 311 from sliding in the removal direction (i.e., the direction in which the slider 311 is pulled out from the left rail member 300, in other words, the opposite direction of the direction in which the slider 311 is inserted into the left rail member 300).

Furthermore, when installed, the leaf spring 305 provided on the left rail member 300 abuts the slider 311 (specifically, the upper surface 311d of the slider 311), pressing the left controller 3 away from the main device 2 (i.e., in the positive x-axis direction). This reduces any wobble between the main device 2 and the left controller 3, and securely connects the main device 2 and the left controller 3. Furthermore, the friction between the leaf spring 305 and the slider 311 provides a force that prevents the slider 311 from sliding in the removal direction.

As described above, in the second structural example, the installation state of the left controller 3 relative to the main device 2 is maintained not only by the locking member 319 described later, but also by each terminal 17 and 42 and the leaf spring 305.

(Actions Related to the Locking Member 319)

Next, the operation of the locking member 319 when the left controller 3 is mounted on the main device 2 will be described with reference to FIG27 . FIG27 schematically illustrates an example of the vicinity of the locking member 319 before and after the slider 311 is mounted on the left rail member 300. Furthermore, in FIG27 , to facilitate understanding of the operation of the locking member 319, only the components relevant to the description are shown, and components not relevant to the description are omitted.

When the left controller 3 is to be installed on the main device 2, as described above, the slider 311 of the left controller 3 is inserted into the groove portion of the left rail member 300 of the main device 2 and moves toward the deep side (i.e., downward) of the left rail member 300. Figure 27 (a) shows the state before the locking member 319 provided on the upper end portion of the slider 311 reaches the upper end of the top surface portion 303a of the left rail member 300. As described above, the locking member 319 is forced to be in a protruding state, so when the top surface portion 303a is not in contact with the locking member 319, the locking member 319 is in a protruding state.

When the slider 311 is moved to the depth of the left track member 300 from the state shown in (a) of Figure 27, the top surface portion 303a contacts the locking member 319. (b) of Figure 27 shows the state in which the top surface portion 303a contacts the locking member 319. In the state in which the top surface portion 303a contacts the locking member 319, the locking member 319 is pressed by the top surface portion 303a and becomes a storage state in which it is accommodated in the hole 325a of the shaft portion 325 provided on the slider 311. In addition, as described above, an inclined surface 319a is provided on the lower end side of the locking member 319. Therefore, the top surface portion 303a approaching the locking member 319 contacts the inclined surface 319a of the locking member 319. Thus, when the slider 311 is inserted into the left track member 300, the locking member 319 can be smoothly accommodated without being stuck in the top surface portion 303a.

When the slider 311 moves to the depth of the left rail member 300 from the state where the locking member 319 passes through the top surface portion 303a and becomes a stored state or a state close thereto (Figure 27(b)), the left controller 3 becomes an installed state installed on the main device 2. Figure 27(c) shows the installed state. In the installed state, the locking member 319 is located at a position corresponding to the notch C1 formed on the top surface portion 303a. Therefore, as shown in Figure 27(c), the locking member 319 becomes a protruding state again. At this time, the end of the upper end side (i.e., the positive direction side of the y-axis) of the locking member 319 is locked (in other words, abutted) with the locked portion of the top surface portion 303a. That is, the locking member 319 locks the sliding movement of the slider 311 in the extraction direction. In this way, the controller 3 can be locked (in other words, locked) relative to the main device 2 by the locking member 319.

In addition, as described above, the locking member 319 can also be set to protrude from at least the side surface and the top surface portion 326 of the main body 310. That is, it can also be set to the following state: a part of the locking member 319 enters the hole provided on the side surface of the main body 310 and the hole provided on the top surface portion 326 in the protruding state. Accordingly, no gap is generated between the locking member 319 and the main body 310 or the top surface portion 326, so the possibility of the top surface portion 303a of the left rail member 300 passing through the gap can be reduced. That is, the possibility of the following situation occurring: although the locking member 319 is in a protruding state, the top surface portion 303a passes through the above-mentioned gap, thereby the locking member 319 is not locked with the top surface portion 303a, resulting in the slider 311 being detached from the left rail member 300.

To remove the left controller 3 from the main device 2, the user presses the aforementioned release button 313. As a result of pressing the release button 313, the locking member 319 enters the retracted state as described above, thereby releasing the locking member 319 from locking the slider 311 in the removal direction. As a result, the user can more easily slide the left controller 3 in the removal direction (compared to a state where the locking member 319 locked the sliding movement), thereby removing the left controller 3 from the main device 2.

[1-3. Functions of terminals in the main device and controller]

Next, the functions of each terminal in the main device 2 and each controller 3 and 4 (in other words, the content of the signals and/or information sent and received using the terminal) are described. The first and second configuration examples described above differ in the terminal configuration. However, regardless of the terminal configuration, functions can be assigned to each terminal as described below.

In this embodiment, the left terminal 17 provided on the left rail member 300 of the main device 2, the right terminal 21 provided on the right rail member, the terminal 42 provided on the left controller 3, and the terminal 64 provided on the right controller 4 each include 10 terminals. These 10 terminals are referred to as the first terminal to the tenth terminal. The following functions are assigned to the first terminal to the tenth terminal.

Controller charging terminal

Terminal for data communication signals from the controller to the main device 2

Terminals for communicating data communication signals from the main device 2 to the controller and for communicating signals indicating that the main device 2 is connected (in other words, installed) to the controller

Terminal for communication of control signals from the controller to the main device 2

Terminal for communication of control signals from the main device 2 to the controller

Terminal for detecting the signal of the main device 2 detecting the connection (in other words, installation) of the controller

Terminal for detecting signals from the controller to identify expansion devices (e.g., expansion grips described later)

Terminals for supplying power from the controller to expansion devices

Ground terminal

Furthermore, any of the nine functions described above can be assigned to any terminal. Furthermore, in this embodiment, two of the first to tenth terminals are assigned the function of ground terminals. Furthermore, in other embodiments, at least some of the functions described above may not be assigned to a terminal, and functions other than those described above may be assigned to a terminal.

[1-4. Bracket Structure]

Figure 28 is a diagram showing the overall structure of an example of an information processing system in this embodiment. As described above, the information processing system includes the above-mentioned information processing device 1 and the bracket 5. As shown in Figure 28, the bracket 5 can carry the information processing device 1. In addition, the bracket 5 can communicate with the television 6 as an example of an external display device independent of the display 12 (either wired communication or wireless communication). When the information processing device 1 is placed on the bracket 5, the information processing system can display the image acquired or generated by the information processing device 1 on the television 6, and the details will be described later. In addition, in this embodiment, the bracket 5 has the function of charging the information processing device 1 placed thereon and the function of a hub device (specifically, a USB hub), and the details will be described later.

FIG29 is a diagram showing the external structure of an example of a bracket 5. The bracket 5 includes a housing that can detachably mount (or, in other words, install) the information processing device 1. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG29 , the housing includes a first support portion 71 having a groove 71a formed therein and a second, generally planar support portion 72.

As shown in Figure 29, the groove 71a formed in the first supporting portion 71 has a shape corresponding to the shape of the lower portion of the information processing device 1. Specifically, the groove 71a is a shape that can be inserted into the lower portion of the information processing device 1, and more specifically, it is a shape that is roughly consistent with the lower portion of the information processing device 1. Therefore, by inserting the lower portion of the information processing device 1 into the groove 71a, the information processing device 1 can be placed on the bracket 5. In addition, the second supporting portion 72 supports the surface of the information processing device 1 (i.e., the surface on which the display 12 is provided) whose lower portion is inserted into the groove 71a. Through this second supporting portion 72, the bracket 5 can support the information processing device 1 more stably. In addition, the shape of the shell shown in Figure 29 is an example, and in other embodiments, the shell of the bracket 5 can be any shape that can carry the information processing device 1.

Furthermore, in FIG29 , the information processing device 1 is placed on the cradle 5 with the main surface of the main device 2 (i.e., the surface of the display 12) facing the second support portion 72. However, in this embodiment, the information processing device 1 can also be placed on the cradle 5 with the back surface of the main device 2 facing the second support portion 72. In other words, in this embodiment, the user can place the information processing device 1 on the cradle 5 facing outward (i.e., with the display 12 visible) or facing inward (i.e., with the display 12 hidden).

As shown in Figure 29, the bracket 5 also includes a main terminal 73 for communication between the bracket 5 and the information processing device 1. As shown in Figure 29, the main terminal 73 is located on the bottom surface of the groove 71a formed in the first support portion 71. More specifically, the main terminal 73 is located at a position where the lower terminal 27 of the information processing device 1 contacts when the information processing device 1 is mounted on the bracket 5. In this embodiment, the main terminal 73 is a USB connector (more specifically, a male connector). As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the information processing device 1 can be mounted on the bracket 5 either facing outward or inward. Therefore, the lower terminal 27 of the information processing device 1 and the main terminal 73 of the bracket 5 have symmetrical shapes with respect to the depth direction (i.e., the z-axis direction shown in Figure 1), enabling communication regardless of whether they are connected in either direction in the depth direction.

As shown in FIG29 , the cradle 5 includes a sleep button 74. The sleep button 74 is a button for switching the main unit 2 mounted on the cradle 5 between an on mode and a sleep mode. Furthermore, in other embodiments, the sleep button 74 may also (or instead of) have the function of switching the main unit 2 between an on mode and a sleep mode and also have the function of switching the main unit 2 on/off.

In this embodiment, the sleep button 74 is provided on the front surface of the first support portion 71. The sleep button 74 may be provided at any location where it can be pressed while the information processing device 1 is mounted. For example, the sleep button 74 may be provided on the side surface of the housing of the cradle 5 or on the back surface of the second support portion 72.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the sleep button 74 has a light-emitting portion (specifically, an LED). The light-emitting portion of the sleep button 74 is used to notify the user of the state of the main device 2 mounted on the bracket 5. That is, the light-emitting state of the light-emitting portion (in other words, the lighting state) changes according to the state of the main device 2 mounted on the bracket 5. For example, in the present embodiment, when the main device 2 mounted on the bracket 5 is in the on mode, the light-emitting portion lights up, and when the main device 2 is in the sleep mode or the power is turned off, the light-emitting portion goes out. In addition, when the main device 2 has information that should be notified to the user (for example, program update information, notifications, advertisements, etc.), the light-emitting portion flashes. In addition, the above-mentioned light-emitting portion may not be provided on the sleep button 74, for example, it may be provided at any position of the housing of the bracket 5.

Although not shown in FIG29 , the bracket 5 has terminals (a plurality of terminals in this embodiment, specifically, a monitoring terminal 132 , a power supply terminal 134 , and an expansion terminal 137 shown in FIG32 ) on the back of the housing. Details of these terminals will be described later.

The shape, number, and placement of the various components (specifically, the housing, terminals, buttons, etc.) provided on the bracket 5 described above are arbitrary. For example, in other embodiments, the housing may have another shape capable of supporting the information processing device 1. Furthermore, some of the terminals provided on the housing may be provided on the front surface of the housing. Furthermore, in other embodiments, the bracket 5 may not include some of the aforementioned components.

[2. Internal structure of each device]

[2-1. Internal structure of the main unit 2]

FIG30 is a block diagram showing an example of the internal structure of the main device 2. In addition to the structure shown in FIG3 , the main device 2 further includes the components 81 to 98 shown in FIG30 . Some of these components 81 to 98 may be mounted as electronic components on an electronic circuit board and housed in the housing 11.

(Structure related to execution of information processing)

The main device 2 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 81. The CPU 81 is an information processing unit that performs various information processing operations executed by the main device 2. The CPU 81 performs various information processing operations by executing information processing programs stored in a storage unit to which the CPU 81 has access (specifically, an internal storage medium such as a flash memory 84 or an external storage medium installed in each slot 23 or 24).

As an example of an internal storage medium built into the main device 2 itself, the main device 2 includes a flash memory 84 and a DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory) 85. The flash memory 84 and the DRAM 85 are connected to the CPU 81. The flash memory 84 is a memory primarily used to store various data (which may also be programs) stored in the main device 2. The DRAM 85 is a memory used to temporarily store various data and commands used in information processing.

The main unit 2 includes a first slot interface (hereinafter referred to as "I/F") 91. The main unit 2 also includes a second slot I/F 92. Each slot I/F 91 and 92 is connected to the CPU 81. The first slot I/F 91 is connected to the first slot 23 and, in response to instructions from the CPU 81, reads and writes data from a first type of storage medium (e.g., an SD card) installed in the first slot 23. The second slot I/F 92 is connected to the second slot 24 and, in response to instructions from the CPU 81, reads and writes data from a second type of storage medium (e.g., a dedicated memory card) installed in the second slot 24.

The CPU 81 appropriately reads or writes data between the memories 84 and 85 and the storage media to execute the above-mentioned information processing.

(Structures related to communication)

The main device 2 includes a network communication unit 82. The network communication unit 82 is connected to the CPU 81. The network communication unit 82 communicates with external devices via a network (specifically, wireless communication). In this embodiment, the network communication unit 82 is, for example, a communication module that has obtained WI-FI certification and communicates with external devices via a wireless LAN. In other embodiments, the main device 2 may also (or instead of) have the function of connecting to a mobile communication network (in other words, a mobile phone communication network) for communication in addition to the function of connecting to a wireless LAN for communication.

The main device 2 includes a controller communication unit 83. The controller communication unit 83 is connected to the CPU 81. The controller communication unit 83 wirelessly communicates with each controller 3 and/or 4. The communication method between the main device 2 and each controller is arbitrary. In this embodiment, the controller communication unit 83 communicates with each controller in accordance with the Bluetooth (registered trademark) standard.

The CPU 81 is connected to the left terminal 17, the right terminal 21, and the lower terminal 27. When the CPU 81 is communicating with the left controller 3 via a wire, the CPU 81 transmits data to the left controller 3 via the left terminal 17. Furthermore, when the CPU 81 is communicating with the right controller 4 via a wire, the CPU 81 transmits data to the right controller 4 via the right terminal 21. Furthermore, when the CPU 81 is communicating with the cradle 5, the CPU 81 transmits data to the cradle 5 via the lower terminal 27.

Thus, in this embodiment, the main device 2 can perform both wired communication and wireless communication with the left and right controllers 3 and 4. The process of switching between wired communication and wireless communication will be described later.

In addition, the main device 2 can communicate with multiple left controllers simultaneously (in other words, in parallel). In addition, the main device 2 can communicate with multiple right controllers simultaneously (in other words, in parallel). Therefore, the user can use multiple left controllers and multiple right controllers to input into the information processing device 1.

(Structure Related to Input and Output to Main Device 2)

The main device 2 includes a touch panel controller 86, which is a circuit that controls the touch panel 13. The touch panel controller 86 is connected to the touch panel 13 and also to the CPU 81. Based on signals from the touch panel 13, the touch panel controller 86 generates data indicating, for example, the position where a touch input was performed, and outputs the data to the CPU 81.

Furthermore, the aforementioned display 12 is connected to the CPU 81. The CPU 81 displays, on the display 12, an image generated (for example, by executing the aforementioned information processing) and/or an image acquired from the outside.

The main unit 2 includes a codec circuit 87 and speakers (specifically, a left speaker and a right speaker) 88. The codec circuit 87 is connected to the speaker 88 and the sound input/output terminal 25, and is also connected to the CPU 81. The codec circuit 87 is a circuit that controls the input and output of sound data to the speaker 88 and the sound input/output terminal 25. That is, when the codec circuit 87 receives sound data from the CPU 81, it outputs the sound signal obtained by performing D/A conversion on the sound data to the speaker 88 or the sound input/output terminal 25. As a result, sound is output from the speaker 88 or the sound output unit (e.g., headphones) connected to the sound input/output terminal 25. In addition, when the codec circuit 87 receives a sound signal from the sound input/output terminal 25, it performs A/D conversion on the sound signal and outputs sound data in a specified format to the CPU 81.

The volume button 26 (specifically, the volume buttons 26a and 26b shown in FIG. 3 ) is connected to the CPU 81. The CPU 81 controls the volume of sound output from the speaker 88 or the sound output unit based on input to the volume button 26.

The main device 2 includes an acceleration sensor 89. In this embodiment, the acceleration sensor 89 detects the magnitude of linear acceleration along three predetermined axes (e.g., the x, y, and z axes shown in FIG1 ). Alternatively, the acceleration sensor 89 may detect acceleration along one or two axes.

The main device 2 also includes an angular velocity sensor 90. In this embodiment, the angular velocity sensor 90 detects angular velocity about three predetermined axes (e.g., the xyz axes shown in FIG1 ). Alternatively, the angular velocity sensor 90 may detect angular velocity about one axis or two axes.

The acceleration sensor 89 and angular velocity sensor 90 are connected to the CPU 81, and the detection results of the acceleration sensor 89 and angular velocity sensor 90 are output to the CPU 81. The CPU 81 can calculate information related to the activity and/or posture of the main device 2 based on the detection results of the acceleration sensor 89 and angular velocity sensor 90. In addition, in other embodiments, other types of sensors (for example, inertial sensors) can also be used as sensors for calculating the activity, posture, and/or position of the main device 2.

(Structures related to electricity)

The main device 2 includes a power control unit 97 and a battery 98. The power control unit 97 is connected to the battery 98 and the CPU 81. In addition, although not shown in the figure, the power control unit 97 is connected to each part of the main device 2 (specifically, each part that receives power from the battery 98, the left terminal 17, and the right terminal 21). The power control unit 97 controls the power supply from the battery 98 to the above-mentioned parts based on instructions from the CPU 81. In addition, the power control unit 97 is connected to the power button 28. The power control unit 97 controls the power supply to the above-mentioned parts based on the input to the power button 28. That is, when the power button 28 is operated to turn off the power, the power control unit 97 stops the power supply to all or part of the above-mentioned parts, and when the power button 28 is operated to turn on the power, the power control unit 97 starts to supply power to all or part of the above-mentioned parts. Furthermore, when the power button 28 is pressed to switch to the sleep mode, the power control unit 97 stops the power supply to a portion of the components including the display 12. When the power button 28 is pressed to switch to the on mode, the power control unit 97 starts the power supply to the portion of the components. Furthermore, the power control unit 97 outputs information indicating an input to the power button 28 (specifically, information indicating whether the power button 28 is pressed) to the CPU 81.

Furthermore, a battery 98 is connected to the lower terminal 27. When an external charging device (e.g., the cradle 5) is connected to the lower terminal 27 and power is supplied to the main unit 2 via the lower terminal 27, the supplied power is charged into the battery 98. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the charging capacity of the battery 98 of the main unit 2 is larger than the charging capacity of the batteries included in the controllers 3 and 4 described later.

(Other structures)

The main device 2 is equipped with a magnetic sensor (also referred to as a magnetic sensor) 93 that detects the strength and/or direction of a magnetic field. The magnetic sensor 93 is connected to the CPU 81, and the detection results of the magnetic sensor 93 are output to the CPU 81. In this embodiment, the magnetic sensor 93 is used to detect the opening and closing of a protective cover (not shown) attached to the information processing device 1. For example, a magnet is provided on the protective cover, and the CPU 81 detects whether the protective cover is covering the main surface of the main device 2 based on the detection results of the magnetic sensor 93. In addition, when the CPU 81 detects this state, for example, it turns off the display of the display 12.

The main device 2 includes an ambient light sensor 94 for detecting the intensity of ambient light surrounding the main device 2. The ambient light sensor 94 is connected to the CPU 81, and the detection results of the ambient light sensor 94 are output to the CPU 81. In this embodiment, the ambient light sensor 94 is used to adjust the brightness of the display 12. Specifically, the CPU 81 controls the brightness of the display 12 based on the detection results of the ambient light sensor 94.

The main unit 2 includes a cooling fan 96 for dissipating heat from within the main unit 2. As the cooling fan 96 operates, air from outside the housing 11 is drawn in through the air intake 11d, and air from within the housing 11 is discharged through the air exhaust 11c, thereby dissipating heat from within the housing 11. The cooling fan 96 is connected to the CPU 81, and the operation of the cooling fan 96 is controlled by the CPU 81. The main unit 2 also includes a temperature sensor 95 for detecting the temperature within the main unit 2. The temperature sensor 95 is connected to the CPU 81, and the detection result of the temperature sensor 95 is output to the CPU 81. The CPU 81 controls the operation of the cooling fan 96 based on the detection result of the temperature sensor 95.

[2-2. Internal structure of the left controller 3]

Fig. 31 is a block diagram showing an example of the internal structure of the information processing device 1. The details of the internal structure of the main device 2 in the information processing device 1 are shown in Fig. 30 and are therefore omitted in Fig. 31 .

(Structures related to communication)

The left controller 3 includes a communication control unit 101 for communicating with the main device 2. As shown in Figure 31, the communication control unit 101 is connected to various structural elements including the above-mentioned terminal 42. In this embodiment, the communication control unit 101 can communicate with the main device 2 through two types of communication: wired communication via the terminal 42 and wireless communication not via the terminal 42. The communication control unit 101 controls the communication method of the left controller 3 with the main device 2. That is, when the left controller 3 is installed on the main device 2, the communication control unit 101 communicates with the main device 2 via the terminal 42. In addition, when the left controller 3 is separated from the main device 2, wireless communication is performed between the communication control unit 101 and the main device 2 (specifically, the controller communication unit 83). The wireless communication between the controller communication unit 83 and the communication control unit 101 is performed in accordance with the Bluetooth (registered trademark) standard.

The left controller 3 also includes a memory 102 such as a flash memory. The communication control unit 101 is composed of, for example, a microcomputer (also referred to as a microprocessor), and executes firmware stored in the memory 102 to perform various processes.

(Structure related to input)

The left controller 3 includes buttons 103 (specifically, buttons 33 to 39, 43, and 44). The left controller 3 also includes the aforementioned analog joystick (referred to as "joystick" in FIG. 31 ) 32. Each button 103 and analog joystick 32 repeatedly outputs information related to operations performed on them to the communication control unit 101 at appropriate times.

The left controller 3 includes an acceleration sensor 104. In this embodiment, the acceleration sensor 104 detects the magnitude of linear acceleration along three predetermined axes (e.g., the xyz axes shown in FIG1 ). Alternatively, the acceleration sensor 104 may detect acceleration along one or two axes.

The left controller 3 includes an angular velocity sensor 105. In this embodiment, the angular velocity sensor 105 detects angular velocity about three predetermined axes (for example, the xyz axes shown in FIG1). Alternatively, the angular velocity sensor 105 may detect angular velocity about one axis or two axes.

The acceleration sensor 104 and the angular velocity sensor 105 are connected to the communication control unit 101. The detection results of the acceleration sensor 104 and the angular velocity sensor 105 are repeatedly output to the communication control unit 101 at appropriate timings.

The communication control unit 101 obtains input-related information (specifically, information related to operations or sensor detection results) from each input unit (specifically, each button 103, analog joystick 32, and each sensor 104 and 105). The communication control unit 101 transmits operation data containing the obtained information (or information obtained by performing specified processing on the obtained information) to the main device 2. Furthermore, the operation data is repeatedly transmitted at a rate of once per specified time. The interval for transmitting input-related information to the main device 2 can be the same or different for each input unit.

By transmitting the above-mentioned operation data to the main device 2, the main device 2 can obtain inputs to the left controller 3. In other words, the main device 2 can determine the operation of each button 103 and analog joystick 32 based on the operation data. In addition, the main device 2 can calculate information related to the movement and/or posture of the left controller 3 based on the operation data (specifically, the detection results of each sensor 104 and 105).

(Structure related to output)

The notification LED 45 is connected to the communication control unit 101. In this embodiment, the notification LED 45 is controlled based on a command from the main device 2. Specifically, upon receiving the command from the main device 2, the communication control unit 101 outputs a control signal to the notification LED 45 to control the lighting of the notification LED 45 in accordance with the command.

Furthermore, the communication control unit 101 may switch whether or not to illuminate the notification LED 45 depending on whether the left controller 3 is attached to the main device 2. Specifically, the notification LED 45 may be controlled so that the notification LED 45 is not illuminated when the left controller 3 is attached to the main device 2, and is illuminated when the left controller 3 is not attached to the main device 2. This is because, considering that, when the left controller 3 is attached to the main device 2, the notification LED 45 cannot be visually recognized, there is less need for illumination.

The left controller 3 is provided with a vibrator 107 for notifying the user by vibration. In the present embodiment, the vibrator 107 is controlled according to an instruction from the main device 2. That is, when the communication control unit 101 receives the above-mentioned instruction from the main device 2, it drives the vibrator 107 according to the instruction. Here, the left controller 3 is provided with an amplifier 106. When the communication control unit 101 receives the above-mentioned instruction, it outputs a control signal corresponding to the instruction to the amplifier 106. The amplifier 106 amplifies the control signal from the communication control unit 101, generates a drive signal for driving the vibrator 107, and provides the drive signal to the vibrator 107. As a result, the vibrator 107 is operated. In addition, the vibrator 107 can be any type of actuator that generates vibration.

(Structures related to electricity)

The left controller 3 includes a power supply unit 108. In this embodiment, the power supply unit 108 includes a battery and a power control circuit. Although not shown, the power control circuit is connected to the battery and to various components of the left controller 3 (specifically, components that receive power from the battery). The power control circuit controls the power supply from the battery to these components.

In addition, the battery is connected to the terminal 42. In this embodiment, when the left controller 3 is mounted on the main device 2, the battery is charged by power supply from the main device 2 via the terminal 42 under predetermined conditions, which will be described in detail later.

[2-3. Internal structure of right controller 4]

(Structures related to communication)

As shown in Figure 31, the right controller 4 has a communication control unit 111 for communicating with the main device 2. In addition, the right controller 4 has a memory 112 connected to the communication control unit 111. The communication control unit 111 is connected to various structural elements including the above-mentioned terminal 64. The communication control unit 111 and the memory 112 have the same functions as the communication control unit 101 and the memory 102 of the left controller 3. Therefore, the communication control unit 111 can communicate with the main device 2 through both wired communication via the terminal 64 and wireless communication not via the terminal 64 (specifically, communication in accordance with the Bluetooth (registered trademark) standard), and control the communication method of the right controller 4 with the main device 2.

(Structure related to input)

The right controller 4 has the same input units as the left controller 3 (specifically, the buttons 113, the analog stick 52, the acceleration sensor 114, and the angular velocity sensor 115). These input units have the same functions as the input units of the left controller 3 and operate in the same manner.

(Structure related to output)

The notification LED 67 of the right controller 4 operates similarly to the notification LED 45 of the left controller 3. That is, upon receiving a command from the main device 2, the communication control unit 111 outputs a control signal to the notification LED 67 to control lighting of the notification LED 67 according to the command.

The right controller 4 also includes a vibrator 117 and an amplifier 116. The vibrator 117 and the amplifier 116 operate in the same manner as the vibrator 107 and the amplifier 106 of the left controller 3. Specifically, the communication control unit 111 operates the vibrator 117 using the amplifier 116 according to a command from the main device 2.

(Structures related to electricity)

The right controller 4 includes a power supply unit 118. This unit has the same functions and operates similarly to the power supply unit 108 of the left controller 3. Specifically, it controls the supply of power from the battery to the various components receiving power. Furthermore, when the right controller 4 is attached to the main unit 2, the battery is charged using power from the main unit 2 via terminal 64 under specified conditions.

(Other structures)

The right controller 4 has an NFC communication unit 122. The NFC communication unit 122 performs short-range wireless communication based on the NFC (Near Field Communication) standard. The NFC communication unit 122 has the function of a so-called NFC reader/writer. For example, the NFC communication unit 122 has an antenna for short-range wireless communication and a circuit (such as an NFC chip) that generates a signal (radio wave) to be sent from the antenna. In addition, short-range wireless communication is not limited to short-range wireless communication based on the NFC standard, and may also be any proximity communication (also called contactless communication). Proximity communication includes, for example, the following communication method: an electromotive force is generated in a device of the other party by radio waves from a device of one party (for example, by electromagnetic induction).

In addition, the right controller 4 is equipped with an infrared camera 123. The infrared camera 123 includes an infrared camera that captures images of the surroundings of the right controller 4. In this embodiment, the infrared camera 123 is used to capture images of the user's hand. The information processing device 1 determines input (e.g., gesture input, etc.) performed by the hand based on the captured information of the hand (e.g., position, size, and shape). In addition, the infrared camera 123 can also use ambient light for capturing images, but in this embodiment, it includes an irradiation unit that irradiates infrared rays. The irradiation unit irradiates infrared rays, for example, in synchronization with the timing of the infrared camera capturing an image. The infrared rays irradiated by the irradiation unit are reflected by an object (e.g., the user's hand), and the reflected infrared rays are received by the infrared camera, thereby acquiring an infrared image. This allows for a clearer infrared image to be obtained. In this embodiment, the infrared camera 123 including an infrared camera is used, but in other embodiments, a visible light camera (a camera using a visible light image sensor) may be used as the imaging unit instead of the infrared camera.

The right controller 4 includes a processing unit 121. The processing unit 121 is connected to the communication control unit 111 and to the NFC communication unit 122. The processing unit 121 performs management processing on the NFC communication unit 122 according to instructions from the main device 2. For example, the processing unit 121 controls the operation of the NFC communication unit 122 according to instructions from the main device 2. In addition, the processing unit 121 controls the activation of the NFC communication unit 122, or controls the operation of the NFC communication unit 122 on the communication counterpart (for example, an NFC tag) (specifically, reading and writing, etc.). In addition, the processing unit 121 receives information that should be sent to the above-mentioned communication counterpart from the main device 2 via the communication control unit 111 and transmits the information to the NFC communication unit 122, or obtains information received from the above-mentioned communication counterpart from the NFC communication unit 122 and sends the information to the main device 2 via the communication control unit 111.

Furthermore, the processing unit 121 performs management processing on the infrared imaging unit 123 according to instructions from the main device 2. For example, the processing unit 121 causes the infrared imaging unit 123 to perform an imaging operation, or obtains information based on the imaging result (such as information of the captured image or information calculated based on the information) and transmits the information to the main device 2 via the communication control unit 111.

[2-4. Internal structure of bracket 5]

Fig. 32 is a block diagram showing an example of the internal structure of the cradle 5. In Fig. 32 , details of the internal structure of the main unit 2 are omitted because they are shown in Fig. 30 .

(Structures related to image transformation)

As shown in Figure 32, the cradle 5 includes a conversion unit 131 and a monitoring terminal 132. The conversion unit 131 is connected to the main terminal 73 and the monitoring terminal 132 described above. The conversion unit 131 converts the format of the signal related to the image (also known as video) and sound received from the main device 2 into a format for output to the television 6. Here, in this embodiment, the main device 2 outputs the image and sound signals to the cradle 5 as display port signals (i.e., signals that comply with the DisplayPort standard) . In addition, in this embodiment, communication between the cradle 5 and the television 6 uses communication based on the HDMI (registered trademark) standard. That is, the monitoring terminal 132 described above is an HDMI terminal, and the cradle 5 and the television 6 are connected via an HDMI cable. Based on the above, the conversion unit 131 converts the display port signal (specifically, a signal representing the image and sound) received from the main device 2 via the main terminal 73 into an HDMI signal. The converted HDMI signal is output to the television 6 via the monitoring terminal 132.

In addition, the cradle 5 is provided with a processing unit 135 for performing various information processing in the cradle 5. The processing unit 135 is connected to the sleep button 74 mentioned above, and is also connected to the main terminal 73 via the connection processing unit 136 (details of which will be described later). The processing unit 135 detects the operation of the sleep button 74 and notifies the main device 2 that the operation has been performed. When the main device 2 receives the above notification, it switches between its own on mode and sleep mode. In this way, in this embodiment, the information processing device 1 switches between the on mode and the sleep mode according to the sleep button 74 being pressed when the main device 2 is mounted on the cradle 5.

(Charging-related structures)

The cradle 5 includes a power control unit 133 and a power terminal 134. The power terminal 134 is a terminal for connecting a charging device (not shown) (e.g., an AC adapter). In this embodiment, the power terminal 134 is connected to an AC adapter to supply commercial power to the cradle 5.

When the main device 2 is attached to the cradle 5, the power control unit 133 supplies power from the power supply terminal 134 to the main device 2 via the main terminal 73. As described above, the battery 98 of the main device 2 is thereby charged.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the power terminal 134 is a connector having the same shape as the lower terminal 27 of the information processing device 1 (i.e., a concave USB terminal). Therefore, in this embodiment, the charging device can be connected to the cradle 5 to charge the information processing device 1 via the cradle 5, or the charging device can be directly connected to the main device 2 to charge the information processing device 1.

(Other structures)

In addition, the bracket 5 has a connection processing unit 136 and an expansion terminal 137. The expansion terminal 137 is a terminal for connecting to other devices. In the present embodiment, the bracket 5 has a plurality of (more specifically, 3) USB terminals as the expansion terminal 137. The connection processing unit 136 is connected to the main terminal 73 and each expansion terminal 137. The connection processing unit 136 has a function as a USB hub, for example, managing the communication between the device connected to the expansion terminal 137 and the main device 2 connected to the main terminal 73 (that is, appropriately distributing and sending the signal from a certain device to other devices). As described above, in the present embodiment, the information processing device 1 can communicate with other devices via the bracket 5. In addition, the connection processing unit 136 can also be capable of changing the communication speed or supplying power to the device connected to the expansion terminal 137.

[3. Overview of Operations in the Information Processing System]

As described above, the left and right controllers 3 and 4 are attachable and detachable to the information processing device 1 in this embodiment. Furthermore, by being mounted on a bracket 5, the information processing device 1 can output images (and audio) to the television 6. Therefore, the information processing device 1 can be used in various ways, as described below. The following describes the operation of the information processing system in its main ways of use.

[3-1. How to use the controller by attaching it to the main device]

FIG33 is a diagram showing an example of how the information processing device 1 is used with the controllers 3 and 4 mounted on the main device 2 (referred to as the "mounted state"). As shown in FIG33 , when the controllers 3 and 4 are mounted on the main device 2, the information processing device 1 can be used as a portable device (e.g., a portable game console).

In the installed state, the main device 2 communicates with the controllers 3 and 4 via wired communication (i.e., communication via the terminals of the interconnected devices). Specifically, the main device 2 receives operation data from the controllers 3 and 4 installed in the main device, and performs information processing based on the received operation data (specifically, using the operation data as input).

In other embodiments, wireless communication can also be performed between the main device 2 and the controller in the installed state. However, in the installed state, the distance between the main device 2 and the controller is too close, so smooth wireless communication may not be possible. In contrast, in this embodiment, wired communication is performed between the main device 2 and the controller in the installed state, thereby improving communication reliability.

Furthermore, when installed, the four operating buttons 33 to 36 of the left controller 3 can also be used for directional input (in other words, directional indication). In this case, the user can use both the analog joystick 32 for directional input and the operating buttons 33 to 36 for directional input. This allows the user to use the operating unit that suits their preference for directional input, thereby improving operability. The program running on the main device 2 can freely determine the type of indication used for each operating button.

In addition, in this embodiment, the configuration of the analog joystick and the four operating buttons (i.e., A, B, X, and Y buttons) in the left controller 3 and the right controller 4 is opposite. That is, in the installed state, the analog joystick 32 in the left controller 3 is configured above the four operating buttons 33 to 36. In contrast, the four operating buttons 53 to 56 in the right controller 4 are configured above the analog joystick 52. Therefore, when the information processing device 1 is held with both left and right hands at the same height (in other words, at the same position in the vertical direction) as shown in Figure 33, one hand is in a position that is easy to operate the analog joystick, and the other hand is in a position that is easy to operate the four operating buttons. That is, in this embodiment, an information processing device that is easy to operate the analog joystick and the four operating buttons can be provided.

In addition, as the left controller and/or right controller, a controller having a structure different from that of the present embodiment (for example, a structure having different functions or a structure having a different configuration of the operating portion, etc.) may also be prepared (see "[5-1. Other types of controllers]" described later). In this case, it is also possible to replace the left controller 3 and/or right controller 4 in the present embodiment with a left controller and/or right controller of a different structure installed on the main device 2, thereby providing an information processing device with a different operating feel compared to the present embodiment (i.e., the information processing device 1 shown in FIG33).

[3-2. How to use one controller by removing it]

As described above, in this embodiment, the information processing device 1 can also be used in a state (referred to as a "detached state") where the left and right controllers 3 and 4 are detached from the main device 2. As modes for using the information processing device 1 in the detached state, at least two modes are conceivable: a mode in which one user uses two controllers 3 and 4, and a mode in which two users each use one controller.

(One user uses two controllers)

Fig. 34 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which a user uses the information processing device 1 in the detached state by holding two controllers 3 and 4. As shown in Fig. 34, in the detached state, the user can operate the device by holding a set of two controllers 3 and 4 in their left and right hands, respectively.

In addition, in the present embodiment, information related to the activity and/or posture of the controller can be calculated based on the detection results of the acceleration sensor and/or angular velocity sensor possessed by the controller. Therefore, the information processing device 1 can accept the operation of making the controller itself active as input. The user can not only operate the operating parts (operation buttons and analog joystick) possessed by the controller, but also make the controller itself active to change the position and/or posture of the controller. That is, in the present embodiment, the information processing device 1, as a portable device, can provide the user with an operation of making the controller active (without making the display active). In addition, the information processing device 1, as a portable device, can provide an information processing device that allows the user to operate in a place away from the display 12.

In addition, not limited to the detached state, the information processing device 1 can also calculate information related to the activity and/or posture of the information processing device 1 based on the detection results of the acceleration sensor 89 and/or angular velocity sensor 90 possessed by the main device 2 in the attached state.

In the disconnected state, the main device 2 communicates with each controller 3 and 4 via wireless communication. That is, the main device 2 receives operation data from each controller 3 and 4 with which it has established wireless communication (paired), and performs information processing based on the received operation data (specifically, using the operation data as input).

In this embodiment, during wireless communication, the main device 2 distinguishes between multiple controllers serving as communication partners. For example, the main device 2 identifies whether received operation data is from the left controller 3 or the right controller 4. The method for distinguishing controllers will be described later.

(Two users each using one controller)

Figure 35 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which two users each hold a controller to use the information processing device 1 in a detached state. As shown in Figure 35, in the detached state, the two users can respectively use the controllers they hold to perform operations. Specifically, the following method can be implemented: the user on one side (referred to as the "first user") uses the left controller 3 to perform operations, and the user on the other side (referred to as the "second user") uses the right controller 4 to perform operations. The information processing device 1 performs the following information processing, for example: based on the operation of the left controller 3, the action of the first object (such as the player character) in the virtual space is controlled, and based on the operation of the right controller 4, the action of the second object in the virtual space is controlled. In addition, in the method shown in Figure 35, as in the method shown in Figure 34, the user can operate the operating unit of the controller and/or operate to activate the controller itself.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the positional relationship between the analog stick 52 and the operating buttons 53-56 in the right controller 4 is opposite to the positional relationship between the two operating components in the left controller 3. Therefore, if two users hold the left and right controllers 3 and 4 in the same orientation, as shown in Figure 35, the positional relationship between the two operating components will be the same in both controllers. In other words, in this embodiment, users can use the left and right controllers 3 and 4 removed from the main unit 2 with the same operational feel regarding the two operating components. This improves the operability of the controllers.

Furthermore, in the detached state, the four operation buttons 33 to 36 of the left controller 3 can also function the same as the four operation buttons 53 to 56 of the right controller 4 (in other words, can be used to perform the same instructions). Specifically, the right direction button 33 can function the same as the Y button 56, the down direction button 34 can function the same as the X button 55, the up direction button 35 can function the same as the B button 54, and the left direction button 36 can function the same as the A button 53. Thus, in this embodiment, the functions of the operation buttons 33 to 36 can be changed between the attached and detached states. The instructions for each operation button can be freely determined by the program executed in the main device 2.

Furthermore, in FIG35 , information processing device 1 divides the display area of display 12 into two, with one divided display area displaying an image for a first user (e.g., an image including a first object), and the other divided display area displaying an image for a second user (e.g., an image including a second object). However, depending on the application executed on information processing device 1, information processing device 1 may also display images for two users (e.g., images including both a first object and a second object) without dividing the display area of display 12.

35 , similarly to the embodiment shown in FIG34 , the main device 2 communicates with the controllers 3 and 4 via wireless communication. At this time, the main device 2 distinguishes the controllers serving as the communication partners.

(Other methods)

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the right controller 4 includes an infrared imaging unit 123. Therefore, even when the right controller 4 is removed from the main device 2, the information processing device 1 can perform information processing based on the imaging results (also referred to as detection results) of the infrared imaging unit 123. As an example of this information processing, the following processing is considered.

For example, when an accessory having an operating unit (hereinafter referred to as an "extension controller") is attached to the right controller 4, the main device 2 can detect an operation on the operating unit based on the image pickup results of the infrared imaging unit 123. Therefore, the main device 2 can perform information processing corresponding to the operation on the operating unit by using the image pickup results.

Specifically, the extended controller can be loaded and unloaded relative to the right controller 4, and for example, has movable operating parts such as buttons and joysticks. In addition, the extended controller has a movable part inside the shell that moves (here, includes the meaning of rotation) according to the operation of the operating part. The movable part is, for example, a component that is configured to move according to the pressing of a button serving as the operating part. Here, the extended controller is installed on the right controller 4 in such a way that the infrared camera unit 123 can capture the above-mentioned movable part inside the shell. For example, a window portion is provided on the shell of the extended controller, and when the extended controller is mounted on the right controller 4, the infrared camera unit 123 can capture the above-mentioned movable part across the window portion. In the above content, the main device 2 can determine the operation of the operating part of the extended controller based on the position and/or posture of the above-mentioned movable part in the camera image obtained by the infrared camera unit 123. Therefore, the main device 2 can also perform information processing corresponding to the operation of the above-mentioned operating part by using the camera image.

In addition, the main device 2 can also detect gesture input performed by the user's hand based on the camera results of the infrared camera unit 123, and perform information processing corresponding to the gesture input. For example, the user holds the right controller 4 with one hand and uses the infrared camera of the infrared camera unit 123 to capture the other hand. In addition, in this embodiment, the infrared camera is configured to capture the area below the right controller 4. Therefore, the user places the other hand below the right controller 4 to perform gesture input. The main device 2 obtains information based on the camera results from the right controller 4 to determine the gesture input performed by the user. Then, the main device 2 performs information processing based on the gesture input.

Here, gesture input can be any input performed by an operating object operated (activated) by the user. The operating object can be the user's body (it can be a part of the body such as a hand, face, etc., or the entire body), or an object held by the user, or both. The information processing device 1 can recognize the shape of the operating object as gesture input, the position, orientation and/or movement of the operating object as gesture input, or a combination thereof as gesture input. For example, the user can perform gesture input through the shape of the hand, the movement of the hand, the position of the hand (based on the right controller 4), the orientation (posture) of the hand, etc.

In addition, the infrared camera unit 123 can also be used to identify gesture input and (or instead) calculate the position and/or direction of the right controller 4 relative to a specified marker. For example, the user configures a marker at a desired position (for example, around the display 12 or around the TV 6) in advance, and performs an operation to move the right controller 4 within the range where the marker can be photographed by the infrared camera. In addition, the marker can also be made of a material that reflects infrared rays. At this time, the information processing device 1 can calculate the position and/or direction of the right controller 4 relative to the marker based on the imaging results of the infrared camera unit 123. Furthermore, the information processing device 1 can use the calculated information as the user's operation input to perform information processing.

Furthermore, the main device 2 can also perform user authentication (specifically, vein authentication) based on the captured image by capturing an image of the user's hand (specifically, the hand veins) using the infrared imaging unit 123. Furthermore, the main device 2 can also measure the user's pulse by capturing an image of the user's hand using the infrared imaging unit 123. Specifically, when the main device 2 detects the reflected wave of infrared light irradiated on the user's hand using the infrared imaging unit 123, it can calculate the user's pulse based on changes in the reflected wave.

Furthermore, the above description uses the infrared camera unit 123 as an example to illustrate the case where the right controller 4 is detached from the main device 2. Even when the right controller 4 is attached to the main device 2, the information processing device 1 can still perform information processing based on the image capture results of the infrared camera unit 123.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main device 2 includes an input unit (specifically, the touch panel 13, the acceleration sensor 89, the angular velocity sensor 90, etc.). Therefore, the user can also use only the main device 2 with the controllers 3 and 4 removed. Thus, the user can use the information processing device 1 in a lightweight state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the information processing device 1 can be used in a state where either the left controller 3 or the right controller 4 is removed from the main device 2 and the other is attached to the main device 2. In this case, the main device 2 can also perform wireless communication with the controller of one of the above-mentioned parties and perform wired communication with the controller of the other party.

Furthermore, when the controller is removed from the main unit 2, the user can use it by holding the controller with both hands (for example, see FIG35 ) or by holding the controller with one hand (for example, see FIG34 ). The method of holding the controller when the user holds the controller with one hand is arbitrary. For example, the controller can be used by holding it as shown in FIG34 , using the thumb to operate the operating portion provided on the main surface (in other words, the front surface, i.e., the front side) of the controller. Alternatively, for example, the controller can be used by holding it as shown in FIG33 , using the thumb to operate the operating portion provided on the main surface of the controller, and using the index and/or middle fingers to operate the operating portion provided on the side of the controller (for example, the first L button 38 , the ZL button 39 , the first R button 60 , and the ZR button 61 ). FIG33 shows the controller attached to the main unit 2, but it is obvious that the controller can also be used by holding it in the same manner as shown in FIG33 when it is detached from the main unit 2.

Furthermore, when the user is holding the controller with one hand, the controller can also be used by using a holding method in which the user operates the operating portion provided on the side of the controller with the thumb. FIG36 is a diagram showing an example of a holding method for the right controller 4 held with one hand. As shown in FIG36 , the user can also hold the right controller 4 as follows: holding it by grasping the housing 51 with the palm of the hand, and operating the first R button 60 and the ZR button 61 with the thumb. In other words, it can be said that the first R button 60 and the ZR button 61 are provided in a position where they can be operated with the thumb while the user is grasping the housing 51 with the palm of the hand. With this holding method, the user can use the controller with an operating feeling similar to operating the joystick of an airplane, for example.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first R button 60 and the ZR button 61 are positioned at different locations in the front-to-back direction (in other words, in the direction perpendicular to the main surface, i.e., the z-axis direction). In other words, the first R button 60 and the ZR button 61 are offset in the front-to-back direction. This allows the user to easily distinguish between the two buttons and operate them.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first R button 60 is provided on the side of the right controller 4, and the ZR button 61 is provided in the portion extending from the side to the back of the right controller 4. The ZR button 61 is longer in the front-to-back direction than the first R button 60. Thus, in this embodiment, the ZR button 61, which is slightly offset from the side of the right controller 4, has a shape that is easily pressed when the right controller 4 is gripped as shown in FIG36 .

Figure 36 shows an example of holding the right controller 4, but the left controller 3 can be used in the same way as the right controller 4 by holding it with the thumb to operate the operating part (i.e., the first L button 38 and the ZL button 39) provided on the side of the left controller 3.

In addition, when holding the controller with one hand using the holding method shown in Figure 36, the user can operate another controller with the other hand. At this time, the controller can be used in the other hand using the same holding method as Figure 36, or with other holding methods.

Furthermore, in the holding method shown in FIG36 , the user can use a finger other than the thumb (e.g., the index finger, middle finger, or ring finger) to operate an operating portion (e.g., the second L button 65 and the second R button 66) located on a side different from the side on which the operating portion operated by the thumb is located. Furthermore, in the holding method shown in FIG36 , the user can also perform the aforementioned operations of activating the controller and/or operations performed through gesture input. By combining these operations with operations performed with the thumb, it is possible to perform somewhat complex operations using the holding method shown in FIG36 .

[3-3. Method using three or more controllers]

As described above, in this embodiment, the main device 2 can communicate with multiple left controllers. In addition, the main device 2 can communicate with multiple right controllers. Therefore, in this embodiment, more than three controllers can be used simultaneously.

Figure 37 is a diagram showing an example of a method of use when more than three controllers are used. Figure 37 illustrates a case where two left controllers 3a and 3b and two right controllers 4a and 4b are used, totaling four controllers. In addition, it is assumed that each controller is separated from the main device 2. When four controllers are used like this, at least four users can use one controller each (Figure 37 (a)) and two users can use two controllers each (specifically, a set of left and right controllers) (Figure 37 (b)).

(One user uses one controller)

In (a) of Figure 37, each user uses one controller for each of the four controllers 3a, 3b, 4a, and 4b. That is, in this embodiment, when four controllers are prepared, it is possible for four users, User A to User D, to use the controllers to perform operations. The information processing device 1, for example, performs information processing to control the actions of the objects corresponding to the controllers based on the operations on the controllers. In addition, in each of the utilization methods shown in Figure 37, as in the utilization methods shown in Figures 34 and 35, each user can operate the operating unit of the controller and/or operate to activate the controller itself.

In (a) of Figure 37 , the main device 2 performs wireless communication with each of the four controllers 3a, 3b, 4a, and 4b. In this embodiment, the main device 2 distinguishes between the four controllers 3a, 3b, 4a, and 4b. That is, the main device 2 identifies which of the four controllers the received operation data comes from. In addition, in the case of (a) of Figure 37 , the main device 2 distinguishes between the left controller 3a and the left controller 3b, and distinguishes between the right controller 4a and the right controller 4b. In addition, the method of distinguishing between the controllers will be described later.

(One user uses one controller)

In FIG37(b), each user uses a set of four controllers 3a, 3b, 4a, and 4b. That is, user A uses a set of left controller 3a and right controller 4a, and user B uses a set of left controller 3b and right controller 4b. Thus, in this embodiment, while four controllers are provided, two users can each operate a set of controllers (or, a group of controllers).

Information processing device 1 processes two sets of operation data received from a set of controllers as a single set. For example, based on the operations performed on the set of controllers, information processing device 1 performs information processing to control the actions of the objects corresponding to the set of controllers. Specifically, the actions of the first object are controlled based on the operations performed on the left controller 3a and the right controller 4a, while the actions of the second object are controlled based on the operations performed on the left controller 3b and the right controller 4b.

Here, in this embodiment, in the usage mode shown in Figure 37(b), a pair of left and right controllers used by a single user is set by the main device 2. The main device 2 uses the operation data from the two controllers included in the set pair as a single pair (for example, as operation data for controlling a single operation object) to perform information processing.

The method of setting the controller group may be any method. In the present embodiment, the group is set by installing the left and right controllers on the main device 2. That is, the main device 2 sets the left controller and the right controller installed at the same time as one group of controllers. For example, in the case of setting the controller group shown in (b) of Figure 37, the user first installs the left controller 3a and the right controller 4a on the main device 2. After removing the two left controllers 3a and the right controller 4a from the main device 2, the other left controller 3b and the right controller 4b are installed on the main device 2. In this way, the group of the left controller 3a and the right controller 4a and the group of the left controller 3b and the right controller 4b can be set (or registered) in the main device 2. In addition, the details of the process of setting the group will be described later.

Furthermore, when using three or more controllers, the information processing system can be used in various ways besides the method shown in FIG37 . For example, the information processing system can be used in a manner such that one user uses a set of left and right controllers, while another user uses a single controller. Furthermore, for example, a method such as one user uses a controller attached to the main device 2, while another user uses a controller separate from the main device 2 is also possible.

[3-4. How to use it by displaying it on a TV]

As described above, in this embodiment, when the information processing device 1 is mounted on the cradle 5, the information processing device 1 can output images (and audio) to the television 6 via the cradle 5. FIG38 is a diagram showing an example of how images are displayed on the television. As shown in FIG38, the information processing system in this embodiment can use the television 6 as a display device (and audio output device).

[3-4-1. Operation when displaying images on a TV]

FIG39 is a diagram illustrating an example of the flow of operations for displaying an image on a television. Next, the operations for switching from using the information processing device 1 as a portable device to using the information processing device 1 as a stationary device (i.e., using the television 6 as a display device) will be described. It is assumed that the cradle 5 is previously connected to the television 6. Furthermore, a charging device (e.g., an AC adapter) (not shown) is connected to the power terminal 134 of the cradle 5, providing commercial power to the cradle 5.

First, the user uses the information processing device 1 as a portable device, that is, in a state where it is not installed on the bracket ((1) shown in Figure 39). When the information processing device 1 is switched to a fixed device in this state, the user installs the information processing device 1 on the bracket 5 ((2) shown in Figure 39). As a result, the lower terminal 27 of the information processing device 1 is connected to the main terminal 73 of the bracket 5. At this time, the information processing device 1 in the state where the controllers 3 and 4 are installed can be installed on the bracket 5, and the information processing device 1 (that is, the main device 2) in the state where the controllers 3 and 4 are removed can also be installed on the bracket 5.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the information processing device 1 is detected to be mounted on the cradle 5, the information processing device 1 stops displaying on the display 12. Details will be described later. Thus, in this embodiment, the display 12 of the main device 2 is not used when mounted on the cradle 5. Furthermore, in other embodiments, the main device 2 may also display an image on the display 12 even when mounted on the cradle 5. In this embodiment, when the information processing device 1 is detected to be detached from the cradle 5, the information processing device 1 starts displaying on the display 12.

As described above, in this embodiment, information processing device 1 can be mounted on cradle 5 facing outward or inward. Therefore, the user can place information processing device 1 in any orientation, making it easy to mount on cradle 5.

Furthermore, in other embodiments, the bracket 5 may support the information processing device 1 inward (i.e., in an orientation where the display 12 and the second support portion 72 are facing each other and hidden), but cannot support it outward (i.e., in an orientation where the display 12 is not hidden). In this embodiment, the display 12 is turned off when the information processing device 1 is placed on the bracket 5. In this case, there is a concern that, although the display 12 is turned off intentionally by the information processing device 1, the user may misinterpret this as a malfunction or malfunction. By preventing the information processing device 1 from being placed outward on the bracket 5, such user misunderstandings can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, when the information processing device 1 is detected to be mounted on the cradle 5, the cradle 5 begins charging the information processing device 1. Specifically, upon detecting that the information processing device 1 is mounted on the cradle 5, the processing unit 135 instructs the power control unit 133 to supply power from the power supply terminal 134 to the main device 2. The power control unit 133 initiates this operation, thereby starting the cradle 5 to charge the main device 2. Specifically, in the main device 2, the battery 98 is charged using power supplied from the cradle 5 via the lower terminal 27.

In addition, when the bracket 5 is charging the main device 2, if the controller (specifically, the left controller 3 and/or the right controller 4) is installed on the main device 2, the main device 2 charges the controller installed on itself. That is, in the above case, the power control unit 97 of the main device 2 supplies the power supplied from the bracket 5 via the lower terminal 27 to the controller installed on the main device 2 via the terminal corresponding to the controller (specifically, the left terminal 17 and/or the right terminal 21). In this way, the controller is charged. That is, when the left controller 3 is charged, the battery of the power supply unit 108 is charged using the power supplied via the terminal 42. In addition, when the right controller 4 is charged, the battery of the power supply unit 118 is charged using the power supplied via the terminal 64.

Furthermore, in other embodiments, the cradle 5 may charge the main device 2 under specified conditions. For example, the power control unit 133 of the cradle 5 may condition charging on the remaining battery level of the main device 2 mounted on the cradle 5 being below a specified level. Similarly, the main device 2 may charge the controller under specified conditions. For example, the power control unit 97 of the main device 2 may condition charging on the remaining battery level of the controller mounted on the main device 2 being below a specified level.

Furthermore, the above-described charging-related operations may be performed even when the power of the information processing device 1 is turned off. In other words, even when the information processing device 1 is mounted on the cradle 5 while the power is turned off, the cradle 5 may charge the information processing device 1 (i.e., charge the main device 2 and/or the controller).

Furthermore, in other embodiments, the main unit 2 can charge the controller even when it is not mounted on the cradle 5. This reduces the possibility of the user being unable to play due to the controller's battery running out of power, even though the main unit 2's battery 98 has sufficient power. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the charging capacity of the main unit 2's battery 98 is greater than that of the controller's battery. This further reduces the possibility of this.

In addition, when the information processing device 1 is installed on the bracket 5, under specified conditions, the information processing device 1 outputs images (and sounds) to the television 6, causing the television 6 to output images (and sounds) ((3) shown in Figure 39). That is, the information processing device 1 sends the data of the images and sounds to be output to the bracket 5 under specified conditions. In addition, in this embodiment, "the images and sounds to be output" refer to the images and sounds generated or acquired by the program (for example, OS program or application) being executed at the time when the information processing device 1 is installed on the bracket 5. For example, when a game application is being executed at the above-mentioned time point, the information processing device 1 outputs the image and sound data generated by the game application to the bracket 5. In addition, for example, when an application that obtains moving images from the Internet to reproduce the moving images is being executed at the above-mentioned time point, the information processing device 1 sends the image and sound data acquired by the application to the bracket 5.

The conditions for transmitting the images and sounds to be output to the cradle 5 (referred to as "image output conditions") are arbitrary, but the image output conditions in this embodiment satisfy the following (conditions 1) to (conditions 3).

(Condition 1) Bracket 5 is connected to TV 6

(Condition 2) The cradle 5 is supplied with power

(Condition 3) The cradle 5 is a genuine product (or authentic product) (in other words, the cradle 5 is a cradle approved by the manufacturer of the information processing device 1)

If the above three conditions are met, information processing device 1 determines that the image output conditions are met. In this case, information processing device 1 transmits the image and sound to be output to cradle 5. Furthermore, in other embodiments, information processing device 1 may use any one or two of the above (conditions 1) to (conditions 3) as image output conditions, or may use other conditions in addition to (or in place of) these conditions as image output conditions.

When the cradle 5 receives image and audio data from the information processing device 1, it transmits the image and audio data to the television 6. As a result, the "image and audio to be output" are output from the television 6 ((3) in FIG. 39 ). When the image and audio are output from the television 6, the user can operate the controller ((4) in FIG. 39 ).

When no image is displayed on the display 12 of the information processing device 1 (ie, in the power-off state or sleep mode), no image is displayed on the television 6 even if the information processing device 1 is mounted on the cradle 5 .

In this embodiment, even when the aforementioned image output conditions are not satisfied, the information processing device 1 stops displaying images on the display 12 while the device is mounted on the cradle 5. However, in other embodiments, the information processing device 1 may resume displaying images on the display 12 even when the image output conditions are not satisfied.

As described above, in this embodiment, by attaching the information processing device 1 to the cradle 5 while an image is being displayed on the display 12 of the information processing device 1, the image display destination can be switched from the display 12 to the television 6. In other words, in this embodiment, the user can easily (and seamlessly) switch the display destination simply by placing the information processing device 1 on the cradle 5.

Furthermore, as described above, in the present embodiment, the information processing device 1 can be utilized in a manner of displaying an image on the display 12 and in a manner of displaying an image on the television 6. Here, in the present embodiment, the information processing device 1 changes the operation mode according to these two modes of utilization. That is, the information processing device 1 can operate in at least two modes, namely, the portable mode and the fixed mode (Japanese: 根据置モード). In the portable mode, several functions of the information processing device 1 are restricted, and the details will be described later. In addition, the switching of the operation mode will be described later (refer to "[3-5. Change of operation mode]", "[4-3. Mode setting process]").

Furthermore, in other embodiments, the information processing device 1 may also be able to communicate directly with the television 6 (i.e., not via the bracket 6). In this case, the information processing device 1 may also send images and/or sounds directly to the television 6. Furthermore, the communication method between the information processing device 1 and the television 6 is arbitrary, for example, it may be wired communication using a cable (e.g., an HDMI cable) or wireless communication. In addition, in the case where the information processing device 1 communicates directly with the television 6, the bracket 6 may also be used, for example, to charge the information processing device 1. Furthermore, in this case, as in the above-mentioned embodiment, the information processing device 1 may at least be installed on the bracket 6 as a condition to send images and/or sounds to the television 6.

[3-4-2. Utilization when displaying images on a television]

When the image and sound are output from the TV 6, the user can use the controller to operate ((4) shown in Figure 39). Here, in the above case, the main unit 2 is mounted on the bracket 5, so it is not easy to use the controllers 3 and 4 when the controllers 3 and 4 are mounted on the main unit 2. Therefore, in the above case, the user can also use the controllers removed from the main unit 2 to operate. For example, the user removes the left controller 3 and/or the right controller 4 from the main unit 2 as needed to operate. Here, in this embodiment, the controllers 3 and 4 can be removed from the main unit 2 by sliding them upward from the main unit 2. Therefore, the user can remove the controllers 3 and 4 from the main unit 2 while the main unit 2 is still mounted on the bracket 5, which is very convenient.

In addition, if other controllers other than the controllers 3 and 4 installed in the main device 2 can communicate wirelessly with the main device 2, the other controllers can also be used.

In addition, when the controller removed from the main device 2 is used in a manner such that an image is displayed on the television 6, communication between the controller and the main device 2 is performed through wireless communication.

Except for the fact that the television 6 is used instead of the display 12, the method of using the television 6 when it is used as a display device is the same as the method of using it described in the above "[3-2. Method of using a set of controllers removed]" and "[3-3. Method of using more than three controllers]". That is, in this embodiment, when the television 6 is used as a display device, as in the case of using the display 12, it can be operated by one user using one set of controllers (refer to Figure 38), or by two users each using one controller. In addition, when other controllers are prepared in addition to the left controller 3 and the right controller 4, it can also be operated by more than three users each using one controller, and it can also be operated by more than two users each using one set of controllers.

[3-5. Change of operation mode]

As described above, in this embodiment, the information processing device 1 can be used in two modes: displaying images on the display 12 and displaying images on the television 6. In this embodiment, the information processing device 1 changes its operating mode depending on the two modes of use. That is, the information processing device 1 can operate in at least two modes: a portable mode and a stationary mode.

Portable mode is a mode in which information processing device 1 is used as a portable device. In portable mode, images acquired or generated by information processing device 1 are displayed on display 12. Also, sounds acquired or generated by information processing device 1 are output from speaker 88. Furthermore, in portable mode, the settings of information processing device 1 can be changed as described in (a) and (b) below.

(a) Setting limits on the processing capabilities of the main device 2

In this embodiment, in portable mode, the range of clock frequencies at which the CPU 81 can operate is limited. Here, in this embodiment, the clock frequency at which the CPU 81 can operate can be specified within a prescribed range by a program executed in the main device 2. The range of clock frequencies that can be specified by the program in portable mode is limited compared to the range that can be specified in fixed mode. For example, the range that can be specified in fixed mode is a range below X1 [Hz], whereas the range that can be specified in portable mode is limited to X2 (<X1) [Hz]. In addition, in a case where the main device 2 has a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit) in addition to the CPU, the range of the processing power (i.e., clock frequency) of the CPU and/or GPU can also be limited.

In addition, in this embodiment, the image rendering capability (or generation capability) is limited in portable mode. Specifically, the resolution (in other words, the number of pixels) of the image generated by the main device 2 in portable mode is lower than the resolution of the image generated in fixed mode.

By the limitation of (a) above, the amount of processing performed in the main unit 2 is limited in the portable mode, thereby suppressing heat generation and power consumption in the main unit 2.

(b) Setting the Limitation of the Operation of the Cooling Fan 96

In this embodiment, the operation of cooling fan 96 is restricted in portable mode. Specifically, the rotational speed (in other words, the speed at which cooling fan 96 can be driven in portable mode) is limited to a speed lower than the maximum rotational speed at which it can be driven in stationary mode. For example, in portable mode, cooling fan 96 is restricted to operating at a predetermined speed or less that is lower than the maximum rotational speed.

The restriction in (b) above can reduce the operating noise of cooling fan 96. Here, it is assumed that the user uses main device 2 near themselves in portable mode. In this embodiment, the operating noise of cooling fan 96 can be reduced in portable mode, thereby reducing the possibility that the user will perceive the noise as noisy.

On the other hand, the stationary mode is a mode when the information processing device 1 is used as a stationary device. In the stationary mode, the image acquired or generated by the information processing device 1 is displayed on the TV 6. In addition, the sound acquired or generated by the information processing device 1 is output from the speaker of the TV 6. In addition, in the stationary mode, the suppression of the functions in the portable mode is released. That is, in the stationary mode, the above-mentioned restrictions (a) and (b) are lifted. Therefore, in the stationary mode, the program in the information processing device 1 can utilize the processing power of the CPU 81 to a higher range. In addition, the information processing device 1 can display an image with a higher resolution on the TV 6 than in the portable mode. In addition, the information processing device 1 can use the cooling fan 96 for cooling more efficiently than in the portable mode.

In this embodiment, the switching between the portable mode and the stationary mode is performed as follows. Specifically, when the information processing device 1 is mounted on the cradle 5 and the aforementioned image output conditions are satisfied, the information processing device 1 sets the operating mode to the stationary mode. On the other hand, when the information processing device 1 is detached from the cradle 5, the information processing device 1 sets the operating mode to the portable mode. Switching the operating mode will be described later (see FIG. 44 ).

In addition, the difference in settings between the portable mode and the fixed mode is not limited to the above content and is arbitrary. For example, in other embodiments, the information processing device 1 may also impose only one of the above restrictions (a) and (b) in the portable mode. In addition, for example, in other embodiments, the information processing system may also make the communication method with the external device via the network (such as the Internet) different in the portable mode and the fixed mode (in other words, switch). For example, consider the case where a prescribed network connection device having the function of connecting to the above network for communication is connected to the bracket 5. In this case, in the portable mode, the information processing device 1 may also use the network communication unit 82 to communicate with the above network. On the other hand, in the fixed mode, the information processing device 1 may also communicate with the above network via the above bracket 5 and the network connection device.

Furthermore, for example, in an application executed on the information processing device 1, settings in the application may be changed between the portable mode and the stationary mode. For example, in a game application, game content (e.g., game rules and operation methods) may be changed between the portable mode and the stationary mode (see FIG. 45 ).

Furthermore, the aforementioned operating modes (portable mode and stationary mode) have different meanings from the aforementioned on mode and sleep mode. That is, when the operating mode is portable mode, the main device 2 is sometimes in on mode and sometimes in sleep mode. Furthermore, when the operating mode is stationary mode, the main device 2 is sometimes in on mode and sometimes in sleep mode.

[4. Specific Example of Processing in Information Processing System]

Next, several specific examples of the processes executed when the information processing system performs the above-mentioned operations will be described in more detail.

[4-1. Registration process]

As described above, in this embodiment, communication is performed between the main device 2 and each controller 3 and 4. Therefore, the main device 2 performs a registration process for registering the controller in order to identify the controller with which it is communicating. Furthermore, the controller provided (specifically, sold) with the main device 2 may have already been registered in the main device 2 at the time of provision.

FIG40 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the registration process executed in the main device 2. In this embodiment, the registration process is executed when the controller is installed in the main device 2. Specifically, the main device 2 detects whether the left controller 3 or the right controller 4 is installed, and upon detection of installation, the registration process shown in FIG40 is started.

The method of detecting whether the controller is installed on the main device 2 is arbitrary. For example, the detection method may be a method based on the signal state (for example, voltage state) at a prescribed pin included in the terminals of the main device 2 and/or the controller. In addition, for example, the detection method may also be a method of mechanically detecting whether the terminal of another device is connected to the machine. In addition, the main device 2 and the controller may each have the above-mentioned detection function, or only one of them may have the detection function. In the case where only one of them has the detection function, the device of that party may also notify the device of the other party that the connection has been detected as needed.

In addition, the processing of each step in the flowchart shown in Figure 40 (the same applies to the flowcharts in Figures 43 to 47 described later) is merely an example. As long as the same result can be obtained, the processing order of each step can be reversed, and other processing can be performed in addition to (or instead of) the processing of each step. In addition, in this embodiment, the processing of each step in the above flowchart is performed by the CPU 81 of the main device 2 for description, but the processing of some steps in the above flowchart can also be performed by a processor other than the CPU 81 or a dedicated circuit. In addition, part of the processing executed in the main device 2 can also be performed by other information processing devices that can communicate with the main device 2 (for example, a server that can communicate with the main device 2 via a network). That is, the processing shown in Figures 40 and 43 to 47 can also be performed by the cooperation of multiple information processing devices including the main device 2.

In the registration process shown in FIG40 , first, in step S1, the CPU 81 determines whether the controller detected and installed in the main device 2 has been registered. In this embodiment, the main device 2 stores registration information indicating controllers that have been registered with it in its own storage unit (e.g., flash memory 84). The determination in step S1 is made based on this registration information.

Figure 41 shows an example of registration information. In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 41, registration information is information that associates number information, identification information, and wireless communication information. The number information is a number assigned to the registered controller. The notification LED in the controller can also be controlled so that it displays a value based on the number.

Identification information is information indicating a value (e.g., ID) inherently assigned to a controller. Based on the identification information, the controller can be uniquely identified. Here, in this embodiment, the identification information includes information indicating whether it is a left controller or a right controller. That is, the main device 2 can determine whether the controller is a left controller or a right controller based on the identification information assigned to the controller. In addition, in other embodiments, the identification information may not include information indicating whether it is a left controller or a right controller. At this time, information indicating whether it is a left controller or a right controller (independently of the identification information) can also be included in the registration information. In addition, when the CPU 81 obtains identification information from the controller, it can determine whether the controller represented by the identification information is a left controller or a right controller based on which terminal of the left terminal 17 and the right terminal 21 the identification information is obtained.

The wireless communication information indicates whether the connection setting (i.e., pairing) related to the wireless communication between the main device 2 and the controller has been completed. That is, when the pairing of the main device 2 and the controller has been completed, information indicating that "has been set" is stored as the wireless communication information related to the controller. On the other hand, when the pairing of the main device 2 and the controller has not been completed, information indicating that "has not been set" is stored as the wireless communication information related to the controller. In addition, the main device 2 may also store information related to the connection setting of the wireless communication in advance (independently of the registration information), so that a controller that has been paired once does not need to be paired again.

In addition, part of the registration information may be deleted or changed according to the user's instructions. For example, the main device 2 may delete information related to a designated controller according to the user's instructions, or may change the number assigned to the controller according to the user's instructions.

Returning to the description of Figure 40, in the above-mentioned step S1, the CPU 81 first obtains identification information from the controller that is detected to be installed. In addition, the identification information assigned to itself is pre-stored in the memory of the controller (for example, memory 102 or 112). The controller sends its own identification information to the main device 2 based on whether it is connected to the main device 2 or based on a request from the CPU 81. The CPU 81 determines whether the controller that is detected to be installed has been registered based on whether the acquired identification information is included in the registration information. If the determination result of step S1 is negative, the processing of step S2 is executed. On the other hand, if the determination result of step S1 is positive, the processing of step S2 is skipped and the processing of step S3 is executed.

In step S2, the CPU 81 registers the controller that has been detected as installed. That is, the CPU 81 updates the registration information stored in the storage unit by associating the number information, identification information, and wireless communication information about the controller and adding them to the registration information. As the number information, for example, information indicating that a number has not been set for other registered controllers is set. As the identification information, the identification information obtained from the controller in the above-mentioned step S1 is set. As the wireless communication information, since pairing has not yet been performed at this point in time, information indicating "not set" is set. After step S2, the processing of step S3 is then executed.

In step S3, the CPU 81 determines whether both the left controller 3 and the right controller 4 are installed on the main device 2. Specifically, the CPU 81 determines whether the left controller 3 and the right controller 4 are currently installed on the main device 2. If the determination result in step S3 is affirmative, the CPU 81 proceeds to step S4. On the other hand, if the determination result in step S3 is negative, the CPU 81 skips step S4 and terminates the registration process.

In step S4, the CPU 81 sets the left controller 3 and the right controller 4 installed in the main device 2 as one group. Here, in this embodiment, the main device 2 stores group information indicating the group of the left controller and the right controller in a storage unit (e.g., flash memory 84).

Figure 42 is a diagram showing an example of group information. In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 42, group information is information that associates left identification information with right identification information. The left identification information is the identification information of the left controller set as a group among the registered controllers (in other words, the controller represented by the identification information included in the registration information). The right identification information is the identification information of the right controller set as a group among the registered controllers (in other words, the controller represented by the identification information included in the registration information). In addition, the left identification information and right identification information associated in the group information represent a group consisting of left and right controllers.

In the above-mentioned step S4, the CPU 81 first obtains the identification information of the left and right controllers installed on the main device 2. In addition, for the controllers whose identification information has been obtained in the above-mentioned step S1, it is not necessary to obtain the identification information again. Then, the CPU 81 associates the identification information of the left and right controllers obtained and adds it to the group information. That is, the CPU 81 updates the group information by adding the group of the two identification information obtained to the group information (to be precise, the group information before the update). At this time, the updated group information is stored in the above-mentioned storage unit. In addition, in the case where the group information already contains information representing a group of two identification information, the CPU 81 may not update the group information. In addition, in the case where the group information already contains information representing a group including one of the two identification information, the CPU 81 deletes the group from the group information. As a result, the setting of the group including one of the controllers included in the group set this time is deleted (that is, deleted from the group information). After step S4, the CPU 81 ends the registration process.

As described above, in this embodiment, the controller is registered with the main device 2 upon being installed in the main device 2. This allows the user to easily register the controller. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the registration process is performed while the main device 2 and the controller are communicating via wired communication. This reduces the likelihood that the main device 2 will be unable to obtain information (specifically, identification information) from the controller, thereby reducing the likelihood of registration failure.

In addition, in this embodiment, the left controller and the right controller are both installed in the main device 2, and these two controllers are set as a group. The user only needs to install the two controllers that they want to use as a group in the main device 2, so the group can be set through easy and understandable operations.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, an accessory device capable of simultaneously mounting left and right controllers may be provided (see FIG. 52 ), details of which will be described later. In this case, if both a left controller and a right controller are mounted on the accessory device, the main device 2 sets these two controllers as a group, similar to the case where both the left and right controllers are mounted on the main device 2. Details of this grouping process are described later in "[5-2. Accessory Devices for Controllers]".

In addition, the main device 2 may set two controllers installed simultaneously on the main device 2 as one group as in the above embodiment, or may set two controllers not installed simultaneously as one group, unlike the above embodiment. For example, the main device 2 may set the left controller installed last and the right controller installed last as one group.

In addition, in other embodiments, the method of setting the group is arbitrary, and the group of controllers can also be set by other methods. For example, the main device 2 can also set two controllers that perform a specified operation within a specified period as the same group. Specifically, based on whether a specified condition is met (for example, based on an instruction to set a group received from the user), the main device 2 notifies the user to perform a specified operation. Then, the main device 2 sets the two or more controllers in communication that perform the specified operation within a specified period after the notification as one group of controllers. In addition, the above-mentioned "specified operation" can be, for example, an operation of pressing the A button, or an operation of causing the two controllers to collide (for example, the operation can be determined based on the detection result of the acceleration sensor).

[4-2. Wireless setup process]

As described above, in this embodiment, wireless communication may be performed between the main device 2 and the controllers 3 and 4. Therefore, in this embodiment, the information processing device 1 performs settings (also called pairing) for wireless communication between the main device 2 and the controllers. Furthermore, the controllers provided (specifically, sold) with the main device 2 may have wireless communication settings already completed at the time of provision.

In the present embodiment, the main unit 2 executes a wireless setting process for performing settings related to wireless communication with the controller. FIG43 is a flowchart showing an example of the process of the wireless setting process executed in the main unit 2. In the present embodiment, the wireless setting process is executed based on the controller being removed from the main unit 2. That is, the main unit 2 detects whether the left controller 3 or the right controller 4 is removed, and based on the detection of removal (referred to as "detachment"), starts executing the wireless setting process shown in FIG43. In addition, the method of detecting whether the controller is detached from the main unit 2 is arbitrary, and for example, it can be the same method as the method of detecting whether the controller is installed in the main unit 2.

In the wireless setting process, first in step S11, the CPU 81 determines whether the controller detected as detached from the main device 2 has completed pairing for wireless communication. This determination is made using the above-mentioned registration information. That is, when the wireless communication information included in the registration information about the controller detected as detached indicates "set", the CPU 81 determines that the controller has completed pairing for wireless communication. On the other hand, when the wireless communication information included in the registration information about the controller detected as detached indicates "not set", the CPU 81 determines that the controller has not completed pairing for wireless communication. If the determination result of step S11 is negative, the processing of step S12 is executed. On the other hand, if the determination result of step S11 is positive, the processing of step S12 is skipped and the CPU 81 ends the wireless setting process.

In step S12, the CPU 81 executes a pairing process to enable wireless communication with the controller that has been detected as detached. The pairing process in this embodiment can be the same as the pairing process in conventional communication technologies that comply with the Bluetooth (registered trademark) standard. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the controller executes a pairing process based on the detachment of the main device 2, as described in detail below. Thus, pairing is performed between the main device 2 and the aforementioned controller, establishing wireless communication. Step S13 is then executed after step S12.

In step S13, the CPU 81 determines whether pairing with the controller detected as disconnected has been successful. Step S13 is executed after a predetermined time has passed since step S12. If the determination in step S13 is positive, step S14 is executed. On the other hand, if the determination in step S13 is negative, step S14 is skipped and the CPU 81 terminates the wireless setup process.

In step S14, the CPU 81 updates the registration information. Specifically, for the controller detected as being disconnected, the CPU 81 changes the wireless communication information included in the registration information to indicate "already set." After step S14, the CPU 81 ends the wireless setting process.

In the present embodiment, regarding the above-mentioned wireless setting process, the controllers 3 and 4 also perform the same process as the main device 2 (referred to as "wireless setting process on the controller side"). Specifically, the controller stores registration information that associates the identification information of the main device on which its own device is installed with wireless communication information indicating whether pairing with the main device has been completed in a storage unit (e.g., memory 102 or 112) in advance. The controller (specifically, the communication control unit 101 or 111) determines whether pairing with the main device 2 has been completed based on being separated from the main device 2. If pairing is not completed, the controller performs pairing processing. In addition, the controller determines whether pairing has been successful, and if pairing has been successful, updates the above-mentioned registration information. In this way, in the present embodiment, when the controller is separated from the main device 2, pairing processing is performed in the main device 2 and the controller, so that wireless communication is established after pairing is successful.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the controller is detached from the main device 2, setup processing related to wireless communication between the main device 2 and the controller is performed, and wireless communication is established. In this embodiment, wired communication is performed when the controller is installed in the main device 2, and wireless communication is performed when the controller is detached from the main device 2. Therefore, by performing setup processing when the controller is detached from the main device 2, wireless communication can be established at an appropriate time. In addition, in this embodiment, the controller is registered when the controller is first installed in the main device 2, so the above-mentioned setup processing is performed when the controller is detached from the main device 2 for the first time. Accordingly, the possibility of a situation where "wireless communication is not established when a registered controller is detached from the main device 2" can be reduced, and an information processing device 1 that is easy for the user to use can be provided. In addition, according to this embodiment, the user can easily perform the above-mentioned setup processing on the information processing device 1 by removing the controller from the main device 2.

In addition, the conditions for executing the setting process related to the above-mentioned wireless communication in the information processing device 1 are arbitrary and are not limited to the controller being separated from the main device 2. For example, in other embodiments, the above-mentioned setting process can also be executed according to the controller being installed on the main device 2. In addition, for example, in other embodiments, the above-mentioned setting process can also be executed according to instructions given from the user. Specifically, the main device 2 can also execute the above-mentioned wireless setting process according to a prescribed instruction given from the user (Figure 43). The prescribed instruction can be performed by the user selecting a prescribed item displayed on the menu screen, or by pressing a prescribed button provided on the main device 2. In addition, the controller can also execute the above-mentioned "wireless setting process on the controller side" according to a prescribed instruction given from the user. The prescribed instruction can also be performed by pressing a prescribed button provided on the controller.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the controller is separated from the main device 2, the main device 2 and the controller determine whether pairing of the controller and the main device 2 has been completed, and if pairing is not completed, the pairing process is performed. In other embodiments, when the controller is separated from the main device 2, the main device 2 and the controller may perform the pairing process without performing the above determination.

(Action in controller)

In this embodiment, when the controller is installed on the main device 2, it uses the main device 2 as the communication target. That is, in this case, the controller sends operation data to the installed main device 2 through wired communication. On the other hand, when it is not installed on the main device 2, if there is a main device 2 that has already been paired, the controller uses the main device 2 as the communication target. That is, in this case, the controller sends operation data to the main device 2 that has already been paired through wireless communication. Thus, in this embodiment, the controller sends operation data to the main device 2 regardless of whether it is installed on the main device 2. In addition, in this embodiment, when there are multiple main devices 2 that have already been paired, the controller uses one main device that meets the specified conditions as the communication target. The specified conditions are arbitrary, for example, it can also be "the last main device to be paired." In addition, when it is not installed on the main device 2, if there is no main device 2 that has already been paired, the controller does not send operation data.

Furthermore, if there is a main device 2 capable of communication, the controller repeatedly transmits operation data to the main device 2 serving as the communication partner at a rate of one transmission per predetermined period. If there is no main device 2 capable of communication (i.e., if the power of the main device 2 serving as the communication partner is turned off or in sleep mode), the controller stops transmitting operation data to the main device 2. If a new main device 2 capable of communication is newly generated (i.e., if the power of the main device 2 serving as the communication partner is turned on or in sleep mode), the controller resumes transmitting operation data to the main device 2.

[4-3. Mode setting process]

As described above, in this embodiment, the information processing device 1 operates in the portable mode and the stationary mode. Therefore, the information processing device 1 performs a process (referred to as "mode setting process") to switch the operating mode between the portable mode and the stationary mode.

FIG44 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the mode setting process executed by the main device 2. In this embodiment, the series of processes of steps S21 to S29 shown in FIG44 is repeatedly executed while the power of the main device 2 is on. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the operating mode of the main device 2 is set to the portable mode at the start of the process (i.e., when the power is turned on).

In the mode setting process, first in step S21, the CPU 81 determines whether the main device 2 is installed on the bracket 5. In addition, the method of detecting whether the main device 2 is installed on the bracket 5 is arbitrary. For example, the CPU 81 can also perform the above-mentioned detection based on the signal state (for example, voltage state) at the specified pin included in the terminal of the main device 2 and/or the bracket 5. When the judgment result of step S21 is affirmative, the process of step S22 is executed. On the other hand, when the judgment result of step S21 is negative, the process of step S21 is executed again. That is, while the action mode is the portable mode and the main device 2 is not installed on the bracket 5, the CPU 81 repeatedly executes the process of step S21. For example, the process of step S21 is executed at a ratio of 1 time per specified time.

In step S22, the CPU 81 turns off the display of the display 12. Specifically, the CPU 81 stops the supply of power to the display 12. In addition, the CPU 81 stops outputting image data to the display 12. After step S22, the process of step S23 is executed.

As described above, in the main device 2, the image display on the display 12 is turned off when the main device 2 is mounted on the bracket 5. Furthermore, in other embodiments, the main device 2 may not turn off the image display on the display 12 (i.e., continue to display the image) during the aforementioned stage, but may turn off the image display on the display 12 when the image is output from the main device 2 to the television 6. Furthermore, in other embodiments, the main device 2 may not turn off the image display on the display 12 even when the image is output from the main device 2 to the television 6, but may display the image on both the display 12 and the television 6. In this case, the bracket 5 may be configured so that the display 12 can be visually recognized when the main device 2 is mounted. Furthermore, the main device 2 may generate two images so that the television 6 and the display 12 display different images.

In step S23, the CPU 81 determines whether the aforementioned image output conditions are met. Specifically, the CPU 81 determines whether the aforementioned (conditions 1) to (conditions 3) are met. Furthermore, these (conditions 1) to (conditions 3) can be determined based on information obtained from the cradle 5. Specifically, regarding "(condition 1) the cradle 5 is connected to the television 6," the CPU 81 can obtain information from the cradle 5 indicating whether it is connected to the television 6, and make a determination based on the obtained information. Furthermore, regarding "(condition 2) the cradle 5 is supplied with power," the CPU 81 can obtain information from the cradle 5 indicating whether power is being supplied to the cradle 5 from the power terminal 134, and make a determination based on the obtained information. Furthermore, regarding "(condition 3) the cradle 5 is a standard product," the CPU 81 can obtain predetermined information that can be used to determine whether it is a standard product, and make a determination based on the obtained information. Furthermore, this predetermined information can be, for example, identification information assigned to the cradle, or information indicating predetermined details if it is a standard product (in other words, information indicating different details if it is not a standard product). The CPU 81 obtains the above information from the cradle 5 at a predetermined timing and determines whether the image output conditions are met based on the obtained information. The predetermined timing is arbitrary and may be, for example, when the main device 2 is mounted on the cradle 5 or when step S23 is executed.

When the determination result of step S23 is affirmative, the processing of step S25 described later is executed. On the other hand, when the determination result of step S23 is negative, the processing of step S24 is executed. In addition, in this case, although the user installs the information processing device 1 on the bracket 5, the image is not displayed on the TV 6. Therefore, the information processing device 1 can also notify the user that the image is not displayed on the TV 6. For example, the information processing device 1 can also make a notification by outputting a sound from the speaker 88 or displaying an image on the display 12. In addition, for example, if the bracket 5 has a light-emitting portion for notification (such as an LED of the sleep button 74), the information processing device 1 can also make a notification by controlling the light-emitting portion. In addition, in the case where a light-emitting portion for notification is provided at the bracket 5, the information processing device 1 can also control the light-emitting portion so that the light-emitting portion indicates whether the action mode is the portable mode or the fixed mode.

In step S24, the CPU 81 determines whether the main device 2 is detached from the cradle 5. If the determination result of step S24 is affirmative, the processing of step S29, described below, is executed. On the other hand, if the determination result of step S24 is negative, the processing of step S23 described above is executed again. In other words, while the main device 2 is attached to the cradle 5 and the image output conditions are not met, the CPU 81 repeatedly executes the series of processes of steps S23 and S24. For example, this series of processes is repeated at a rate of one execution per predetermined time.

In step S25, the CPU 81 outputs the image to the TV 6. That is, the CPU 81 outputs the above-mentioned "image and sound to be output" data to the bracket 5 via the lower terminal 27. The bracket 5 transmits the above-mentioned data to the TV 6. That is, the above-mentioned data is converted in format by the conversion unit 131 of the bracket 5, and then output to the TV 6 via the monitoring terminal 132. As a result, the image and sound are output to the TV 6. After the processing of step S25, the CPU 81 repeatedly executes the processing of outputting the image to the TV 6. This processing continues until the information processing device 1 ends the display of the image (for example, the power of the information processing device 1 is turned off, or the information processing device 1 enters the sleep mode) or the operation mode is changed to the portable mode. After step S25, the processing of step S26 is executed.

In step S26, the CPU 81 changes the operating mode to the stationary mode. Specifically, as described in "3-5. Changing the Operating Mode," the CPU 81 changes the settings of the main device 2 to remove functional limitations on the main device 2 in portable mode. Following step S26, the CPU 81 proceeds to step S27.

In step S27, the CPU 81 determines whether the main unit 2 is detached from the cradle 5. If the determination result of step S27 is affirmative, the process of step S28 is executed. On the other hand, if the determination result of step S27 is negative, the process of step S27 is executed again. In other words, while the operation mode is the stationary mode, the CPU 81 repeatedly executes the process of step S27. For example, the process of step S27 is executed once every predetermined time.

In step S28, the CPU 81 changes the operating mode to portable mode. Specifically, as described in "3-5. Changing the Operating Mode," the CPU 81 changes the settings of the main device 2 to limit its functions. Furthermore, the CPU 81 stops outputting images to the television 6. Following step S28, the CPU 81 executes the processing of step S29.

In step S29, the CPU 81 outputs the image to the display 12. Specifically, the CPU 81 causes the display 12 to display the aforementioned "image to be output." Furthermore, the CPU 81 outputs the "sound to be output" from the speaker 88 (or the audio input/output terminal 25). Following step S29, the CPU 81 repeatedly executes the process of outputting the image to the display 12. Following step S29, the CPU 81 executes step S21 again.

As described above, in this embodiment, the information processing device 1 can switch between a portable mode in which images are displayed on the display 12 and a stationary mode in which images are displayed on the television 6. The conditions for changing the operating mode to the stationary mode (in other words, the image output conditions) are arbitrary. For example, the conditions described below may also be used.

In other embodiments, the image output conditions may include "a user instruction to output an image to television 6." For example, cradle 5 may include an output instruction button for instructing the output of images acquired or generated by information processing device 1 to television 6. In this case, information processing device 1 may use "the output instruction button being pressed while information processing device 1 is mounted on cradle 5" as one of the image output conditions.

In other embodiments, the image output conditions may include the condition that "the television 6 can display the image from the cradle 5." Specifically, this condition requires that the television 6 be powered on and the input switch be set to display the input image from the cradle 5. By using image output conditions including this condition, it is possible to prevent a situation where an image is not displayed on the television 6 even though the information processing device 1 is outputting the image via the cradle 5.

In the above description, the information processing device 1 may also control the TV 6 to turn on the power of the TV 6 and/or change the input switching setting so that the input from the cradle 5 is displayed. This allows the user to easily display an image on the TV 6 without having to operate the TV 6 to satisfy the above conditions (i.e., the TV 6 can display the image from the cradle 5). Furthermore, the information processing device 1 can perform the above control by, for example, causing the cradle 5 to transmit a control signal (e.g., a CEC command in the HDMI standard) to the TV 6.

Furthermore, the information processing device 1 can also change image output conditions based on user instructions. For example, the information processing device 1 can present multiple conditions as image output conditions on a predetermined setting change screen and allow the user to select one of them. This allows the user to conveniently select a condition that suits their usage.

Furthermore, for example, if the cradle 5 has the aforementioned output instruction button, the information processing system can also allow the user to change the aforementioned conditions by configuring the output instruction button as a toggle button. That is, the output instruction button of the cradle 5 can also be switched between a first state and a second state by being pressed. In this case, when the output instruction button is in the first state, the information processing device 1 determines that there has been a user instruction to output an image to the television 6. When the output instruction button is in the second state, the information processing device 1 determines that there has not been a user instruction to output an image to the television 6. Thus, by keeping the output instruction button in the first state, the user can output an image to the television 6 in accordance with the fact that the main device 2 is mounted on the cradle (under certain conditions).

In the above description, it can be said that information processing device 1 determines whether the user has mounted information processing device 1 on cradle 5 simply for charging or for displaying images on television 6, based on the presence or absence of the user instruction. In other embodiments, information processing device 1 may perform the above determination using other methods.

For example, the information processing device 1 may also make the above-mentioned judgment based on the state of the information processing device 1 related to the execution of the application. Here, "the state of the information processing device 1 related to the execution of the application" refers to, for example, a state related to whether the application is being executed in the information processing device 1, or a state related to whether the image generated or acquired by the executing application is displayed on the display 12. Specifically, the information processing device 1 may also determine that the user has installed the information processing device 1 on the bracket 5 in order to display an image on the television 6 when the application is being executed or when the image generated or acquired by the executing application is displayed on the display 12. Therefore, in the above-mentioned case, the information processing device 1 may also output the image to the television 6 on the condition that the image output condition is satisfied. That is, the image output condition may also include the condition that "the application is being executed or the image generated or acquired by the executing application is displayed on the display 12."

In other embodiments, the information processing device 1 may store the operating mode when the power is turned off in a storage unit (e.g., flash memory 84). In this case, when the power is turned on, if the operating mode stored in the storage unit indicates portable mode, the information processing device 1 executes the above-described mode setting process from step S21. If the operating mode stored in the storage unit indicates stationary mode, the information processing device 1 executes the above-described mode setting process from step S27. In this way, the information processing device 1 can continue the operating mode when the power is turned off the next time the power is turned on.

[4-4. Example of executing information processing according to the operation mode]

As described above, in this embodiment, information processing device 1 operates in any of the operating modes, including portable mode and stationary mode. Therefore, in information processing device 1, the content of information processing performed by various programs (e.g., OS programs, applications) executed in main device 2 may differ between portable mode and stationary mode. The following describes an example of information processing in which different processing is performed depending on the operating mode.

FIG45 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of information processing executed by main device 2. The series of information processing shown in FIG45 is performed, for example, by CPU 81 executing a program executable by information processing device 1 (e.g., an application program or an OS program). For example, if the executed program is an application program, the series of information processing shown in FIG45 is initiated in response to a user instruction indicating the intention to start the application program. Alternatively, if the executed program is an OS program, the series of information processing shown in FIG45 is initiated in response to the power supply of main device 2 being turned on.

In the series of information processing shown in Figure 45, first in step S31, the CPU 81 acquires operation data from each controller. For example, the CPU 81 can acquire operation data from each controller that can communicate, regardless of whether it is wired or wireless communication. Furthermore, the main device 2 can acquire operation data at approximately the same frequency for controllers that communicate wired and wirelessly. This eliminates differences between controllers due to communication methods, thereby improving controller operability. Following step S31, the processing of step S32 is executed.

In addition, according to the program involving the above-mentioned series of information processing, the CPU 81 may also obtain operation data from a controller that meets the specified conditions, and not obtain operation data from a controller that does not meet the conditions. For example, the above-mentioned specified conditions may also be conditions related to communication. That is, the CPU 81 may also obtain operation data from a controller that communicates with the main device 2 by wire, and not obtain operation data from a controller that communicates with the main device 2 wirelessly. In addition, for example, the above-mentioned specified conditions may also be conditions related to the functions possessed by the controller. That is, the CPU 81 may also obtain operation data from a controller that has a specified function (for example, a controller with an analog joystick, a controller with an NFC communication function, or a controller with an acceleration sensor, etc.), and not obtain operation data from a controller that does not have the specified function. In addition, in the case where there is a controller that can communicate but does not obtain operation data, the main device 2 may also notify the user that the controller cannot be used in the executing program.

In addition, in other embodiments, the CPU 81 may not use the operation data obtained from the controller that does not satisfy the specified conditions in the processing of step S33 or S34 described later, instead of not obtaining operation data from the controller that does not satisfy the specified conditions.

In step S32, the CPU 81 determines whether the operation mode of the information processing device 1 is the portable mode (i.e., whether it is the portable mode or the stationary mode). Here, the information processing device 1 stores information indicating the current operation mode in a predetermined storage unit (e.g., the flash memory 84). The determination of step S32 is performed based on this information. If the determination result of step S32 is affirmative (i.e., if the operation mode is the portable mode), the processing of step S33 is executed. On the other hand, if the determination result of step S32 is negative (i.e., if the operation mode is the stationary mode), the processing of step S34 is executed again.

In step S33, the CPU 81 performs information processing based on the operation data according to the settings in portable mode. As described above, in portable mode, the processing capabilities of the main device 2 are limited. Specifically, the CPU 81 performs information processing within these limitations. For example, the CPU 81 performs a predetermined process (e.g., game processing) using the operation data acquired in step S31 as input, generates an image representing the processing results, and displays the image on the display 12. Following step S33, the processing of step S35, described below, is executed.

Meanwhile, in step S34, the CPU 81 executes information processing based on the operation data according to the settings in the fixed mode. As described above, in the fixed mode, the processing capacity restrictions of the main device 2 are lifted. For example, the CPU 81 executes a predetermined process (e.g., game processing) using the operation data acquired in step S31 as input, generates an image representing the processing result, and displays the image on the television 6. Following step S34, the processing of step S35, described below, is executed.

In addition, according to the program involved in the above series of information processing, the CPU 81 can also make the content of the above-mentioned prescribed processing executed in the above-mentioned steps S33 and S34 different according to the action mode. For example, in the case where the above-mentioned program is a game program (that is, in the case of executing a game application), the information processing device 1 can also make the game content different according to the action mode. Specifically, the playable levels (stages) can be different in portable mode and fixed mode, or levels that can only be played in portable mode can be prepared, or levels that can only be played in fixed mode can be prepared. In addition, the game mode can also be different in portable mode and fixed mode.

In addition, for example, in the case where the settings related to the screen display can be changed, the information processing device 1 can also make the settings related to the screen display different according to the action mode. In addition, "settings related to the screen display" refer to, for example, settings related to the size of icons in the menu screen, and settings related to various information displayed together with the image representing the game space (for example, an image representing the status of the player character and an image of the map, etc.). Therefore, for example, in portable mode, since the image is displayed on the display 12, which is considered to have a small screen size, icons and other marks can also be displayed relatively large relative to the displayed image (in other words, the display screen), and in fixed mode, since the image is displayed on the TV 6, which is considered to have a large screen size, the mark can also be displayed relatively small relative to the displayed image.

In step S35, the CPU 81 determines whether the series of information processing shown in FIG. 45 has been terminated. This determination is made, for example, based on whether a user instruction to terminate has been received. If the determination in step S35 is negative, the process of step S31 is repeated. Thereafter, the series of processes from steps S31 to S35 is repeatedly executed until the series of information processing is determined to have been terminated in step S35. On the other hand, if the determination in step S35 is positive, the CPU 81 terminates the series of information processing shown in FIG. 45.

As described above, in this embodiment, the information processing device 1 can also execute processing corresponding to the operating mode in the OS or application. This can provide users with different enjoyment (e.g., game levels or game modes) depending on the operating mode. Furthermore, by automatically changing settings (e.g., settings related to screen display) based on the operating mode, the user can avoid the trouble of changing settings.

[4-5. Example of executing information processing according to the installation status of the controller]

As described above, in this embodiment, the information processing device 1 can be used in both a state where the controller is removed from the main device 2 and a state where the controller is installed in the main device 2. Therefore, in the information processing device 1, the processing content of the information processing performed by various programs (e.g., OS programs, application programs) executed in the main device 2 may differ depending on the installation state of the controller in the main device 2 (i.e., whether it is installed or removed). The following describes an example of information processing depending on the installation state of the controller.

FIG46 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of information processing executed by main device 2. The series of information processing shown in FIG46 , like the series of processing shown in FIG45 , is executed by, for example, an application program or OS program executable by information processing device 1. Also, like the series of processing shown in FIG45 , the series of information processing shown in FIG46 is initiated in response to a user instruction to activate an application program or in response to main device 2 being powered on.

In the series of information processing shown in Figure 46, first in step S41, the CPU 81 determines whether the controller is installed on the main device 2. In this embodiment, the CPU 81 determines whether the left and right controllers 3 and 4 are installed on the main device 2. As long as it is determined that any one of the left and right controllers 3 and 4 is installed on the main device 2, the determination result of step S41 becomes positive. On the other hand, when both the left and right controllers 3 and 4 are detached from the main device 2, the determination result of step S41 is negative. When the determination result of step S41 is positive, the processing of step S42 is executed. On the other hand, when the determination result of step S41 is negative, the processing of step S43 described later is executed.

In step S42, the CPU 81 acquires operation data from the controller installed in the main device 2 via a wired connection. Specifically, the CPU 81 acquires operation data received via the left terminal 17 and the right terminal 21. If only one of the left and right controllers 3 and 4 is installed, the CPU 81 acquires operation data only from the terminal corresponding to that controller. The acquired operation data is then stored in a predetermined storage unit (e.g., DRAM 85). Following step S42, the process of step S43 is executed.

In step S43, the CPU 81 wirelessly acquires operation data from a controller that is separate from the main device 2. Specifically, the CPU 81 acquires the operation data received via the controller communication unit 83. If, at the time of step S43, there is no controller capable of wireless communication (in other words, a controller that transmits operation data to the main device 2), the controller communication unit 83 does not receive the operation data, and the CPU 81 may skip step S43. Following step S43, step S44 is then executed.

In step S44, the CPU 81 performs predetermined information processing based on the operation data acquired in steps S42 and S43. The content of this information processing is arbitrary. For example, if the program being executed is an OS program, the CPU 81 may also perform processing such as moving a cursor on a menu screen based on the operation data, or determining an application selected by the user based on the operation data and launching the determined application. Furthermore, if the program being executed is an application program, the CPU 81 may use the operation data as input to the application and perform processing appropriate to the application. Following step S44, the processing of step S45 is performed.

In step S45, the CPU 81 outputs an image representing the result of the information processing in step S44 to the display device (display 12 or television 6). For example, if the program being executed is an OS program, the aforementioned menu screen is displayed on the display device. Alternatively, if the program being executed is an application program, an image within the application (e.g., a game image within a game application) is displayed on the display device. Following step S45, the process of step S46 is executed.

In step S46, the CPU 81 determines whether the series of information processing shown in FIG. 46 has been terminated. This determination is made, for example, based on whether a user instruction to terminate has been received. If the determination in step S46 is negative, the process of step S41 is executed again. Thereafter, the series of processes from steps S41 to S46 is repeatedly executed until the series of information processing is determined to have been terminated in step S46. On the other hand, if the determination in step S46 is positive, the CPU 81 terminates the series of information processing shown in FIG. 46.

As described above, in this embodiment, the main device 2 changes the content of the processing it performs depending on the controller's installation status. Specifically, if the controller is not installed, the main device 2 skips the process of acquiring operation data via wired communication. This simplifies the processing performed by the main device 2.

Furthermore, in the series of processes shown in FIG46 , main device 2 executes the process of acquiring operation data via wireless communication (step S43) regardless of the installation status of the controller. Depending on the application being executed in main device 2, if the determination result of step S41 is affirmative (i.e., if the controller is installed in main device 2), step S43 may not be executed. In other words, depending on the application being executed, if a controller is installed, main device 2 may receive operation data only from the installed controller and not receive operation data (via wireless communication) from other uninstalled controllers.

FIG47 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of information processing executed by main device 2. The series of information processing illustrated in FIG47 , similar to the series of processing illustrated in FIG45 , is executed, for example, by an application program or OS program executable by information processing device 1. Also similar to the series of processing illustrated in FIG45 , the series of information processing illustrated in FIG47 is initiated in response to a user instruction to activate an application program or in response to main device 2 being powered on.

In the series of information processing shown in FIG47 , first, in step S51, the CPU 81 determines whether the controller is installed in the main device 2. In this embodiment, the CPU 81 determines whether both the left and right controllers 3 and 4 are installed in the main device 2, or whether at least one of the left and right controllers 3 and 4 is detached from the main device 2. However, in other embodiments, the CPU 81 may determine whether at least one of the left and right controllers 3 and 4 is installed in the main device 2, or whether both the left and right controllers 3 and 4 are detached from the main device 2. If the result of the determination in step S51 is affirmative, the process of step S52 is executed. On the other hand, if the result of the determination in step S51 is negative, the process of step S54 is executed.

In step S52, the CPU 81 sets the information processing operation mode to single-player mode. That is, when step S52 is executed, the main device 2 is equipped with a controller, and thus, it is assumed that a single user is operating the device using the installed controller. Single-player mode is, for example, a mode in which a single player character appears. For example, in a game program, the CPU 81 starts a game with a single player character. Alternatively, in applications that use a cursor displayed on the screen for operation, the CPU 81 displays a single cursor. Following step S52, the CPU 81 executes the processing in step S53.

In step S53, the CPU 81 performs the prescribed processing in the single-player operation mode. That is, the CPU 81 obtains operation data from the left and right controllers 3 and 4, and performs the prescribed processing based on the operation data. In addition, the content of the above-mentioned prescribed processing is arbitrary. Here, in the single-player operation mode, one operation object (for example, one player character, one cursor) is controlled based on the operation data obtained from the two controllers 3 and 4. In addition, in step S53, the above-mentioned prescribed processing is repeatedly performed. In addition, when the conditions for ending the above-mentioned prescribed processing are met (for example, when there is a user instruction to end the application), the CPU 81 ends the processing of step S53 and ends the series of information processing shown in Figure 47.

On the other hand, in step S54, the CPU 81 sets the information processing operation mode to the two-player operation mode. That is, when step S54 is executed, (at least one) controller is detached from the main device 2, so it is assumed that one user uses the detached controller and another user uses the other controller, that is, a total of two users perform operations. The two-player operation mode is, for example, a mode in which two operating objects appear. For example, in a game program, the CPU 81 starts a game in which two player characters appear. In addition, in an application that uses a cursor displayed on the screen to perform operations, the CPU 81 displays two cursors. After step S54, the processing of step S55 is then executed.

In step S55, CPU 81 performs the prescribed processing in the two-player operation mode. That is, CPU 81 obtains operation data from the left and right controllers 3 and 4, and performs the prescribed processing based on the operation data. In addition, the content of the above-mentioned prescribed processing is arbitrary. Here, in the two-player operation mode, the first operation object (for example, 1 player character, 1 cursor) is controlled based on the operation data obtained from the left controller 3, and the second operation object different from the first operation object is controlled based on the operation data obtained from the right controller 4. In addition, in step S55, the above-mentioned prescribed processing is repeatedly performed in the same manner as in step S53. In addition, when the conditions for ending the above-mentioned prescribed processing are met (for example, when there is a user instruction to end the application), CPU 81 ends the processing of step S55 and ends the series of information processing shown in Figure 47.

As mentioned above, in the present embodiment, when having started program, the installation state of detection controller is set operating mode (steps S52, S54) according to the installation state. Accordingly, even if the user does not select operating mode, suitable operating mode can be automatically selected, so the trouble of the user can be saved.

In addition, in Figure 47, the main device 2 determines the installation status of the controller when the execution of the program starts (step S51). Here, in other embodiments, the main device 2 can also determine the installation status of the controller at a specified time during the execution of the program. Moreover, the main device 2 can also change the operation mode according to the change of the installation status of the controller. In addition, the above-mentioned specified timing is arbitrary. For example, in the case of executing a game application, the main device 2 can determine the installation status of the controller at the end of a game, or at a timed timing when a specified instruction is given by the user.

In addition, in Figure 47, the main device 2 changes the number of users performing the operation according to the installation status of the controller. Here, the content of the processing changed according to the installation status of the controller is arbitrary. For example, in other embodiments, the interpretation of the operation of the controller (specifically, the interpretation performed by the main device 2) can also be changed according to the installation status of the controller. Specifically, when the left controller 3 is installed on the main device 2, the CPU 81 can also interpret the operation of tilting the analog joystick 32 in the upward direction (i.e., the y-axis direction shown in Figure 1) as an input in the upward direction. On the other hand, when the left controller 3 is detached from the main device 2, the CPU 81 can also (assuming that the controller is held horizontally as shown in Figure 35) interpret the operation of tilting the analog joystick 32 in the upward direction as an input in the left direction.

In addition, the three series of processes shown in Figures 45 to 47 can be executed in any situation in the main device 2. That is, these three series of processes can also be executed in different situations (that is, when executing different programs). In addition, two or three of these series of processes can also be executed at the same time (for example, in a single program). For example, the main device 2 can also perform a process that combines the processes of Figures 46 and 47 when executing a certain application. Specifically, in steps S53 and S55 shown in Figure 47, the CPU 81 can also perform the above-mentioned prescribed processes based on the operation data obtained through the processes of steps S41 to S43 shown in Figure 46.

[5. Other devices included in the information processing system]

[5-1. Other types of controllers]

As described above, in this embodiment, each controller 3 and 4 is attachable to and detachable from the main device 2. Therefore, a left controller different from the left controller 3 shown in FIG5 can be prepared and installed in the main device 2. Furthermore, a right controller different from the right controller 4 shown in FIG6 can be prepared and installed in the main device 2. In other words, in this embodiment, the controller installed in the main device 2 can be replaced and used.

Figures 48 and 49 are diagrams showing another example of a left controller. The left controller 201 shown in Figure 48 is a structure that includes a cross key 202 instead of each operation button 33 to 36 compared to the left controller 3 shown in Figure 5. In addition, the left controller 203 shown in Figure 49 is a structure that includes a cross key 204 instead of the analog joystick 32 compared to the left controller 3 shown in Figure 5. In this way, other controllers may also have functions different from those of the controllers 3 and 4 shown in Figures 5 and 6. In this way, the information processing system may also include other controllers with functions different from those of the controllers 3 and 4 in addition to (or instead of) the controllers 3 and 4.

In addition, Figure 50 is a diagram showing an example of an information processing device installed with a right controller different from that in Figure 1. In Figure 50, another right controller 205 is installed on the main device 2 instead of the right controller 4 shown in Figure 6. In the right controller 205, the configuration of the analog joystick 52 and the four operation buttons 53 to 56 is opposite to that of the right controller 4 shown in Figure 6. Therefore, the configuration of the analog joystick and the four operation buttons is symmetrical between the left and right controllers of the information processing device 1' shown in Figure 50. That is, in this embodiment, the configuration of the operating part in the information processing device 1 can be changed by replacing the controller installed on the main device 2. In this way, the information processing system may also include other controllers with a configuration different from that of the controllers 3 and 4 in addition to (or instead of) the controllers 3 and 4.

In addition, Figure 51 is a diagram showing another example of a left controller. In the left controller 340 shown in Figure 51, the position of the operating unit provided on the slider 311 (specifically, the second L button 43 and the second R button 44) is different from the left controller 3 in the first and second structural examples described above. Specifically, in the left controller 340, the second L button 43 and the second R button 44 are arranged upward (i.e., on the positive side of the y-axis) (in other words, asymmetrically). In the first and second structural examples described above, the second L button 43 and the second R button 44 are arranged substantially symmetrically with respect to the center of the left controller 3 in the vertical direction. On the other hand, in the left controller 340, the second L button 43 is arranged above the center of the left controller 340 in the vertical direction, and the second R button 44 is arranged below the center. Here, the distance from the center to the second L button 43 is longer than the distance from the center to the second R button 44.

Here, in the left controller 340 (the same applies to the left controller 3), the operating portion (specifically, the analog stick 32 and operating buttons 33 to 36) provided on the main surface is arranged upward. Therefore, when the left controller 340 separated from the main device 2 is held with both hands so that the long side is facing horizontally (refer to Figure 35), the user operates the operating buttons 33 to 36 arranged near the center (in the vertical direction) of the left controller 340 with the right hand, and operates the analog stick 32 arranged near the upper end of the left controller 340 with the left hand (refer to Figure 35). In other words, the user operates the operating portion of the left controller 340 that is inclined to the upper side (toward the left side from the user's perspective). Therefore, by arranging the second L button 43 and the second R button 44 upward in accordance with the operating portion provided on the main surface as shown in Figure 51, it is possible to make it easier to operate the second L button 43 and the second R button 44. As described above, by configuring the second L button 43 and the second R button 44 as in the left controller 340, operability can be improved when the controller is removed and used with the long side facing horizontally.

In addition, although the left controller 340 is used as an example in FIG51 , the right controller can also be configured similarly to the left controller 340 , with the second L button 65 and the second R button 66 being arranged upward.

As described above, in this embodiment, multiple controllers with different functions and/or configurations can also be prepared. In this case, the user can appropriately switch and use the multiple controllers for the main device 2. In this way, it is possible to provide a portable device that can change the operating device (i.e., controller) according to the user's preferences or the content of the application executed on the information processing device 1.

[5-2. Controller accessories]

In addition, the information processing device 1 may also include an accessory for installing controllers 3 and 4 that are separated from the main device 2. Figure 52 is a diagram showing an example of an accessory on which a controller can be installed. As shown in Figure 52, an extended grip 210, which is an example of an accessory, is an accessory for use by a user to perform operations. The extended grip 210 includes a shell 211. The shell 211 can be installed with the left controller 3 and can also be installed with the right controller 4. Therefore, through the extended grip 210, the user can hold and operate the two controllers 3 and 4 that are separated from the main device 2 as a whole.

Furthermore, the extended grip 210 has the same mechanism as the main device 2 (specifically, the left rail member 15, engaging hole 16, stopper 18, right rail member 19, engaging hole 20, and stopper 22) as a mechanism for attaching the controller. Therefore, the controllers 3 and 4 can be attached to the extended grip 210 in the same manner as they are attached to the main device 2.

As shown in Figure 52, the extended grip 210 has a grip portion for being held by the user. Specifically, the extended grip 210 is mounted on the left controller 3 at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction (the x-axis direction shown in Figure 52). In addition, the extended grip 210 has a left grip portion 212 at a position to the left of the portion where the left controller 3 is mounted (in other words, on the outside in the left-right direction). In addition, the extended grip 210 is mounted on the right of the center in the left-right direction. In addition, the extended grip 210 has a right grip portion 213 at a position to the right of the portion where the right controller 4 is mounted (in other words, on the outside in the left-right direction). Therefore, the user can easily operate the controllers 3 and 4 mounted on the extended grip 210 by holding the grip portions 212 and 213.

Although not shown, the extended grip 210 has a left terminal identical to the left terminal 17 of the main unit 2, at a position capable of connecting to the terminal 42 of the left controller 3 installed on the extended grip 210. Furthermore, the extended grip 210 has a right terminal identical to the right terminal 21 of the main unit 2, at a position capable of connecting to the terminal 64 of the right controller 4 installed on the extended grip 210. Thus, when each controller 3 and 4 is installed on the extended grip 210, the extended grip 210 is electrically connected to each controller 3 and 4. Therefore, when the controllers are connected to the extended grip 210, communication and power supply can be established between the two.

Furthermore, although not shown in the figure, the extended grip 210 has a power terminal that is the same as the power terminal 134 of the bracket 5. Therefore, the extended grip 210 can receive power from a charging device (for example, an AC adapter, etc.) not shown in the figure via the power terminal. At this time, the extended grip 210 supplies power supplied from the power terminal to the left controller 3 and the right controller 4 via the left terminal and the right terminal. Therefore, by connecting the extended grip 210 to the charging device, the left controller 3 and the right controller 4 mounted on the extended grip 210 can be charged.

As described above, the extended grip 210 has the function of charging the controller installed on it. That is, the extended grip 210 has a charging unit (i.e., a power terminal and a left terminal or a right terminal) that uses the power supplied to the extended grip 210 to charge the controller installed on the extended grip 210. Accordingly, the controller can be charged while installed in the extended grip. This improves the convenience of the controller.

However, in other embodiments, the extended grip 210 may not have a charging function. In this case, the extended grip 210 may not have electronic components such as terminals. By setting a structure without electronic components, the structure of the extended grip 210 can be simplified.

In addition, when each controller 3 and 4 is installed in the extended grip 210, wireless communication (the same as when each controller 3 and 4 is separated from the main device 2) is performed between each controller 3 and 4 and the main device 2. In other words, each controller 3 and 4 can communicate with the main device 2 even when installed in the extended grip 210.

Specifically, in this embodiment, the controller transmits installation information related to the installation of another device to the main device 2. For example, if the controller is installed in another device, the installation information indicates the device (and/or type of device) to which the controller is installed. If the controller is not installed in the other device, the installation information indicates that the controller is not installed. This installation information may also be transmitted together with (or included in) the operating data.

According to the above, when the controller detects that it is installed in the extended grip 210, it sends a notification indicating that it is installed in the extended grip 210 to the main device 2 via wireless communication. Specifically, the controller sends installation information indicating that the installation destination is the extended grip 210 to the main device 2.

In addition, the method by which the controller determines the device at the installation destination is arbitrary. In this embodiment, the controller obtains identification information representing the device at the installation destination from the installation destination (here, the extended grip 210) based on whether it is installed on other devices. Identification information is, for example, identification information assigned to each device (more specifically, identification information inherent to the device). In addition, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the identification information includes information indicating the type of device, and the type of device can be determined based on the identification information. Based on the above identification information, the controller determines (or detects) that the device at the installation destination is the extended grip 210, that is, it is installed on the extended grip 210 itself. In addition, when the controller is detached from the extended grip 210, the controller sends a notification to the main device 2 through wireless communication indicating that it has been detached from the extended grip 210. That is, the controller sends installation information to the main device 2 indicating that it is not installed on other devices.

Here, the main device 2 may also change the interpretation of the controller operation according to the device of the installation destination of the controller. That is, the main device 2 may also change the method of determining the input content (in other words, the user's instruction content) based on the operation data from the controller according to the device of the installation destination. For example, in the example shown in FIG52, the left and right controllers 3 and 4 are installed on the extended grip 210 in a state slightly tilted relative to the up and down directions. Therefore, for example, even if the analog joystick is tilted in the upward direction (the positive direction of the y-axis shown in FIG52) based on the extended grip 210, it will not be tilted in the upward direction based on the controller. Therefore, when the controller is installed on the extended grip 210, the main device 2 needs to change the interpretation of the direction input of the analog joystick compared to the case where the controller is not installed on the extended grip 210 (for example, the case where it is installed on the main device 2). For example, the main device 2 needs to change the following interpretation: in which direction the analog joystick is tilted, it is interpreted as an input in the upward direction.

Based on the above, when the installation destination of the controller is the extended grip 210, the main device 2 changes the interpretation of the directional input of the analog joystick compared to the case where the installation destination is the main device 2. Specifically, when the installation destination of the controller is the extended grip 210, the main device 2 applies the following correction to the tilting direction of the analog joystick represented by the operation data: the tilting direction of the analog joystick represented by the operation data is rotated by a specified angle. In addition, the specified angle is, for example, the tilt angle of the controller when it is installed on the extended grip 210, based on the posture of the controller when it is installed on the main device 2. The specified angle can be pre-set based on the structure of the extended grip 210. The main device 2 processes the corrected tilting direction as the direction input by the user, that is, performs information processing using the corrected tilting direction as input. Therefore, when the analog joystick is tilted in the upward direction based on the extended grip 210, it is considered that the upward direction is the input direction for processing, and thus information processing is performed appropriately.

In addition, when the installation destination of the controller is the extended grip 210, the main device 2 corrects the values of the detection results of the acceleration sensor and the angular velocity sensor of the controller. That is, the main device 2 applies the following correction to the direction of the acceleration as the detection result of the acceleration sensor: the direction of the acceleration as the detection result of the acceleration sensor is rotated by the above-mentioned prescribed angle in the rotation direction with the front-back direction of the controller (the z-axis direction shown in Figure 1) as the axis. In addition, the main device 2 applies the following correction to the rotation axis of the angular velocity as the detection result of the angular velocity sensor: the rotation axis of the angular velocity as the detection result of the angular velocity sensor is rotated by the above-mentioned prescribed angle in the rotation direction with the front-back direction of the controller (the z-axis direction shown in Figure 1) as the axis. Then, the main device 2 calculates the activity and/or posture of the controller (in other words, the extended grip 210) based on the corrected acceleration and/or angular velocity values.

Furthermore, the main unit 2 may calculate the controller's movement and/or posture without correcting the values of the detection results from the acceleration sensor and angular velocity sensor, and may correct the calculated movement and/or posture. Specifically, when calculating movement based on the detection results from the acceleration sensor and/or angular velocity sensor, the main unit 2 applies the following correction to the direction of the calculated movement: the calculated movement direction is rotated by the aforementioned specified angle in the rotational direction about the front-to-back direction of the controller. Furthermore, when calculating posture based on the detection results from the acceleration sensor and/or angular velocity sensor, the main unit 2 applies the following correction to the calculated posture: the calculated posture is rotated by the specified angle in the rotational direction about the front-to-back direction of the controller.

As described above, in this embodiment, the left controller 3 is mounted on the extended grip 210 (refer to FIG52 ) in a state in which it is tilted in a first direction relative to a prescribed reference posture (i.e., a posture in which the up-down direction of the left controller 3 is consistent with the up-down direction of the extended grip 210. This can also be said to be a posture in which the left controller 3 is mounted on the main device 2). In addition, the right controller 4 is mounted on the extended grip 210 in a state in which it is tilted in a direction opposite to the first direction relative to a prescribed reference posture (i.e., a posture in which the up-down direction of the right controller 4 is consistent with the up-down direction of the extended grip 210). Accordingly, the controller can be mounted on the accessory device at an inclination that is easy to operate.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when at least any one of the left controller 3 and the right controller 4 is mounted on the extended grip 210, the main device 2 performs prescribed information processing after correcting the operation data from the mounted controller and/or the information obtained based on the operation data. For example, the main device 2 performs correction processing in a manner that corrects the inclination of the controller relative to the above-mentioned prescribed reference posture. More specifically, the main device 2 performs correction processing in a manner that makes the processing result of the information processing when a prescribed operation is performed on the controller mounted on the extended grip 210 substantially the same as the processing result when the prescribed operation is performed on the controller in a state that serves as the above-mentioned prescribed reference posture. Accordingly, even when the controller is mounted on an accessory device at an angle relative to the prescribed reference posture, it can be operated in the same manner as when it is not mounted (or when it is mounted on the main device 2), thereby improving the operability of the controller mounted on the accessory device.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the main device 2 corrects the data representing the operation of the directional input unit (i.e., the analog joystick) in the operation data. This allows the analog joystick operation to feel the same whether the controller is attached to the accessory device at an angle relative to a predetermined reference position or not (or attached to the main device 2).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even when both the left controller 3 and the right controller 4 are mounted on the extended grip 210, these two controllers are grouped together, similarly to when both the left controller 3 and the right controller 4 are mounted on the main device 2. Specifically, when a notification indicating that one of the left and right controllers is mounted on the extended grip 210 is newly received, the main device 2 groups these two controllers together. Thus, even if the user does not mount the two controllers they wish to group together on the main device 2, they can still be grouped together by mounting them on the extended grip 210.

In addition, in other embodiments, the extended grip 210 may also include a communication unit capable of wirelessly communicating with the main device 2. In this case, the extended grip 210 may also obtain operation data from the controllers 3 and 4 installed on it, and send the obtained operation data to the main device 2 via the communication unit.

Furthermore, the main device 2 can also wirelessly communicate not only with controllers that can be installed on it, but also with devices that cannot be installed on it (e.g., the extended grip 210). For example, the main device 2 can also receive operation data from an operating device that cannot be installed on it via wireless communication and perform information processing based on the operation data. This allows the main device 2 to be operated using a wider variety of operating devices.

In addition, the extended grip 210 may also have an operating unit (for example, a button and an analog joystick, etc.). Accordingly, the extended grip 210 can make the operations performed using the controller more colorful. In addition, the information representing the operation of the above-mentioned operating unit may be obtained by the controller installed on the extended grip 210 (when multiple controllers are installed, it may be any one of the controllers) and sent from the controller to the main device 2. At this time, the above-mentioned information may also be sent together with the operating data of the controller (or included in the operating data). In addition, in the case where the extended grip 210 has a communication unit that can perform wireless communication with the main device 2, the information representing the operation of the above-mentioned operating unit may also be sent directly from the extended grip 210 (that is, not via the controller) to the main device 2.

In addition, an auxiliary operating device such as the extended grip described above may also be a structure without a grip portion. In this case, the auxiliary operating device may also be a structure in which the housing of each controller is used as a grip portion. Figure 53 is a diagram showing another example of an auxiliary operating device. In Figure 53, the accessory 220 has a housing 221 that can be mounted on the left controller 3 and the right controller 4, similar to the extended grip 210 shown in Figure 52. In addition, the mechanism for mounting the controller in the accessory 220 is the same as that of the extended grip 210.

Here, the accessory 220 shown in Figure 53 does not have a grip portion. Therefore, the user grips the left controller 3 and the right controller 4 attached to the accessory 220. In this way, the user can also grip the two controllers 3 and 4 separated from the main device 2 as a whole.

Figure 54 is a six-sided view of another example of an extended grip. In addition, Figure 55 is a three-dimensional view of an example of the extended grip shown in Figure 54. The extended grip 350 shown in Figure 54 is the same as the extended grip 210 shown in Figure 52. It is an extension device for mounting the controllers 3 and 4 on the extended grip when operating the controllers 3 and 4 separated from the main device 2. In addition, the extended grip 350 can be called a supporting device for supporting the controllers. Below, with reference to Figures 54 to 59, the extended grip 350 will be described with a focus on points not described in the description related to the extended grip 210.

(Overall Structure of Extended Grip 350)

As shown in Figure 54, the extended grip 350 includes a main body 351 and a support portion 352. The main body 351 has a left grip 353 for the user to hold with the left hand and a right grip 354 for the user to hold with the right hand. Therefore, the main body 351 can also be referred to as a grip portion. In addition, the main body 351 has a connecting portion 355.

The connecting portion 355 connects the left grip portion 353 and the right grip portion 354. The connecting portion 355 is, for example, a member extending in the horizontal direction (i.e., the x-axis direction shown in FIG54 ), with the left grip portion 353 provided at the left end portion of the connecting portion 355 and the right grip portion 354 provided at the right end portion of the connecting portion 355. The left grip portion 353 has a shape extending in the up-down direction (i.e., the y-axis direction shown in FIG54 ). The right grip portion 354 also has a shape extending in the up-down direction, similarly to the left grip portion 353. In addition, to be precise, the left grip portion 353 and the right grip portion 354 have a shape extending in a direction slightly inclined obliquely with respect to the up-down direction. Specifically, the left grip portion 353 and the right grip portion 354 are inclined from the portion connected to the connecting portion 355 in a direction away from each other as they go downward. By configuring the grips 353 and 354 to have such a shape, the user can comfortably hold the grips 353 and 354 , thereby comfortably operating the controllers 3 and 4 mounted on the extended grip 350 .

As shown in Figure 55, the left grip portion 353 and the right grip portion 354 each extend downward from the connection portion with the connecting portion 355. Furthermore, the lower end of the connecting portion 355 (i.e., the end on the negative side of the y-axis) is located above the lower ends of the left grip portion 353 and the right grip portion 354. More specifically, the lower end of the connecting portion 355 is located above the center of each grip portion 353 and 354 in the vertical direction. This allows the user to securely grasp each grip portion 353 and 354 by wrapping their fingers under the connecting portion 355. Consequently, the operability of the extended grip 350 can be improved.

In this embodiment, the main body 351 is composed of a single (in other words, integrally formed) housing. In this embodiment, the housing of the main body 351 is made of resin. In other embodiments, the main body 351 may also be a structure formed by connecting multiple housings (for example, the housings of each of the parts 353 to 355).

The support portion 352 is a member for supporting each controller 3 and 4. As shown in Figures 54 and 55, the support portion 352 is connected to the main body 351 (specifically, the connecting portion 355 of the main body 351). The support portion 352 (in other words, the housing of the support portion 352) has a generally rectangular parallelepiped shape, with its back surface (i.e., the surface facing the positive z-axis direction) connected to the front surface (i.e., the surface facing the negative z-axis direction) of the connecting portion 355. In this embodiment, the housing of the support portion 352 is made of resin.

As described above, the extended grip 350 is a structure in which the main body 351 and the support portion 352 are connected. That is, in the extended grip 350, the shell of the main body 351 and the shell of the support portion 352 are formed separately, and these shells are connected. In addition, the support portion 352 can also be connected to the main body 351 in a movable manner relative to the main body 351 (Figure 58), and the details will be described later. In addition, in other embodiments, the main body 351 and the support portion 352 can also be formed integrally. For example, the main body 351 and the support portion 352 can also be composed of one shell.

As shown in the bottom view in Figure 54 ((e) shown in Figure 54) and Figure 55, in this embodiment, the lower end portion of the main body 351 and the lower end portions of each grip portion 353 and 354 are arranged at different positions in the front-to-back direction (i.e., the z-axis direction). In addition, these lower end portions are arranged at substantially the same position in the up-down direction (i.e., the y-axis direction). Therefore, the extended grip 350 can stand alone in a state where the lower end portion of the main body 351 and the lower end portions of each grip portion 353 and 354 are in contact with the ground. Accordingly, the user can place the extended grip 350 (and the controller mounted on the extended grip 350) in an upright state, so that the extended grip 350 can be placed regardless of the location.

As shown in the rear view of Figure 54 (Figure 54(f)), a hole 355a is formed in the connecting portion 355 of the main body 351. The hole 355a is formed to allow a string, such as a belt, to pass through. The location of the hole 355a is arbitrary. In this embodiment, the hole 355a is formed on the back side of the support portion 352 (i.e., on the positive z-axis side).

(Structure related to controller installation)

Next, the structure for attaching the controller to the extended grip 350 will be described. The extended grip 350 can simultaneously attach the left controller 3 and the right controller 4 in the second structural example described above. Specifically, the extended grip 350 includes a left rail member 356 and a right rail member 357.

As shown in the left side view in Figure 54 ((b) shown in Figure 54), the left rail member 356 is arranged to extend in the up and down direction (i.e., the y-axis direction) on the left side surface of the support portion 352 (i.e., the surface on the positive side of the x-axis). The left rail member 356 has the same mechanism as the left rail member 300 of the main device 2 in the second structural example as a mechanism for installing the left controller 3. That is, the left rail member 356 has the same structural members as the bottom portion 301, the side portion 302, the top portion 303 and the facing portion 304 in the left rail member 300 of the main device 2. Therefore, the left rail member 356 can be engaged with the slider 311 of the left controller 3 in a sliding manner. In addition, the sliding movement of the slider 311 of the left controller 3 can be stopped by the facing portion of the left rail member 356. Therefore, the user can install the left controller 3 on the extended grip 350 in the same way as when the left controller 3 is installed on the main device 2.

In addition, the left rail member 356, like the left rail member 300 of the main device 2, has a latching portion (in other words, the notch C1 shown in FIG9 ). Therefore, when the left controller 3 is mounted on the extended grip 350, the latching member 319 of the slider 311 of the left controller 3 latches with the latching portion of the left rail member 356. In other words, the latching member 319 latches the slider 311 from sliding in the removal direction. This allows the left controller 3 to be latched (in other words, locked) relative to the extended grip 350.

In addition, the left rail member 356 has a terminal (the left terminal 367 described later) in the same manner as the left rail member 300 of the main device 2. Although not shown in the figure, the left terminal 367 is provided on the facing surface of the facing portion in the same manner as the left rail member 300 of the main device 2. Therefore, when the left controller 3 is mounted on the extended grip 350, the left terminal 367 is electrically connected to the terminal 42 of the left controller 3. Thus, the extended grip 350 can charge the left controller 3, as will be described in detail later.

In addition, the left rail member 356 of the extended grip 350 is different from the left rail member 300 of the main device 2 in the following two points. First, the leaf spring 305 provided on the bottom surface of the left rail member 356 of the extended grip 350 is not provided as is the case with the left rail member 300 of the main device 2 (the reason will be described later). Second, as shown in Figure 55, a hole 356a is formed on the bottom surface of the left rail member 356 of the extended grip 350 at a position where the incident surface 358a of the light guide member 358 described later is provided on the left side surface of the shell of the support portion 352. The hole 356a is formed so that the incident surface 358a of the light guide member 358 is exposed on the left side surface of the support portion 352, and the details will be described later.

As shown in the right side view in Figure 54 ((c) shown in Figure 54), the right rail member 357 is arranged to extend in the up and down direction (i.e., the y-axis direction) on the right side surface of the support portion 352 (i.e., the surface on the negative side of the x-axis). The right rail member 357 has the same mechanism as the right rail member of the main device 2 in the second structural example as a mechanism for installing the right controller 4. Therefore, the right rail member 357 can be engaged with the slider 331 of the right controller 4 in a sliding manner. In addition, the sliding movement of the slider 331 of the right controller 4 can be stopped by the facing portion of the right rail member 357. Moreover, the right controller 4 can be locked (in other words, locked) relative to the extended grip 350 by the locked portion of the right rail member 357. In addition, the right rail member 357 has a terminal (the right terminal 368 described later) in the same manner as the right rail member of the main device 2. When the right controller 4 is installed on the extended grip 350, the right terminal 368 is electrically connected to the terminal 64 of the right controller 4.

The structure of the right rail member 357 is the same as that of the left rail member 356. Here, each rail member 356 and 357 is symmetrical about an axis parallel to the up and down direction (i.e., the y-axis). Therefore, in the extended grip 350, the same member can be used as the left rail member 356 and the right rail member 357, so that the manufacturing efficiency can be achieved. In addition, in other embodiments, the right rail member 357 may not be the same structure as the left rail member 356. For example, the left rail member 356 and the right rail member 357 may also be provided with a fixed portion only on one side of the two top surface portions. In this case, the fixed portion may also be provided at different positions (specifically, positions on opposite sides of each other) in the left rail member 356 and the right rail member 357.

As shown in Figure 54, the sliding direction of the left rail member 356 is substantially parallel to the sliding direction of the right rail member 357. Figure 56 shows an example of a state where two controllers are attached to the extended grip 350. Since the sliding directions of the two rail members 356 and 357 are parallel, the controllers 3 and 4 attached to the extended grip 350 are supported by the extended grip 350 so as to face the same direction, as shown in Figure 56.

Furthermore, both the left and right rail members 356 and 357 are configured to allow the controller slider to be inserted from the upper side (i.e., the y-axis direction). Specifically, in the support portion 352, the facing portions of the left and right rail members 356 and 357 are located at the same lower end (see the left and right side views in FIG54 ). This allows the user to install the left and right controllers 3 and 4 from the same orientation, improving the convenience of the extended grip 350.

The left and right rail members 356 and 357 are made of metal, similar to the rail members of the main device 2. Meanwhile, the housing of the support portion 352 is made of resin. In other words, the components forming the outer shape (in other words, the surface) of the support portion 352, excluding the rail members, are made of resin.

As shown in Figure 54, the main body 351 (more specifically, the connecting portion 355) has a left supporting surface on the left side of the supporting portion 352. The left supporting surface includes a first surface 353a, a second surface 353b, a third surface 353c and a fourth surface 353d. The first surface 353a is arranged at a position to the right of the left end of the left grip portion 353. The first surface 353a is formed to be continuous with the second surface 353b, and the second surface 353b is formed to be continuous with the third surface 353c. In addition, the second surface 353b extends to the right from the first surface 353a, and the third surface 353c extends to the right from the second surface 353b. The left supporting surface is a surface provided along the side and back of the left controller 3 mounted on the extended grip 350. In addition, the left supporting surface may not support the left controller 3 mounted on the extended grip 350 in a strict sense. That is to say, the left support surface may not be in contact with the left controller 3 installed on the extended grip 350, but may only be set along the main body 310 of the left controller 3.

The first surface 353a of the left support surface is arranged to face the bottom surface of the left rail member 356 (in other words, the left side surface of the support portion 352). In other words, the first surface 353a is formed to be substantially parallel to the bottom surface of the left rail member 356. The first surface 353a is arranged along the left side surface of the left controller 3 mounted on the extended grip 350. The first surface 353a is arranged to the left of the left side surface of the left controller 3 mounted on the extended grip 350 (i.e., the positive x-axis side).

Here, in each controller 3 and 4 in the second structural example, a rounded corner is formed from the side opposite to the side on which the slider is provided to the back (Figures 14 and 25). That is, the side on the opposite side is connected to the back through a connecting surface that is a curved surface. The second surface 353b of the left supporting surface is provided along the connecting surface of the left controller 3 mounted on the extended grip 350. The second surface 353b is provided on the left side of the connecting surface of the left controller 3 mounted on the extended grip 350 (which can be referred to as the rear side (i.e., the positive direction side of the z-axis) or the left rear side). In addition, the third surface 353c of the left supporting surface is provided along the back of the left controller 3 mounted on the extended grip 350. The third surface 353c is provided on the rear side of the back of the left controller 3 mounted on the extended grip 350.

By providing the left support surface as described above, when the left controller 3 is mounted on the extended grip 350, no large gap is created between the left controller 3 and the left grip portion 353 (see FIG56 ). Consequently, the user can hold the extended grip 350 and the controller mounted thereon as a single controller. In other words, the user can hold each controller as if they were holding a grip portion directly connected to the controller. Thus, an extended grip that allows for easy use of the controller can be provided.

As shown in Figure 55, a notch C2 is formed at the upper end of the left supporting surface of the main body 351. In other words, the notch C2 is formed at the upper end portion of the surface composed of the above-mentioned first surface 353a to the third surface 353c. The notch C2 is formed to avoid the protrusion 314 (in other words, the ZL button 39 provided on the protrusion 314) provided on the back of the left controller 3 installed on the extended grip 350. Specifically, the upper end portion of the surface composed of the above-mentioned first surface 353a to the third surface 353c is formed to avoid the protrusion 314 provided on the back of the left controller 3 installed on the extended grip 350. The first surface 353a to the third surface 353c of the left supporting surface are formed so that the position of the protrusion 314 of the left controller 3 installed on the extended grip 350 is the upper edge of these surfaces.

As described above, by forming the notch C2 at the main body 351, the left controller 3 having an operating portion provided on the back can be mounted on the extended grip 350. In addition, when the left controller 3 is mounted on the extended grip 350, the user can operate the operating portion (for example, the ZL button 39) provided on the back of the left controller 3. Moreover, when the boundary portion between the notch C2 and the third surface 353c (in other words, the connection portion between the fourth surface 353d and the third surface 353c) abuts against the protrusion 314, the protrusion 314 of the left controller 3 can be supported by the boundary portion. That is, when the left controller 3 is mounted on the extended grip 350, the boundary portion can support the protrusion 314 from below. Thus, the left controller 3 can be more firmly connected to the extended grip 350.

In addition, the fourth surface 353d of the left support surface is arranged to extend from the upper side of the surface formed by the above-mentioned first surface 353a to the third surface 353c to the deep side (i.e., the positive direction side of the z-axis). In other words, the fourth surface 353d of the left support surface is arranged to be connected to the upper side of the surface formed by the above-mentioned first surface 353a to the third surface 353c, and to be recessed from the surface. In this way, the above-mentioned fourth surface 353d is arranged along the protruding portion 314 of the left controller 3 mounted on the extended grip 350. Accordingly, when the left controller 3 is mounted on the extended grip 350, no large gap is generated between the protruding portion 314 of the left controller 3 and the left grip portion 353. As a result, the possibility of the user feeling a sense of disharmony when operating the ZL button 39 provided on the protruding portion 314 can be reduced, and the operability of the controller 3 mounted on the extended grip 350 can be further improved.

In addition, as shown in Figure 54, an elastic member 362 is provided on the first surface 353a of the left support surface. The elastic member 362 is arranged to protrude from the first surface 353a. The elastic member 362 is made of rubber, for example. When the left controller 3 is mounted on the extended grip 350, the left controller 3 is pressed (in other words, force is applied) toward the side of the support portion 352 (in other words, toward the inner side of the extended grip 350) by the above-mentioned elastic member 362. Thereby, the shaking of the extended grip 350 and the left controller 3 can be reduced, and the left controller 3 can be more firmly connected to the extended grip 350. In addition, the vibration sound generated when the left controller 3 vibrates due to the vibrator 107 can be reduced.

In addition, as shown in the main view in Figure 54 ((a) shown in Figure 54), the elastic member 362 is provided at a position lower than the center of the left rail member 356 in the vertical direction (i.e., on the negative side of the y-axis). Accordingly, when the left controller 3 is mounted on the extended grip 350, the period during which the slider 311 of the left controller 3, which is inserted into the left rail member 356 and slides, contacts the elastic member 362 becomes shorter. Thus, the wear of the elastic member 362 can be reduced. In addition, the left controller 3 can be smoothly mounted on the extended grip 350.

In other embodiments, the number of elastic members provided on the left supporting surface (specifically, the first surface 353a) is arbitrary and may be multiple. In addition, in the case where multiple elastic members are provided, each elastic member is provided at a position lower than the center in the up-down direction of the left rail member 356, as in the present embodiment. Thereby, the period during which the slider 311 of the left controller 3 abuts against the elastic member can be shortened. In addition, in other embodiments, the position at which the elastic member is provided is arbitrary. For example, the elastic member may also be provided on the second surface 353b and/or the third surface 353c in addition to being provided on the first surface 353a (or instead of being provided on the first surface 353a).

In addition, due to the provision of the elastic member 362, the left rail member 356 of the extended grip 350 may not have a member equivalent to the leaf spring 305 of the main device 2. In other embodiments, an elastic member identical to the leaf spring 305 may be provided on the bottom surface of the left rail member 356.

In addition, as shown in Figures 54 and 55, the main body 351 has a right supporting surface on the right side of the supporting portion 352. The right supporting surface is configured to have the same function as the above-mentioned left supporting surface. Specifically, it is formed symmetrically with the above-mentioned left supporting surface (relative to the center of the extended grip 350). That is, the right supporting surface has a first surface 354a, a second surface 354b, a third surface 354c and a fourth surface 354d. The first surface 354a of the right supporting surface is a shape that is symmetrical with the first surface 353a of the left supporting surface, the second surface 354b of the right supporting surface is a shape that is symmetrical with the second surface 353b of the left supporting surface, the third surface 354c of the right supporting surface is a shape that is symmetrical with the third surface 353c of the left supporting surface, and the fourth surface 354d of the right supporting surface is a shape that is symmetrical with the fourth surface 353d of the left supporting surface. Thus, the right controller 4 is also similar to the left controller 3 , and the user can hold the extended grip 350 and the right controller 4 mounted on the extended grip 350 as one controller.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG55 , the right supporting surface having the above-described shape forms a notch C3 in the main body 351. This allows the right controller 4, which has an operating unit provided on the back, to be mounted on the extended grip 350, and the user can operate the operating unit (e.g., the ZR button 61) provided on the back of the right controller 4 mounted on the extended grip 350.

In addition, an elastic member 363 identical to the elastic member 362 of the left support surface is provided on the first surface 354a of the right support surface. Thus, when the right controller 4 is mounted on the extended grip 350, the elastic member 363 presses the right controller 4 toward the support portion 352 (in other words, toward the inside of the extended grip 350). This reduces the shaking between the extended grip 350 and the right controller 4. Furthermore, the right controller 4 can be more securely connected to the extended grip 350, reducing the chattering sound produced when the right controller 4 vibrates due to the vibrator 107.

As shown in Figures 54 and 55, a plurality of (here 4) screw holes are formed on the left supporting surface and the right supporting surface (specifically, the third surfaces 353c and 354c), and a screw 364 is threadedly engaged at each screw hole. In addition, the shell of the main body 351 is composed of a front shell member and a rear shell member. The screw 364 is used to connect the front shell member to the rear shell member. Here, as shown in Figure 55, the screw 364 is configured not to protrude from the left supporting surface or the right supporting surface. In other words, the screw 364 is provided at a position recessed from the left supporting surface or the right supporting surface. Accordingly, when the slider of the controller is inserted into the track member of the extended grip 350, the possibility of the screw 364 contacting the controller can be reduced, and the controller can be smoothly installed on the extended grip 350.

In addition, a support device such as the extended grip 350 may also be a structure without a grip portion. For example, the extended grip 350 may also be a structure without a main body 351 and only with a support portion 352. In this case, the user can hold the controllers 3 and 4 mounted on the support portion 352 to operate. Thus, the user can also hold the two controllers 3 and 4 separated from the main device 2 as a whole, and can fix the positional relationship of the two controllers 3 and 4 to operate. Therefore, the operability when the two controllers 3 and 4 are removed from the main device 2 for use can be improved. In addition, in a support device without a grip portion, the first surface of the above-mentioned left support surface and right support surface is not provided, so the structure may also be a structure without an elastic member provided on the first surface. In this structure, the support device may also have an elastic member that is the same as the above-mentioned leaf spring 305 and is provided on the bottom surface of the track member. Thus, the controller can be firmly connected to the extended grip 350.

(Charging-related structures)

Next, the structure for charging the controller using the extension grip 350 will be described. Here, the extension grip 350 can charge the controller by supplying power to the controller mounted on the extension grip 350.

FIG57 is a block diagram showing an example of the internal structure of the extended grip 350. In this embodiment, the components shown in FIG57 are provided on the support portion 352. In other embodiments, some of the components shown in FIG57 may be provided on the main body 351.

As shown in Figure 57, the extended grip 350 has a power terminal 360. The power terminal 360 is the same as the power terminal 134 of the bracket 5. Therefore, the extended grip 350 can receive power from the charging device via the power terminal 360 by connecting a charging device (for example, an AC adapter, etc.) not shown in the figure to the power terminal 360. In addition, the position of the connector of the power terminal 360 (in other words, the connector including the power terminal 360) is arbitrary. In this embodiment, as shown in the top view in Figure 54 ((d) shown in Figure 54), the connector of the power terminal 360 is provided on the upper surface of the support portion 352 (that is, the surface on the positive side of the y-axis). Accordingly, even if the power terminal 360 is connected to the above-mentioned charging device during the use of the extended grip 350, it is not easy to interfere with the operation, and the operability of the extended grip 350 can be maintained.

The extended grip 350 includes a power supply control unit 366. The power supply control unit 366 is electrically connected to the power terminal 360, the notification LED 361, the left terminal 367, and the right terminal 368, respectively. The power supply control unit 366 is, for example, a power control circuit composed of an electronic circuit. The power supply control unit 366 controls the power supply to the controller installed on the extended grip 350 (more specifically, the charging of the controller). That is, the power supply control unit 366 supplies the power supplied from the power terminal 360 to the left controller 3 and the right controller 4 via the left terminal 367 and the right terminal 368, thereby charging the left controller 3 and the right controller 4. In addition, the power supply control unit 366 controls the notification LED 361 to notify the user of the charging status of each controller 3 and 4.

The left terminal 367 is a terminal provided on the left rail member 356. The right terminal 368 is a terminal provided on the right rail member 357. Furthermore, the number of the left terminal 367 and the right terminal 368 may be different from the number of the left terminal 17 and the right terminal 21 of the main device 2. For example, the left terminal 367 and the right terminal 368 may only include the terminals used for charging out of the ten terminals provided on the left terminal 17 of the main device 2.

Notification LED 361 is a notification unit for notifying the user of predetermined information (specifically, information related to charging). As shown in the top view of FIG. 54 (FIG. 54(d)), notification LED 361 is provided on the surface (i.e., the top surface) of support portion 352 where power terminals 360 are provided. The location of notification LED 361 is arbitrary, and in other embodiments, it may be provided on a surface different from the surface where power terminals 360 are provided.

Next, the operation of the extended grip 350 when charging the controllers installed on it will be described. To charge the controllers 3 and 4 installed on the extended grip 350, the user first connects the aforementioned charging device (e.g., an AC adapter) to the power terminal 360. This allows the extended grip 350 to receive power from the charging device via the connector of the power terminal 360.

When power can be supplied via the power supply terminal 360 , the power supply control unit 366 determines whether to charge. In this embodiment, this determination is made based on information related to charging (referred to as charging information) received from a controller attached to the extension grip 350 .

In this embodiment, when the controllers 3 and 4 are installed on the extended grip 350, they send charging information indicating whether charging is required to the extended grip 350. Specifically, when the power of their own batteries is insufficient, the controllers 3 and 4 send charging information indicating that charging is required to the extended grip 350. On the other hand, when the power of their own batteries is sufficient (for example, when charging is completed, etc.), the controllers 3 and 4 send charging information indicating that charging is not required to the extended grip 350. In addition, the timing of the controller sending the charging information is arbitrary. For example, the charging information can be sent periodically (specifically, at a ratio of once per specified time), or when specified conditions are met (specifically, when the controller is connected to other devices, and/or when charging is completed, etc.).

If the power supply control unit 366 receives charging information indicating that charging is required from at least one controller, it determines that charging should be performed. On the other hand, if the power supply control unit 366 does not receive charging information indicating that charging is required from any controller (i.e., if it receives charging information indicating that charging is not required, or if it does not receive charging information because the controller is not installed), it determines that charging should not be performed. In this case, the power supply control unit 366 does not start charging.

When the power supply control unit 366 determines that charging is to be performed, it supplies power from the power supply terminal 360 to the left controller 3 and/or the right controller 4 via the left terminal 367 and/or the right terminal 368. The left controller 3 charges its battery using power supplied from the extended grip 350 via the terminal 42. The right controller 4 charges its battery using power supplied from the extended grip 350 via the terminal 64. Thus, the left controller 3 and/or the right controller 4 are charged.

Furthermore, the power supply control unit 366 supplies power to the controller that has transmitted charging information indicating that charging is required. Specifically, when receiving charging information indicating that charging is required from each of the controllers 3 and 4, the power supply control unit 366 supplies power to both controllers 3 and 4. When receiving charging information indicating that charging is required from only one of the controllers 3 and 4, the power supply control unit 366 supplies power to that controller.

In addition, the conditions for charging the controller by the extended grip 350 are arbitrary. For example, in other embodiments, the power supply control unit 366 may charge the controller not based on information from the controller (for example, unconditionally).

When charging at least one controller, the power supply control unit 366 controls the notification LED 361 to illuminate in a predetermined manner (e.g., constantly illuminated or flashing). Specifically, the notification LED 361 indicates that charging is in progress until both game controllers are fully charged. Then, the notification LED 361 turns off when both game controllers are fully charged.

Thus, in this embodiment, as long as one of the two controllers that can be mounted on the extended grip 350 is being charged, the user is notified that it is being charged through the notification LED 361. Here, there is the following situation: although the two controllers are started to be charged, the charging of one of the controllers is completed first, and only the charging of the other controller continues. According to the present embodiment, in this case, the user is also notified that it is being charged through the notification LED 361. Therefore, in the above-mentioned situation, the possibility of the following situation occurring can be reduced: although the charging of the other controller is not yet completed, the user stops charging (specifically, removes the controller or the above-mentioned charging device from the extended grip 350). In addition, in this embodiment, one notification LED can be used to perform notifications related to the charging status of the two game controllers, so the structure of the extended grip 350 can be simplified, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost.

Furthermore, in other embodiments, the power supply control unit 366 may control the notification LED 361 to illuminate in a different pattern (e.g., a different flashing interval or illuminated color) than during charging when all installed controllers have completed charging. For example, the notification LED 361 may be controlled to flash during charging and remain illuminated when all installed controllers have completed charging. This allows the user to be informed of the completion of charging in an easily understandable manner.

In addition, in other embodiments, the extended grip 350 may also have multiple notification LEDs. For example, the extended grip 350 may also have a first notification LED corresponding to the left controller 3 and a second notification LED corresponding to the right controller 4. At this time, the power supply control unit 366 notifies that the left controller 3 is being charged through the first notification LED, and notifies that the right controller 4 is being charged through the second notification LED. Accordingly, the charging status of each controller can be notified to the user individually. In addition, the first notification LED may be provided at a position to the left of the center of the extended grip 350 (more specifically, the support portion 352), and the second notification LED may be provided at a position to the right of the center of the extended grip 350 (more specifically, the support portion 352). Thus, the correspondence between the controllers and the notification LEDs can be presented to the user in an easy-to-understand manner.

In other embodiments, the extended grip 350 may not have a charging function. In this case, the extended grip 350 may not have electronic components such as terminals. By setting a structure without electronic components, the structure of the extended grip 350 can be simplified.

(Structure related to light guidance)

The extended grip 350 includes a structure that allows the user to visually recognize the light emitted by the notification LED of the controller installed on it. The notification LED of each controller 3 and 4 may sometimes light up to indicate the controller's assigned number or to indicate the controller's battery level. In this case, the above-mentioned structure allows the user to visually recognize the light emitted by the notification LED of the controller even when the controller is installed in the extended grip 350. Details are explained below.

As shown in FIG55 , a hole 356 a is formed in the bottom surface of the left rail member 356. Furthermore, an incident port (i.e., a hole in which the incident surface 358 a of the light guide member 358 shown in FIG55 is provided) is formed in the portion of the left side surface of the housing of the support portion 352 exposed by the hole 356 a. The number of incident ports is the same as the number of notification LEDs 45 of the left controller 3 (here, four). Each incident port is formed at a position substantially facing the notification LED 45 of the left controller 3 mounted on the extended grip 350.

On the other hand, an exit port is formed on the front side of the support portion 352 (i.e., a hole is provided on the exit surface 358b of the light-guiding member 358 shown in FIG55). The exit port corresponds to the four entrance ports, forming the same number of exit ports as the entrance ports (here, 4). Inside the support portion 352, the exit ports are respectively connected to the entrance ports corresponding to themselves. In addition, the position where the exit port is formed is arbitrary and can be any surface different from the surface where the track member is provided. For example, in other embodiments, the exit port can also be formed on the upper surface, lower surface or back surface of the support portion 352.

As shown in FIG55 , the incident port and the exit port corresponding to the incident port are connected by a light-guiding member 358. Specifically, a light-guiding member 358 is provided in a space connecting the incident port and the exit port (specifically, a tunnel-shaped space), an incident surface 358a of the light-guiding member 358 is provided near the incident port, and an exit surface 358b of the light-guiding member 358 is provided near the exit port (refer to FIG55 . In addition, in FIG55 , the position of the light-guiding member 358 for one of the four incident ports is shown by a dotted line). The light-guiding member 358 is a transparent member made of, for example, resin. The light-guiding member 358 guides the light incident on the incident surface 358a to the exit surface 358b by internal reflection, and the light is emitted from the exit surface 358b. In addition, the light-guiding member 358 can be any member that can guide the light incident on the incident surface 358a to the exit surface 358b. For example, in other embodiments, the light guiding member 358 may also be a mirror provided on the wall of a hole connecting the incident port and the exit port.

When the notification LED 45 of the left controller 3 attached to the extended grip 350 is lit, the light emitted by the notification LED 45 is incident on the incident surface 358a facing the notification LED 45, and is emitted from the emission surface 358b through the light guide member 358. Thus, the user can visually recognize the light emitted by the notification LED 45 of the left controller 3 and can understand the information notified by the notification LED 45.

In the above description, the structure for presenting the light emitted by the notification LED 45 of the left controller 3 to the user is described. As a structure in the extended grip 350 for presenting the light emitted by the notification LED 67 of the right controller 4 installed on the extended grip 350 to the user, the extended grip 350 has the same structure as described above. That is, although not shown in the figure, a hole identical to the hole 356a of the left rail member 356 is formed on the bottom surface of the right rail member 357, and four inlets are formed on the housing of the support portion 352 exposed by the hole. Each inlet is connected to an outlet formed on the front surface of the support portion 352 (i.e., a hole in the exit surface 359b of the light guide member shown in Figure 55). Moreover, a light guide member is provided in the space connecting the inlet and the exit. With the above structure, when the notification LED 67 of the right controller 4 installed on the extended grip 350 is illuminated, the light emitted by the notification LED 67 is emitted from the exit surface 359b through the light guide member.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the incident surface of the light guide member is positioned recessed relative to the bottom surface of the track member (in other words, closer to the left-right center of the support portion 352). This reduces the likelihood of contact between the light guide member and the controller when the controller slider is inserted into the track member of the extended grip 350, allowing for smooth installation of the controller into the extended grip 350.

As described above, according to the above-mentioned extended grip 350, when the notification LED of the controller installed on the extended grip 350 is lit, light is emitted from the emission surface corresponding to the notification LED. Thus, even when the controller is installed on the extended grip 350, information notified by the notification LED can be presented to the user. For example, in the case where the notification LED indicates information such as the number assigned to the controller or the charging status of the controller as described above, this information can be presented to the user even when the controller is installed on the extended grip 350. According to this embodiment, by providing a light-guiding member, information notified by the notification LED of the controller installed on the extended grip 350 can be presented to the user through a simple structure (for example, compared to a method of receiving information related to the notification LED from the controller and controlling its own notification LED based on the received information).

Furthermore, in other embodiments, partitions may be provided between multiple incident ports (in other words, multiple incident surfaces) arranged side by side. This can reduce the possibility that light emitted by a notification LED will be incident on a different incident surface than the corresponding incident surface, and can also reduce the possibility that light will be emitted from an exit surface that does not correspond to the emitting notification LED.

In addition, in other embodiments, the extended grip 350 may also have the following structure: even in the case where the controller has multiple notification LEDs, only one set of incident surface and exit surface is provided for one controller. At this time, when any one of the multiple notification LEDs possessed by the controller is lit, light is emitted from the exit surface of the extended grip 350. Accordingly, although it is impossible to notify which of the multiple notification LEDs possessed by one controller has emitted light, it is possible to notify the user that a certain notification LED has emitted light. It is also conceivable that the above structure is sufficient depending on the content of the information notified to the user by the notification LED.

In other embodiments, the extended grip 350 may also receive information related to the lighting of a notification LED included in the controller (in other words, information notified by the notification LED) from the controller via the aforementioned terminal 367 or 368. In this case, the extended grip 350 may also include a notification unit (e.g., a notification LED), and may use the notification unit to provide notification based on the received information.

(Structure Related to Communication with Main Device 2)

Furthermore, when each controller 3 and 4 is mounted on the extended grip 350, wireless communication is performed between each controller 3 and 4 and the main device 2, similarly to the case where each controller 3 and 4 is mounted on the extended grip 210 shown in FIG52 . In other words, even when mounted on the extended grip 350, each controller 3 and 4 can communicate with the main device 2.

In addition, in other embodiments, the extended grip 350 may also include a communication unit capable of wirelessly communicating with the main device 2. In this case, the extended grip 350 may also obtain operation data from the controllers 3 and 4 installed on it, and send the obtained operation data to the main device 2 via the communication unit.

In addition, the extended grip 350 may also have an operating unit (e.g., buttons and analog joysticks, etc.). Accordingly, the extended grip 350 can make the operations performed using the controller more diverse. In addition, similarly to the case where the extended grip 210 shown in FIG52 has an operating unit, information indicating the operation of the above-mentioned operating unit can be sent to the main device 2 via the controller installed on the extended grip 350. In the case where the extended grip 350 has the above-mentioned communication unit, the above-mentioned information can also be sent directly from the extended grip 350 to the main device 2.

(Structure that enables the support portion to move relative to the main body)

In addition, in other embodiments, in the extended grip 350 shown in FIG54 , the main body 351 may be movable relative to the support portion 352 (this may also be referred to as making the support portion 352 movable relative to the main body 351). FIG58 is a diagram showing an example of the structure of an extended grip with a movable main body. As shown in FIG58 , the main body 351 may also be movable in the up-down direction (i.e., the y-axis direction) relative to the support portion 352. For example, the position where the main body 351 is connected relative to the support portion 352 may be variable.

Specifically, the main body 351 and the support portion 352 may also be connected by a sliding mechanism that can slide in the up and down directions. In this case, the extended grip 350 has a mechanism that stops (in other words, locks) the sliding movement of the support portion 352 at multiple positions (or any positions) within the range of sliding movement. For example, the extended grip 350 may also have the following mechanism: the main body 351 is made slidable relative to the support portion 352 by loosening the screws, and the sliding movement of the main body 351 relative to the support portion 352 is locked by tightening the screws. In addition, for example, one of the main body 351 and the support portion 352 may also have a locking member that can be locked with the other at multiple positions within the range of sliding movement.

In other embodiments, the extended grip 350 may have a structure that allows the main body 351 to be attached to the support 352 at various locations in the vertical direction. For example, the extended grip 350 may have a structure in which screw holes are formed at various locations in the vertical direction on the back of the support 352, and the main body 351 can be attached to the support 352 by threading a screw into any of the screw holes.

As described above, the extended grip 350 may also be configured to allow the vertical distance between the grip portion of the main body 351 and the controller mounted on the support portion 352 to be changed. This allows the distance to be adjusted to a distance appropriate for each user (e.g., a distance corresponding to the size of the user's hand), thereby improving the operability of the extended grip 350.

In addition, in other embodiments, in the extended grip 350 shown in Figure 55, the distance between the grip portion and the controller mounted on the extended grip 350 (in other words, the track member of the extended grip 350) may be variable. Figure 59 is a diagram showing an example of the structure of an extended grip in which the distance between the grip portion and the controller is variable. As shown in Figure 59, in the main body 351, each grip portion 353 and 354 may also be able to move in the left and right direction (i.e., the x-axis direction). That is, the connecting portion 355 may also be connected to each grip portion 353 and 354 in a manner that can move in the left and right direction. In addition, the structure shown in Figure 59 can also be said to be a structure in which the interval between the two left and right grip portions 353 and 354 is variable.

Any mechanism is used to enable the gripping portions 353 and 354 to move. For example, the connecting portion 355 and the gripping portion may be connected by a sliding mechanism that slides in the left-right direction (in other words, the direction in which the interval between the connecting portion and the gripping portion changes).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 59, the left grip 353 may also include a wrist portion 353f, and the right grip 354 may also include a wrist portion 354f. Each wrist portion 353f and 354f is inserted into a hole (not shown) provided on the left and right sides of the connecting portion 355, and is connected so as to be able to slide in the left and right directions relative to the connecting portion 355. In this case, the connecting portion 355 includes a mechanism for stopping (in other words, locking) the sliding movement of the grip portions 353 and 354 at multiple positions (or any position) within the range of sliding movement. Although not shown, the connecting portion 355 may also include a mechanism that allows the grip portion to slide relative to the connecting portion 355 by loosening a screw and stops the sliding movement of the grip portion relative to the connecting portion 355 by tightening the screw. Alternatively, for example, one of the connecting portion 355 and the grip portion may include a locking member that can lock with the other at multiple positions within the range of sliding movement.

In other embodiments, the connection portion 355 may be configured to be extendable in the left-right direction. In other words, the connection portion 355 may have a mechanism that allows its length in the left-right direction to be variable.

As described above, the extended grip 350 may also include a mechanism for changing the distance between the controller mounted on the extended grip 350 and the grip portion (in other words, the distance between the two grip portions 353 and 354). This allows the distance between the controller mounted on the extended grip 350 and the grip portion to be adjusted to an appropriate distance for each user (e.g., a distance corresponding to the size of the user's hand), thereby improving the operability of the extended grip 350.

According to the expansion grip 350 described above, the controllers 3 and 4 can be mounted on the expansion grip 350 for use, similarly to the expansion grip 210 shown in FIG52. Thus, the positional relationship between the two controllers 3 and 4 can be fixed for operation, thereby improving operability when the two controllers 3 and 4 are removed from the main device 2 for use.

Furthermore, the extended grip 350 can also be used as a charging device for the controller. For example, if the controller battery is exhausted while being removed from the main device 2, the user can charge the controller by attaching it to the extended grip 350 connected to an AC adapter or the like at the power terminal 360.

In addition, in addition to the above-mentioned extended grip 350 for the purpose of operating the connected controller, a sliding member identical to the above-mentioned track member (i.e., the left track member 300, etc.) may also be provided in a charging device for the purpose of charging the connected controller. In this case, the charging device may be a structure having one track member or a structure having multiple track members capable of charging multiple controllers simultaneously. In addition, in the charging device, each track member may also be provided in a position that is not symmetrical with respect to the left and right, unlike the above-mentioned main device 2 and the extended grip.

[5-3. Accessories for the main device]

The information processing system may also include an accessory device that can be mounted on the main device 2. An accessory HMD device described below as an example of the accessory device can be used as a so-called HMD (head mounted display) by being mounted on the main device 2.

Figure 60 shows an example of an accessory HMD device that can be attached to the main device 2. The accessory HMD device 230 shown in Figure 60 includes a housing 231 and straps 232a and 232b. One end of strap 232a is attached to one end of the housing 231, and one end of strap 232b is attached to the other end of the housing 231. Although not shown, the other end of strap 232a can be detachably connected to the other end of strap 232b. Thus, with straps 232a and 232b wrapped around the user's head, the housing 231 can be attached to the user's head by connecting the two straps 232a and 232b. The mechanism for attaching the accessory HMD device 230 to the user's head is arbitrary.

As shown in FIG60 , two openings 231 a are formed in the housing 231. The openings 231 a are located opposite the user's eyes when the housing 231 is attached to the user's head. Although not shown, the accessory HMD device 230 includes lenses provided in each opening 231 a.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG60 , the housing 231 is formed with an insertion port 231b into which the main device 2 can be mounted (or, more accurately, inserted). Specifically, by inserting the main device 2 into the insertion port 231b, the main device 2 can be attached to the accessory HMD device 230. Furthermore, when the main device 2 is mounted with the display 12 facing the opening 231a, the display 12 can be visually recognized through the lens through the opening 231a. In other words, the housing 231 supports the display 12 of the main device 2 so that the user can visually recognize it.

With the above configuration, the user can visually perceive the image on the display 12 by attaching the accessory HMD device 230, which is attached to the main device 2, to their head. In other words, the accessory HMD device 230, attached to the main device 2, functions as a so-called head-mounted display device (HMD). Furthermore, the accessory HMD device 230 can magnify the viewing angle of the image on the display 12 through the lenses, providing the user with an image with a wide viewing angle. This can enhance the user's sense of immersion when viewing the image. Furthermore, the main device 2 can also perform a predetermined transformation process on the image displayed on the display 12, ensuring that the appropriate image is visually perceived through the lenses.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the main device 2 is equipped with an acceleration sensor 89 and an angular velocity sensor 90, and can calculate its own motion and/or posture based on the detection results of these sensors. Thus, the main device 2 can calculate the motion and/or posture of the accessory HMD device 230 to which it is attached and perform predetermined processing corresponding to the motion and/or posture. For example, the predetermined processing may include controlling the virtual camera used to generate images displayed on the display 12 based on the motion and/or posture of the accessory HMD device 230. More specifically, it may include changing the viewing direction of the virtual camera in accordance with the posture.

Here, in other embodiments, when the main device 2 does not have sensors for detecting its own motion and/or posture (e.g., an acceleration sensor and/or an angular velocity sensor), the accessory HMD device 230 may be equipped with such sensors. In this case, the accessory HMD device 230 may transmit the detection results of these sensors (or information obtained by applying predetermined processing to the detection results) to the main device 2. The main device 2 calculates the motion and/or posture of the accessory HMD device 230 based on the information transmitted from the accessory HMD device 230.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the controllers 3 and 4 can be used even when detached from the main unit 2. Therefore, the controllers 3 and 4 can be used as operating devices even when the main unit 2 is attached to the accessory HMD device 230. In other words, the user can manually operate the controllers while the accessory HMD device 230, with the main unit 2 attached, is mounted on the user's head.

As described above, the information processing device 1 in this embodiment can also be used as an HMD by using the aforementioned accessory HMD device 230. In this case, in this embodiment, the controller can be removed from the main device 2, thereby reducing the weight of the device mounted on the user's head. Furthermore, the user can operate the device using the removed controller.

[6. Functions, Effects, and Modifications of the Present Embodiment]

In the embodiment described above, the information processing device 1 includes a main device 2, a left controller (also called a first operating device) 3, and a right controller (also called a second operating device) 4. In this way, the information processing device 1 includes multiple devices and can therefore also be called an information processing system. The main device has a display unit (i.e., a display 12). The left controller 3 can be attached and detached relative to the main device 2, and the right controller 4 can be attached and detached relative to the main device 2 (Figure 2). Regardless of whether the left controller 3 is installed on the main device 2, it will send first operation data representing the operation of the left controller 3 to the main device 2. Regardless of whether the right controller 4 is installed on the main device 2, it will send second operation data representing the operation of the right controller 4 to the main device 2. The main device displays the execution result of the prescribed information processing (step S44) based on the first operation data sent from the left controller 3 and the second operation data sent from the right controller 4 on the display unit (step S45). In this way, when the left controller 3 and the right controller 4 are installed on the main device 2, the main device 2 can display images based on the operations of the left controller 3 and the right controller 4 on the display unit (Figure 33). In addition, when the left controller 3 and the right controller 4 are detached from the main device 2, the main device 2 is able to display images based on operations on the left controller 3 and the right controller 4 on the display unit (Figure 34).

As described above, the information processing device 1 can be used in two ways: by attaching each controller 3 and 4 to the main device 2 and by detaching each controller 3 and 4 from the main device. Thus, a single information processing device 1 can be used in a variety of ways, allowing the information processing device 1 to be used in a wider range of scenarios.

In the above content, the "operation-based image" can be an image obtained through operation-based information processing (for example, an image obtained by operating an application used to obtain information from the Internet for browsing), or an image generated through operation-based information processing (for example, a game image generated based on game operations on a game application).

In the above description, the main device 2 only needs to be usable in both the mode in which the left controller 3 and the right controller 4 are mounted on the main device 2 and the mode in which the left controller 3 and the right controller 4 are detached from the main device 2. Under certain conditions, it is not necessary to be able to use both modes. For example, a specific application executed on the main device 2 may only use one of the two modes described above. In other words, the main device 2 may execute an application that can only be used when the left controller 3 and the right controller 4 are mounted on the main device 2, or an application that can only be used when the left controller 3 and the right controller 4 are detached from the main device 2.

In addition, in the above content, the main device 2 may also be configured to include an information processing unit (eg, CPU 81) instead of a display unit.

In addition, the left controller 3 includes a first input unit (e.g., analog stick 32) and a second input unit (e.g., operation buttons 33 to 36). The right controller 4 includes a third input unit (e.g., analog stick 52) of the same type as the first input unit and a fourth input unit (e.g., operation buttons 53 to 56) of the same type as the second input unit.

Furthermore, an "input unit" refers to any unit that outputs information representing a user input and/or outputs information capable of calculating (or inferring) a user input. Examples of input units include buttons, directional input units such as analog joysticks, touch panels, microphones, cameras, and sensors capable of calculating controller movement (e.g., acceleration sensors and angular velocity sensors).

As described above, the left controller 3 and the right controller 4 have two identical input units. Therefore, by using these input units, the user can utilize both controllers equally. For example, if a single user is using a controller, they can perform the same operations regardless of which controller they use, providing great convenience. Alternatively, two users can each use a single controller, further enhancing convenience.

In the above context, "the input units are of the same type" means the following: it is not limited to the case where the two input units are completely identical, but also includes the case where the two input units have the same type of functions and/or uses. For example, if the first input unit is an analog joystick that can be tilted up, down, left, and right, the third input unit can be a sliding joystick that can slide up, down, left, and right, or a cross-pad that can be used for up, down, left, and right input.

In the above embodiment, the input mechanism of the first input unit is substantially the same as the input mechanism of the third input unit (for example, the operation button 33 and the operation button 53, or the analog joystick 32 and the analog joystick 52). Furthermore, the input mechanism of the second input unit is substantially the same as the input mechanism of the fourth input unit. Consequently, the two controllers have two input units that can be operated with the same operational feel. Therefore, users can use both controllers with the same operational feel, which can improve the operability of each controller.

In the above embodiment, the shape of the first input unit is substantially the same as the shape of the third input unit. Furthermore, the shape of the second input unit is substantially the same as the shape of the fourth input unit. Consequently, the two controllers each have two input units that can be operated with the same operational feel. Therefore, the user can use both controllers with the same operational feel, improving the operability of each controller.

In addition, when the left controller 3 and the right controller 4 are detached from the main unit 2, the positional relationship between the first input unit and the second input unit when the left controller 3 is facing a certain direction is the same as the positional relationship between the third input unit and the fourth input unit when the right controller 4 is facing a certain direction. For example, consider the following situation: as shown in Figures 35 and 37, the left side of the left controller 3 is facing the front side of the user, and the right side of the right controller 4 is facing the front side of the user. In this case, the positional relationship between the first input unit (i.e., the analog joystick 32) and the second input unit (i.e., each operation button 33 to 36) is the same as the positional relationship between the third input unit (i.e., the analog joystick 52) and the fourth input unit (i.e., each operation button 53 to 56).

As described above, the user can use the left controller 3 and the right controller 4 with the same operational feel. This improves the operability of the controllers. For example, in the example shown in FIG35 , regardless of which of the two controllers the user uses, the user can operate the analog stick with the left hand and the operation buttons with the right hand.

In addition, when the left controller 3 and the right controller 4 are installed on the main device 2, the positional relationship between the above-mentioned first input part (i.e., the analog joystick 32) and the above-mentioned second input part (i.e., each operation button 33 to 36) is opposite to the positional relationship between the above-mentioned third input part (i.e., the analog joystick 52) and the above-mentioned fourth input part (i.e., each operation button 53 to 56) (refer to Figure 1).

As described above, when each controller 3 and 4 is attached to the main device 2, if the user holds one controller 3 and 4 in each hand, it is easier for the user to operate different input units with the left hand and the right hand. This improves the operability of the information processing device 1 with the controllers attached.

Here, the following structure is assumed: the positional relationship between the first input unit and the second input unit is the same as the positional relationship between the third input unit and the fourth input unit. Consider that in this structure, the user also wants to operate the left and right controllers with the same operating feeling (for example, use the left hand to operate the analog joystick and the right hand to operate the operation button). At this time, when the controller has the same shape as that of the present embodiment (that is, a shape with a rounded side), the controller on one side is held in such a way that the side with the rounded corners is on the upper side, and the controller on the other side is held in such a way that the side with the rounded corners is on the lower side. That is, in the above structure, when holding the controller removed from the main device 2, the direction of the side with the rounded corners is opposite in the controller on one side and the controller on the other side, so there is the following problem: it is difficult for the user to know the appropriate direction to hold the controller.

Furthermore, in the above-described structure, if a sub-button (in the above-described embodiment, the second L button and/or the second R button) is provided on each controller, the following structure is achieved: in one controller (similar to the present embodiment), the sub-button is provided on the side with rounded corners, and in the other controller, the sub-button is provided on the side opposite to the side with rounded corners. However, in this structure, the sub-button of one controller has the following problem: even when the controller is attached to the main device 2, the sub-button is exposed, and there is a concern that the sub-button may be accidentally operated in this state.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, the positional relationship between the first input unit and the second input unit is reversed from the positional relationship between the third input unit and the fourth input unit, thereby suppressing the above-mentioned two problems.

In the above embodiment, the first and third input units are directional input units that accept directional input. More specifically, the directional input units may also include an operating member (e.g., a rocker member) that can be tilted or slid in a predetermined direction. Thus, the user can use the left controller 3 or the right controller 4 to perform directional input.

In the above embodiment, the second input unit and the fourth input unit are buttons that can be pressed. Accordingly, the user can use the left controller 3 or the right controller 4 to perform button input.

In the above embodiment, the controller is integrally mounted on the main unit 2 (see FIG2 ) with a predetermined surface of its housing (e.g., the right side in the case of the left controller 3) facing a predetermined surface of the main unit 2. Thus, when the controller is mounted on the main unit 2, the user can handle the controller and the main unit as a single unit, thereby improving operability.

In the above embodiment, the left controller 3 is mounted on the main device 2 so as to face one of the left and right side surfaces of the main device 2 (specifically, the left side surface). The right controller 4 is mounted on the main device 2 so as to face the other of the left and right side surfaces of the main device 2 (i.e., the right side surface). Thus, the user can operate the two controllers mounted on the main device 2 with both hands, thereby providing an information processing device 1 with good operability.

In addition, the controller includes a light emitting unit (e.g., notification LED 45 in the case of left controller 3) provided on the predetermined surface for notifying the user of predetermined information. Thus, the controller can be used to notify the user of predetermined information (e.g., the status of information processing device 1).

Furthermore, the light-emitting unit may also indicate the status of communication between the main device 2 and the controller. For example, in the above embodiment, the notification LED indicates the number assigned to the controller as a result of communication (more specifically, the number indicated by the aforementioned number information). Furthermore, for example, the notification LED may also indicate the status of wireless communication between the information processing device 1 and the controller. Specifically, the notification LED may indicate whether wireless communication is possible at that point in time or whether pairing has been established.

In addition, the controller includes an operating unit provided on the above-mentioned predetermined surface (for example, in the case of the left controller 3, the second L button 43 and the second R button 44). In addition, the "operating unit" refers to any input unit operated by the user, such as a button or a joystick. As described above, when the controller is removed from the main device 2, more operating units can be used than when the controller is attached to the main device 2. Therefore, even when the controller is removed from the main device 2, it is easy for the user to perform various operations, which can improve the operability of the controller.

In addition, in other embodiments, the main device 2 may also have an operating portion (for example, a button) provided on the installation surface (i.e., the left side or right side of the main device 2) where the left controller 3 or the right controller 4 is installed. In addition, the operating portion may also be a button with a specific function, specifically, a power button, a Home button, or a sleep button. For example, in the above embodiment, the power button 28 may also be provided on the left side or the right side of the main device 2. At this time, when the left controller 3 or the right controller 4 is installed, the power button 28 will not be operated, thereby suppressing user misoperation. In addition, in the case where the operating portion is provided on the side of the main device 2, the operating portion may be provided on the track member or on a portion of the shell other than the track member.

Furthermore, an operating unit having the same function as the above-mentioned operating unit may be provided on the left controller 3 and/or the right controller 4. For example, in other embodiments, a power button having the same function as the power button 28 may be provided on the left controller 3 and/or the right controller 4. In this way, the user can use the functions of the above-mentioned input unit even when the left controller 3 and the right controller 4 are installed.

In addition, in other embodiments, the main device 2 may also have terminals for connecting other devices, which are provided on the installation surface where the left controller 3 or the right controller 4 is installed (i.e., the left side or right side of the main device 2). For example, in the above embodiment, the first groove 23 and/or the second groove 24 (in other words, the terminals provided in the grooves) may also be provided on the left side or right side of the main device 2. Accordingly, when the controller is installed on the main device 2, the terminals can be protected by the controller. In addition, when the groove is provided on the left side or right side of the main device 2, when the controller is installed on the main device 2, the device inserted into the groove (such as a card storage medium) can be prevented from being detached from the main device 2.

In the above embodiment, the connection portion (i.e., the upper left and lower left portions) between the first side surface (i.e., the left side surface) and the adjacent side surfaces (i.e., the upper and lower sides) of the four side surfaces of the left controller 3 is formed into a shape with larger rounded corners than the connection portion (i.e., the upper right and lower right portions) between the second side surface (i.e., the right side surface) and the adjacent side surfaces (i.e., the upper and lower sides), the second side surface being the side surface opposite to the first side surface (see FIG5 ). Furthermore, the connection portion (i.e., the right side surface) between the third side surface (i.e., the right side surface) and the adjacent side surfaces (i.e., the upper and lower sides) of the four side surfaces of the right controller 4 is formed into a shape with larger rounded corners than the connection portion (i.e., the left side surface) and the adjacent side surfaces (i.e., the upper and lower sides), the fourth side surface being the side surface opposite to the third side surface (see FIG6 ). Thus, by making one side of the shape have rounded corners, it is possible for the user to easily determine the direction to hold the controller when it is removed from the main device 2. Furthermore, it is possible to make it easier to hold the controller when it is removed from the main device 2.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the left controller 3 is mounted on the main device 2 (see FIG2 ) in a state where the second side surface of the left controller 3 faces the fifth side surface (i.e., the left side surface) of the four side surfaces of the main device 2. Furthermore, the right controller 4 is mounted on the main device 2 (see FIG2 ) in a state where the fourth side surface of the right controller 4 faces the sixth side surface (i.e., the right side surface) opposite to the fifth side surface of the main device 2.

As described above, when each controller 3 and 4 is installed in the main device 2 (see Figure 1), the external shape of the information processing device 1 is a shape with rounded corners on the left and right ends, making it easy for the user to hold. In addition, the left controller 3 has a shape with a larger rounded corner on the left side than on the right side, while the right controller 4 has a shape with a larger rounded corner on the right side than on the left side (Figures 5 and 6). In this way, the left controller 3 and the right controller 4 have different external shapes, thereby reducing the possibility of the user misplacing the left and right controllers when installing them in the main device 2.

In the above embodiment, the right controller 4 includes an input unit having a first function (in the above embodiment, the + button 57, the Home button 58, and the infrared camera unit 123), and the left controller 3 does not have the first function. In other words, in the above embodiment, the left controller 3 includes one or more input units having a specified number of functions (in the above embodiment, 13, namely, 9 buttons, the analog joystick 32, the acceleration sensor 104, and the angular velocity sensor 105). In contrast, the right controller 4 includes one or more input units having a number of functions different from the above specified number (in the above embodiment, 15, namely, 11 buttons, the analog joystick 52, the acceleration sensor 114, the angular velocity sensor 115, and the infrared camera unit 123). In this way, by making one controller include functions that the other controller does not have, the structure of the controller can be simplified (compared to the case where the two controllers include the same functions).

Furthermore, the “input unit having the first function” may be a camera (eg, infrared camera 123) or a button. The button may also be a button having a specific function (eg, a power button, a home button).

In the above embodiment, the left controller 3 includes an input unit having a second function different from the above first function (in the above embodiment, for example, the analog joystick 32 and the buttons 33 to 38), and the right controller 4 includes an input unit having the second function (in the above embodiment, for example, the analog joystick 52 and the buttons 53 to 56, 60, and 61). Thus, the user can use the second function on both controllers, thereby improving operability, and by omitting the first function on one controller, the controller structure can be simplified.

In the above embodiment, when the controller is installed on the main device 2, the communication between the main device 2 and the controller is performed using a first communication method (specifically, wired communication), and when the controller is separated from the main device 2, the communication between the main device 2 and the controller is performed using a second communication method different from the first communication method (specifically, wireless communication). Accordingly, by changing the communication method between the case where the controller is installed on the main device 2 and the case where the controller is separated from the main device 2, communication can be performed in either case. In addition, when the controller is installed on the main device 2, communication can be easily performed through wired communication, and when the controller is separated from the main device 2, the two can also communicate through wireless communication.

In the above embodiment, the wired communication between the main device and the controller is performed via a wired communication path formed by electrically connecting the first terminal of the main device 2 (specifically, the left terminal 17 or the right terminal 21) and the second terminal of the controller (specifically, the terminal 42 or 64). Thus, in this specification, wired communication refers to communication performed by connecting devices with cables, and refers to communication performed by connecting a terminal (e.g., a connector) of a device on one side to a terminal (e.g., a connector) of a device on the other side.

In the above embodiment, when the controller is mounted on the main device 2, the first terminal of the main device 2 (i.e., the left terminal 17 or the right terminal 21) and the second terminal of the controller (i.e., the terminal 42 or 64) are electrically connected by abutting each other. Accordingly, when the controller is mounted on the main device 2, wired communication and/or power supply can be performed via the connected terminals.

In the above embodiment, when the controller is installed on the main device 2, the above-mentioned first terminal of the main device 2 is electrically connected to the above-mentioned second terminal of the controller, and communication between the main device 2 and the controller and power supply from the main device 2 to the controller are carried out via the above-mentioned first terminal and second terminal. Accordingly, the opportunity to charge the controller can be increased, and the possibility of the controller battery running out can be reduced. In addition, when the user installs the controller on the main device 2 in order to use the information processing device 1 as an integrated portable device, the controller can be charged without the user being aware of it. Therefore, in the above situation, the user does not need to perform the operation of charging the controller separately, thereby saving the user the trouble.

In the above embodiment, the information processing device 1 includes: a first detection unit (e.g., the CPU 81 executing step S3) that detects whether the left controller 3 is installed in the main device 2; and a second detection unit (e.g., the CPU 81 executing step S3) that detects whether the right controller 4 is installed in the main device 2. The main device 2 sets the left and right controllers as a group based on the detection results of the first and second detection units (see step S4). Accordingly, the user can set the group through the following easy-to-understand and simple operation: install the two controllers that they want to use as a group into the main device 2.

In the above embodiment, when both the left controller 3 and the right controller 4 are installed, the main device 2 sets the left controller 3 and the right controller 4 in the installed state to the same group (see steps S3 and S4). Accordingly, the user can set the controller group through an easy-to-understand operation.

In addition, the first detection unit and the second detection unit may or may not simultaneously detect that the controller is installed in the main device 2. In other words, two controllers that are not installed in the main device 2 at the same time may be set as one group.

In addition, the main device 2 can also perform specified information processing based on the operation data received from the two groups of controllers. For example, the main device 2 receives operation data from the left and right controllers set as the first group, and receives operation data from the left and right controllers set as the second group. In addition, the main device 2 treats the operation data received from the controllers set as the first group as one group, and the operation data received from the controllers set as the second group as one group, and performs specified information processing. Based on this, the information processing device can distinguish and utilize the operation data from multiple controllers according to each set group.

In the above embodiment, when the left controller 3 and the right controller 4 are separated from the main device 2 and receive operation data from the left controller 3 and the right controller 4 respectively, which are set as the same group, the main device 2 treats the two received operation data as a group and performs prescribed information processing (see Figure 37 (b)). Accordingly, the user can use the controllers set as a group to perform operations. For example, the user can use a group of controllers to operate a single object.

In the above embodiment, the main device 2 has a shell 11 having a first engaging portion (it can also be said to be a loading and unloading mechanism. Specifically, the left rail component 15) that engages with the shell of the left controller 3 (specifically, the slider 40 provided on the shell 31) and a second engaging portion (specifically, the right rail component 19) that engages with the shell of the right controller 4 (specifically, the slider 62 provided on the shell 51).

In the above description, the first and second engaging portions are used to engage with the housing of the controller (meaning including components provided on the housing), rather than with the connector of the controller. That is, in this embodiment, the main device 2 is configured to enable the controller to be attached and detached from the main device 2 by engaging the engaging portion with the controller, a method different from the method of connecting the controller and the connector to each other (both methods of engaging and connecting the connector may be used simultaneously). This allows the main device 2 to be securely connected to the controller.

In addition, in other embodiments, the main device 2 may have only one engaging portion that engages with the housing of the controller, or may have three or more engaging portions.

In the above embodiment, the left controller 3 includes a housing 31 having a third engaging portion (specifically, a slider 40) formed thereon that engages with the first engaging portion of the main device 2. The right controller 4 includes a housing 51 having a fourth engaging portion (specifically, a slider 62) formed thereon that engages with the second engaging portion of the main device 2. Thus, a member that engages with the engaging portion on the main device 2 side is also provided on the controller side, thereby enabling a more secure connection between the main device 2 and the controller.

In the above embodiment, the main device 2 selectively outputs the results of information processing to either the display unit (display 12) or a display device (television 6) independent of the main device 2 (see FIG44 ). This enables two utilization modes: displaying images on the display unit of the main device 2 and displaying images on a display device independent of the main device 2.

In the above embodiment, the engaging portion of the main device 2 is a track member (also referred to as a first sliding member) provided along the surface of the housing 11 of the main device 2. In addition, the controller is provided with a slider (also referred to as a second sliding member) that engages with the track member in a manner that is slidable and removable relative to the track member. In the above embodiment, the track member and the slider form a sliding mechanism (refer to FIG7 ). Accordingly, the main device 2 and the controller can be firmly fixed by the sliding mechanism, and the controller can be easily loaded and unloaded.

In the above embodiment, the track member is formed so as to engage the slider so as to be slidable in a predetermined direction (specifically, the y-axis direction shown in FIG1 ), and the slider can be inserted and removed from one end of the predetermined direction (see FIG2 ). As a result, the controller can be easily attached and detached from the main device 2 from the aforementioned end.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the track member is provided along the vertical direction of the main device 2, and is formed so that the slider can be inserted and removed from its upper end (see FIG2 ). This allows the controller to be attached and detached from the main device 2 while the main device 2 is placed upright, thereby improving convenience. For example, in this embodiment, the controller can also be attached and detached from the main device 2 while the main device 2 is mounted on the bracket 5.

In the above embodiment, the sliding member provided on the main device 2 is provided substantially over the entire surface of the housing 11 of the main device 2 in a predetermined direction (specifically, the vertical direction) (for example, the length of the sliding member accounts for at least 80% of the length of the housing 11 of the main device 2) (see FIG3 ). Thus, when the controller is mounted on the main device 2, the controller is connected substantially over the entire surface of the main device 2, thereby enabling the controller to be securely connected to the main device 2.

In the above embodiment, the first sliding member (i.e., track member) of the main device 2 has a concave cross-sectional shape, and the second sliding member (i.e., slider) of the controller has a convex cross-sectional shape. In other embodiments, the first sliding member of the main device 2 may have a convex cross-sectional shape, and the second sliding member of the controller may have a concave cross-sectional shape.

In the above embodiment, the controller includes terminals (e.g., terminals 42 or 64) for communicating with the main device 2. The main device 2 includes terminals (i.e., left terminal 17 or right terminal 21) on the housing 11 at locations where the terminals of the controller can be connected when the controller is installed. Thus, when the controller is installed on the main device 2, the terminals are connected, enabling wired communication.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the information processing device 1 can be said to be a game system capable of executing game applications. Here, at least when the left controller 3 and the right controller 4 are detached from the main device 2 (in other words, when both controllers are detached from the main device 2), the left controller 3 and the right controller 4 transmit operation data indicating the operation performed on the left controller 3 and the right controller 4, respectively, to the main device 2 via wireless communication. Thus, in the above-described embodiment, a new game system capable of being used with the two controllers detached can be provided.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the information processing device 1 can be said to be the following handheld information processing device, which includes a main body (i.e., main device 2) having a display unit (i.e., display 12), a first operating unit (i.e., left controller 3) and a second operating unit (i.e., right controller 4), and performs prescribed information processing based on an operation on either the first operating unit or the second operating unit. Here, when the first operating unit and the second operating unit are detached from the main body, the main device 2 performs prescribed information processing based on at least the operation data representing the operation on either the first operating unit and the second operating unit, and causes the display unit to display the result of the information processing. In this way, in the above-mentioned embodiment, a new information processing device that can be used in a state where the two operating units are removed can be provided.

In the above description, the first and second operating units are configured so that, when the first and second operating units are attached to the main body, the user (i.e., the user holding the information processing device) can operate the first operating unit with one hand and the second operating unit with the other hand (see FIG33 ). This provides a new information processing device that can be used in both a method of attaching the operating unit to the main body and a method of detaching the operating unit from the main body.

In addition, the information processing system in this embodiment includes a main device 2 and a controller that can be loaded and unloaded relative to the main device 2 (specifically, a left controller 3 and a right controller 4. Also referred to as an operating device). The main device 2 has a display 12 (also referred to as a display unit). When the controller is installed on the main device 2, the main device 2 can display an image based on the operation of the controller on the display 12. In addition, when the controller is detached from the main device 2, the main device 2 can display an image based on the operation of the controller on an external display device (specifically, a television 6) that is independent of the main device 2. In addition, in the above content, the controller that can be loaded and unloaded relative to the main device can be either one or multiple.

As described above, information processing device 1 can be used in two ways: by attaching the controller to main device 2 and by detaching the controller from the main device. This allows multiple usage modes to be achieved with a single information processing device 1, allowing it to be used in a wider range of scenarios. Furthermore, as described above, when the controller is detached from main device 2, an external display device can be used as a display device. Therefore, for example, by pre-preparing a display device with a larger screen size than display 12 as an external display device, the user can display images on a larger screen.

In the above embodiment, the information processing system further includes a cradle 5 (also referred to as an attachment) capable of communicating with a television 6 and capable of being attached and detached from the main device 2. The main device 2 detects whether it has been attached to the cradle 5 and, based at least on the detection result, determines whether to display an image based on an operation of a controller on the display 12 or on the television 6 (steps S21, S25, and S29). As described above, the main device 2 can determine the image display destination based on whether it is attached to the cradle 5.

In the above description, the method for determining the display destination of an image is arbitrary. As in the above embodiment, the main device 2 may determine the display destination as the television 6, at least on the condition that the main device 2 is mounted on the bracket 5. Furthermore, in other embodiments, the main device 2 may determine the display destination as the television 6 when the main device 2 is mounted on the bracket 5. In other words, the main device 2 may output images to the television 6 via the bracket 5 based on the main device 2 being mounted on the bracket 5.

In other embodiments, the main device 2 may be able to communicate directly with the television 6. For example, the main device 2 may be able to communicate wirelessly with the television 6. In this case, as in the above embodiment, the main device 2 may determine the image display destination based on the state of the main device 2 attached to the cradle 5.

The additional device (eg, a cradle) may be any additional device that can be attached to and detached from the main device 2. The additional device may or may not have a function of charging the main device 2 as in the present embodiment.

In the above embodiment, cradle 5 is capable of communicating with main device 2 at least as long as it is attached to the cradle. When main device 2 determines to display an image based on an operation of a controller on television 6, it outputs the image to television 6 via cradle 5. As described above, main device 2 can display the image on television 6 by outputting the image to television 6 via cradle 5. This eliminates the need for main device 2 to communicate with television 6, simplifying the structure of main device 2.

In addition, the information processing system in the above embodiment includes a main device 2, a left controller 3 (also called a first operating device), a right controller 4 (also called a second operating device) and an accessory device (for example, an extended grip 210 or an accessory 220). The left controller 3 can be loaded and unloaded relative to the main device 2, and can be loaded and unloaded relative to the accessory device. The right controller 4 can be loaded and unloaded relative to the main device 2, and can be loaded and unloaded relative to the accessory device. The main device 2 has a display 12 (also called a display unit), which displays the execution results of the prescribed information processing based on the operation of the left controller 3 and the right controller 4 on the display 12. The accessory device can be installed with the left controller 3 and the right controller 4 at the same time (refer to Figure 52). According to the above, the user can hold the two controllers 3 and 4 separated from the main device 2 as a whole by using the accessory device. That is, the operability of the controller when separated from the main device 2 can be improved.

In the above embodiment, the left controller 3 is mounted to the left of the center of the accessory device, and the right controller 4 is mounted to the right of the center of the accessory device (see Figures 52 and 53). This allows the user to operate the left controller 3 mounted on the accessory device with their left hand, and the right controller 4 mounted on the accessory device with their right hand. This allows the user to perform the same operations as when the controller is not mounted on the accessory device, thus providing an accessory device with excellent operability.

In the above embodiment, the accessory device includes a first grip portion (i.e., left grip portion 212) provided on the left side and a second grip portion (i.e., right grip portion 213) provided on the right side. Thus, the user can operate each controller by holding each grip portion with either hand, thereby providing an accessory device with good operability.

In the above embodiment, the first grip is located to the left of the portion where the left controller 3 is mounted. Furthermore, the second grip is located to the right of the portion where the right controller 4 is mounted (see FIG52 ). Thus, the user can easily operate the controllers 3 and 4 mounted on the accessory device by grasping each grip.

(Effects related to controller terminals, etc.)

In the embodiment described above, the game controller (e.g., the left controller 3 or the right controller 4) can be installed on a main device (e.g., the main device 2), which can perform game processing and has a main device side sliding component (e.g., the left rail component 300).

Game controllers have:

An operating unit (e.g., analog joysticks 32 and 52, buttons 33 to 39, 43, 44, 46, 47, 53 to 61, 65, 66, and 69); and

The controller side sliding member (for example, sliders 311, 331) is configured to protrude from a specified surface of the game controller and can engage with the main device side sliding member in a manner such that it can slide along a specified sliding direction (for example, the up and down direction shown in Figure 14, i.e., the y-axis direction) relative to the main device side sliding member.

By inserting the controller side sliding member relative to the main device side sliding member from at least one of one end and the other end of the controller side sliding member in the sliding direction (for example, the lower end of the slider 311 shown in Figure 14, that is, the end on the negative side of the y-axis), the game controller can be installed on the main device.

The controller side sliding member has:

a protrusion (e.g., protrusion 321) provided to protrude in the sliding direction from one end side of the controller-side sliding member and having a facing surface (e.g., facing surface 321a) facing a predetermined surface of the game controller (e.g., the right side surface of the left controller 3 or the left side surface of the right controller 4); and

At least one terminal (for example, terminals 42 and 64) is provided between the facing surface and the predetermined surface and can be electrically connected to the main device.

As described above, the game controller can be easily installed on the main device via the sliding mechanism, thereby providing a highly convenient game controller. In this case, the user can also connect the terminals by inserting and sliding the controller-side sliding member relative to the main device-side sliding member. This makes installation operations, including connecting the terminals, easy for the user. Furthermore, the controller-side sliding member includes a protrusion, which reduces the possibility of the terminals coming into contact with the user's hand or other objects, thereby ensuring that the terminals are always protected.

Here, the "sliding member" may be either the track member in the above-mentioned embodiment or a slider. In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, in order to easily distinguish the sliding member provided on the main device 2 side from the sliding member provided on the controller side, the former is referred to as a "track member" and the latter is referred to as a "slider". Here, the shapes of the track member and the slider are not limited to those in the above-mentioned embodiment. For example, a sliding member having a cross-sectional shape as shown in FIG11 can also be referred to as a "slider", and a sliding member having a T-shaped cross-sectional shape as shown in FIG22 can also be referred to as a "track member".

Furthermore, the sliding member is not limited to a member having a shape that is long in the sliding direction, such as the track member or slider in the above-mentioned embodiment. FIG61 is a diagram showing another example of a sliding member provided in the main device. The main device 2 may also include a sliding member 371 shown in FIG61 in place of the track member in the above-mentioned embodiment.

As shown in Figure 61, the sliding member 371 has an upper sliding member 371a provided on the upper portion of the left side of the main device 2 and a lower sliding member 371b provided on the lower portion of the left side of the main device 2. Each sliding member 371a and 371b has the same bottom surface, side surface, and top surface as the above-mentioned left rail member 300. Therefore, by inserting the slider 311 of the left controller 3 into the groove formed by the bottom surface and side surface of each sliding member 371a and 371b, each sliding member 371a and 371b engages the slider 311 in a slidable manner. In addition, when the slider 311 is inserted into the groove of each sliding member 371a and 371b, the slider 311 is fixed in a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction by the top surface and will not disengage. In addition, the lower sliding member 371b has the same facing portion as the above-mentioned left rail member 300. Therefore, when the slider 311 is inserted into the grooves of the sliding members 371a and 371b, the slider 311 can slide until it contacts the opposing portions, at which point the sliding movement stops. Thus, the sliding member 371 shown in FIG61 can also slidably engage the slider 311 of the left controller 3, similar to the left rail member 300 described above.

62 is a diagram showing another example of a sliding member provided in the right controller 4. The right controller 4 may include a sliding member 373 shown in FIG62 instead of the slider 331 in the above embodiment.

As shown in Figure 62, the sliding member 373 has an upper sliding member 373a provided on the upper part of the left side of the right controller 4 and a lower sliding member 373b provided on the lower part of the left side of the right controller 4. Each sliding member 373a and 373b has the same shaft and top surface as the above-mentioned slider 331. Therefore, each sliding member 373a and 373b is inserted into the right track member of the main device 2 to engage with the right track member in a slidable manner. In addition, when each sliding member 373a and 373b is inserted into the groove portion of the right track member, each sliding member 373a and 373b is fixed in a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction by the top surface and will not disengage. In this way, the sliding member 373 shown in Figure 62 can also be engaged with the right track member of the main device 2 in a slidable manner, similar to the above-mentioned slider 331.

As described above, the sliding member does not need to be composed of a single member extending along the sliding direction, but may also be composed of a plurality of members arranged along the sliding direction. In addition, when the sliding member is composed of a plurality of members, the upper end of the sliding member refers to the upper end of the member arranged at the uppermost side among the plurality of members, and the lower end of the sliding member refers to the lower end of the member arranged at the lowermost side among the plurality of members. In addition, in the above-mentioned case, the center of the sliding member in a prescribed direction is a position exactly in the middle relative to the positions of the two ends of the sliding member composed of a plurality of members in the prescribed direction. For example, the center of the sliding member in the up-down direction is a position exactly in the middle between the position of the upper end of the member arranged at the uppermost side and the position of the lower end of the member arranged at the lowermost side among the plurality of members.

In addition, the sliding member may also be formed as one piece with the housing of the device in which the sliding member is provided (for example, the main device 2 or the controller). For example, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the bottom surface of the sliding member is independent of the housing of the device in which the sliding member is provided, but in other embodiments, the housing of the device in which the sliding member is provided may be the bottom surface of the sliding member. For example, in the main device 2, the side surface portion 302 of the above-mentioned track member may also be provided directly on the side surface of the housing 11 of the main device 2. And in this case, the side surface portion may also be formed as one piece with the housing 11. In addition, in other embodiments, the bottom surface of the sliding member may also be formed by the side surface of the housing and the bottom surface portion of the track member. For example, in the extended grip 350 (Figure 54) in the above-mentioned embodiment, the bottom surface of the sliding member is formed by the bottom surface portion of the left track member 356 and the housing (of the support portion 352) exposed from the hole 356a formed in the bottom surface portion (refer to Figure 55).

In addition, as long as at least a portion of the terminal is arranged between the opposing surface and the prescribed surface, it is not limited to the form of being arranged on the opposing surface as in the above-mentioned embodiment. Figure 63 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the terminal in other embodiments. In other embodiments, the configuration of the terminal 42 shown in Figure 15 can also be replaced with the configuration shown in Figure 63 to set the terminal 42. In Figure 63, the terminal 42 is arranged at a position separated from the opposing surface in the left-right direction (i.e., the x-axis direction). In Figure 63, the surface of the terminal 42 facing the prescribed surface (similar to the above-mentioned embodiment) contacts the left terminal 17. Here, the position of the left terminal 17 of the main device 2 is adjusted to a position corresponding to the configuration of the terminal 42 shown in Figure 63. That is, in Figure 63, the configuration position of the terminal 42 is moved to the positive direction side of the x-axis compared to the position of the terminal 42 shown in Figure 15, and therefore, corresponding to this movement, the configuration position of the left terminal 17 of the main device 2 is moved to the positive direction side of the x-axis compared to the position shown in Figure 12. In other embodiments, the terminal 42 may be in contact with the left terminal 17 with its surface facing the facing surface 321a. In FIG63 , the facing surface 321a may or may not have the slit 321b.

In addition, as in the above embodiment and the example shown in FIG63 , at least a portion of the surface (of the terminal) facing the above-mentioned prescribed surface of the controller may be disposed between the opposing surface and the prescribed surface (in this case, the surface of the terminal facing the opposing surface may be disposed between the opposing surface and the prescribed surface, or may be disposed inside the protruding portion). Accordingly, the possibility of the surface of the terminal contacting other terminals contacting the user's hand or other objects can be reduced by the protruding portion, thereby effectively protecting the terminal.

In the above embodiment, the terminals are provided on the facing surfaces. Thus, the terminals are arranged closer to the facing surfaces, thereby enabling more effective protection of the terminals. In addition, in the above embodiment, the terminals extend along the facing surfaces.

In the above embodiment, the terminal is arranged so that at least a portion of the terminal is located within the slit provided in the facing surface. This can reduce the force applied to the terminal when the terminal contacts another terminal.

In the above embodiment, at least one side of the terminal facing the predetermined surface is exposed. This allows the surface of the terminal facing the predetermined surface to contact other terminals (for example, the left terminal 17 or the right terminal 21 of the main device 2).

In the above embodiment, the protrusion has a wall portion (e.g., wall portion 322) on one or both sides of the facing surface in a direction substantially perpendicular to the sliding direction of the terminal (e.g., the z-axis direction shown in FIG15 ) that is arranged to protrude from the facing surface toward a predetermined surface. Accordingly, the wall portion can reduce the possibility of the terminal coming into contact with a user's hand or other objects, thereby more reliably protecting the terminal.

In the above-mentioned embodiment, the inner wall toward one side of the terminal in the wall portion is configured to go toward the top of the protrusion and widen in a direction away from the terminal (Figure 16). Accordingly, the position alignment of the main device and the game controller can be carried out by the above-mentioned inner wall, and the terminal of the main device and the terminal of the game controller can be easily correctly contacted.

In the above embodiment, the terminal is arranged so that the top end of the terminal is located closer to the center of the controller-side sliding member in the sliding direction than the top end of the protrusion (for example, the top end of the top end portion 323 shown in Figure 15) (Figures 15 and 16). Accordingly, a gap is provided between the top end of the protrusion and the top end of the terminal, thereby further reducing the possibility of the terminal contacting the user's hand or other objects, thereby more reliably protecting the terminal.

In the above embodiment, the end portion of the protrusion in the sliding direction (for example, the end portion on the negative side of the y-axis shown in FIG15 , in other words, the top portion 323) has a shape that becomes thinner toward the top of the protrusion ( FIG15 ). Accordingly, the position of the main device and the game controller can be aligned by the end portion, making it easier to correctly contact the terminals of the main device and the terminals of the game controller.

In the above embodiment, the end portion of the protrusion in the sliding direction has a surface that is inclined so as to move away from the predetermined surface as it moves toward the top end of the protrusion (for example, the inclined surface 323a shown in Figure 15). Accordingly, the position of the main device and the game controller can be aligned by the end portion, making it easier to correctly contact the terminals of the main device and the terminals of the game controller.

Furthermore, the boundary between the inclined surface and the facing surface may be chamfered. This allows for smooth alignment of the terminals of the main device and the terminals of the game controller.

In the above embodiment, a plurality of (e.g., ten) terminals are provided between the facing surface and the predetermined surface. The plurality of terminals are arranged side by side in a direction substantially parallel to the facing surface and perpendicular to the sliding direction (e.g., the z-axis direction shown in FIG16 ), with the terminals exposed on the same side as one end of the controller-side sliding member (e.g., the negative y-axis side shown in FIG16 ). This facilitates contact between the terminals of the game controller and the terminals of the main device moving from the aforementioned one end.

In the above embodiment, the operating unit is provided on the front face of the game controller (for example, the surface on the negative z-axis side shown in FIG14 ). The above-mentioned predetermined surface is a side face relative to the front face (for example, the right side face of the left controller 3 or the left side face of the right controller 4). Accordingly, the user can easily operate the operating unit provided on the front face of the game controller while the game controller is mounted on the main device.

In the above embodiment, the controller-side sliding member is a rail member extending substantially parallel to the sliding direction (e.g., slider 311 shown in FIG. 14 or slider 331 shown in FIG. 25 ). Accordingly, the game controller can be easily mounted on the main device by inserting the rail member into the main device-side sliding member.

In the above embodiment, the track member is formed from near one end of the predetermined surface (e.g., the upper end of the left controller 3 shown in FIG14 ) to near the other end (e.g., the lower end of the left controller 3 shown in FIG14 ) in the sliding direction. Thus, the game controller can be securely connected to the main device, thereby reducing the possibility of the game controller being detached from the main device.

In the above embodiment, the controller-side sliding member has a cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the sliding direction, wherein the width of a first portion protruding from a predetermined surface (e.g., the length of the shaft portion 325 in the z-axis direction shown in FIG21 ) is shorter than the width of a second portion (e.g., the length of the top surface portion 326 in the z-axis direction shown in FIG21 ), the second portion being located further from the predetermined surface than the first portion. This reduces the possibility of the controller-side sliding member detaching from the main device-side sliding member in a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction.

In the above embodiment, no protrusion that protrudes in the sliding direction is provided on the other end of the controller-side sliding member (e.g., the upper end of the slider 331 shown in FIG14 , i.e., the end on the positive side of the y-axis). Therefore, even when the controller-side sliding member is inserted into the main device-side sliding member from the other end, the possibility of the controller-side sliding member contacting and damaging components of the main device (e.g., terminals, etc.) can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the end surface of the other end of the controller-side sliding member is formed into a flat surface. Thus, even when the controller-side sliding member is inserted into the main device-side sliding member from the other end, the possibility of the controller-side sliding member contacting and damaging components of the main device (e.g., terminals, etc.) can be reduced.

In the above-described embodiment, the game controller includes a locking member (e.g., locking member 319 or 339) that, when the controller-side sliding member is inserted into a predetermined position relative to the main device-side sliding member (e.g., the aforementioned mounted state), locks the sliding movement of the controller-side sliding member relative to the main device-side sliding member, wherein the sliding movement is the sliding movement of the controller-side sliding member in a direction opposite to the direction in which the controller-side sliding member was inserted relative to the main device-side sliding member. Thus, the locking member can reduce the possibility of the controller-side sliding member being detached from the main device-side sliding member.

In the above-described embodiment, the game controller includes a locking member (e.g., locking member 319 or 339) that can be locked with the main device-side sliding member when the controller-side sliding member is inserted into a predetermined position relative to the main device-side sliding member (e.g., the aforementioned installed state). The locking member is configured to protrude from the controller-side sliding member in a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction and parallel to a predetermined surface (e.g., the z-axis direction shown in FIG. 21 ). Thus, the locking member can reduce the possibility of the controller-side sliding member detaching from the main device-side sliding member.

In the above embodiment, the locking member is disposed at a portion of the controller-side sliding member that is closer to the other end (e.g., the upper end, i.e., the positive y-axis side, as shown in FIG14 ) than the center of the controller-side sliding member in the sliding direction. Consequently, unless the controller-side sliding member is inserted to a certain extent relative to the main device-side sliding member, the locking member will not contact the main device, thereby making it difficult for the locking member to contact the main device. In other words, this facilitates smooth movement of the controller-side sliding member relative to the main device-side sliding member.

In the above embodiment, the locking member is arranged to protrude from a predetermined surface of the game controller (see FIG22 ) or from a side surface of the controller-side sliding member that is substantially perpendicular to the predetermined surface (see FIG21 ). This reduces the possibility of the locking member coming into contact with other objects and being damaged.

In the above embodiment, the terminals are provided on the facing surfaces (see Figures 15 and 16). Furthermore, the portion of the protruding portion on the back side of the facing surface, at least the portion on the back side of the portion of the facing surface where the terminals are provided, is formed of a metal member (e.g., reinforcing member 312 or 332), while the other portion, other than the metal member, is formed of a resin member. This increases the strength of the protruding portion (specifically, the portion where the terminals are provided).

In the above embodiment, the game controller further includes an insulator (e.g., insulating sheet 316) disposed between the terminal and the metal member. This reduces the possibility of the terminal being electrically adversely affected by the metal member, thereby improving the accuracy of communication between the game controller and the main device.

In the above embodiment, the game controller further includes a waterproof member (eg, insulating sheet 316) provided between the terminal and the metal member, thereby reducing the possibility of water adhering to the terminal and causing the terminal to deteriorate (ie, rust).

In the above embodiment, the game controller also includes an electronic circuit (e.g., electronic circuit 318) having a ground portion (e.g., ground connection plate portion 318b). The terminal is a ground terminal and is electrically connected to the ground portion. The metal component has a ground connection portion (e.g., ground connection portion 312d) electrically connected to the ground portion. Accordingly, the possibility of the metal component being charged can be reduced, and thus the possibility of the terminal being adversely affected by the electrical properties caused by the metal component can be reduced. As a result, the accuracy of communication between the game controller and the main device can be improved.

In the above embodiment, the predetermined surface is one of the side surfaces of the game controller (e.g., the right side surface of the left controller 3 or the left side surface of the right controller 4). Furthermore, the operation unit includes a first input unit (e.g., the first L button 38, the ZL button 39, the first R button 60, or the ZR button 61), which is provided on the side surface of the game controller that is on the same side as the other end side in the sliding direction (e.g., the upper end side as shown in FIG. 14 , i.e., the positive y-axis side). Thus, when the user holds the game controller using an index finger to operate the first input unit (e.g., the holding method shown in FIG. 33 ), the game controller can be easily attached to the main device.

In the above embodiment, the main device includes a display unit (e.g., display 12). A main device-side sliding member is provided on at least one of the left and right side surfaces relative to the surface on which the display unit is provided (e.g., the front surface of the main device 2) (see FIG3 ). The controller-side sliding member can be inserted into the main device-side sliding member from above (see FIG2 ). This allows the game controller to be attached and detached while the main device is mounted, thereby improving the convenience of the information processing device including the main device and the game controller.

In the above embodiment, the operating unit includes a directional input unit (e.g., analog joystick 32 or 52) capable of inputting at least four directions: up, down, left, and right. Thus, the game controller includes a directional input unit capable of easily performing directional input, thereby improving the input function of the information processing device.

In the above embodiment, the directional input unit outputs a two-dimensional value representing the direction and amount of input (for example, the direction and magnitude corresponding to the tilting direction and tilting amount of a joystick member included in an analog joystick). Thus, the game controller includes a directional input unit capable of detailed directional input, thereby enhancing the input function of the information processing device.

In the above embodiment, the directional input unit is an input device having an input member (e.g., a joystick member analogous to a joystick) that can tilt or slide in at least four directions: up, down, left, and right from a reference state. Thus, the game controller includes a directional input unit that facilitates directional input, thereby enhancing the input functionality of the information processing device.

In the above embodiment, the main device includes a display unit (e.g., display 12). The operation unit includes an image save input unit (e.g., record button 37) for inputting an instruction to save an image displayed on the display unit of the main device. Thus, the game controller has the function of accepting input instructions to save images, thereby improving the convenience of the information processing device.

In the above embodiment, the game controller includes an infrared camera (eg, infrared camera unit 123 ), thereby providing the game controller with an imaging function, thereby improving the convenience of the information processing device.

In the above embodiment, the operating unit includes a second input unit (e.g., a second L button 43 or 65, a second R button 44 or 66), and the second input unit is provided on a surface (e.g., a mounting surface) of the controller side sliding member that faces the same direction as the prescribed surface. Accordingly, the second input unit can be operated when the game controller is removed from the main device, thereby improving the convenience of the information processing device. In addition, by providing an input unit that is not used when the game controller is installed in the main device at a position that cannot be operated when the game controller is installed in the main device, the configuration space in the game controller can be used efficiently, thereby enabling the input unit to be efficiently configured in the game controller.

(Effects related to the locking member of the controller)

In the embodiment described above, the game controller (e.g., the left controller 3 or the right controller 4) can be installed on a main device (e.g., the main device 2), which can perform game processing and has a main device side sliding component (e.g., the left rail component 300).

Game controllers have:

An operating unit (e.g., analog joysticks 32 and 52, buttons 33 to 39, 43, 44, 46, 47, 53 to 61, 65, 66, and 69); and

The controller side sliding member (for example, sliders 311, 331) is configured to protrude from a specified surface of the game controller and can engage with the main device side sliding member in a manner that allows it to slide along a specified sliding direction (for example, the up and down direction shown in Figure 14, i.e., the y-axis direction).

By inserting the controller side sliding member relative to the main device side sliding member from at least one of one end and the other end of the controller side sliding member in the sliding direction (for example, the lower end of the slider 311 shown in Figure 14, that is, the end on the negative side of the y-axis), the game controller can be installed on the main device.

The game controller has a locking component (for example, locking component 319 or 339), which locks the sliding movement of the controller side sliding component relative to the main device side sliding component, and the sliding movement is the sliding movement of the controller side sliding component in a direction opposite to the direction of insertion relative to the main device side sliding component.

The locking member is configured to be able to protrude from the above-mentioned specified surface of the game controller (refer to Figure 22) or from the side surface of the controller side sliding member which is a surface substantially perpendicular to the specified surface (refer to Figure 21), and is provided at a portion closer to the other end side than the center of the controller side sliding member in the sliding direction (for example, the upper portion of the slider 311 shown in Figure 14).

According to the above, the possibility of the controller-side sliding member detaching from the main device-side sliding member can be reduced by the locking member. In addition, the locking member is configured to protrude from the above-mentioned specified surface or the above-mentioned side of the controller-side sliding member, thereby reducing the possibility of the locking member being damaged by contact with other objects. Moreover, the locking member is arranged in a portion closer to the above-mentioned other end side than the center of the controller-side sliding member in the sliding direction, thereby making it difficult for the locking member to contact the main device. In other words, it is easy for the controller-side sliding member to move smoothly relative to the main device-side sliding member.

Furthermore, the phrase "the locking member is configured to protrude from a certain surface" encompasses two states: a first state in which the locking member protrudes from a certain surface (specifically, the protruding state described above) and a second state in which the locking member always protrudes from a certain surface (specifically, the retracted state described above). The second state includes, for example, a state in which the locking member is capable of moving between (a) the protruding state described above and (b) a state in which the locking member protrudes from the certain surface but is closer to the certain surface than in the protruding state (in other words, a state in which the locking portion is not completely retracted).

In the above embodiment, the locking member is movable between a first position (for example, the position shown in (a) of FIG. 21 ) and a second position (for example, the position shown in (b) of FIG. 21 ). The locking member located at the first position protrudes from at least one of the above-mentioned prescribed surfaces of the game controller and the side surfaces of the controller-side sliding member, compared to the state in which the locking member is located in the second position. Force is applied to the locking member in such a manner that the locking member becomes in a protruding state located in the first position. Accordingly, when the controller-side sliding member is inserted into the main device-side sliding member, the locking member is located in the second position according to the situation, thereby enabling the controller-side sliding member to be smoothly inserted. In addition, by making the locking member movable, the possibility of the locking member being damaged by contact with other objects can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the locking member can be moved to the second position, a position in which it is stored within the game controller ( FIG. 21( b )). Thus, with the locking member in the stored position, the controller-side sliding member can be more smoothly inserted into the main device-side sliding member. Furthermore, with the locking member in the stored position, the possibility of damage from contact with other objects can be further reduced.

In the above embodiment, the game controller includes a movable member (e.g., release button 313 or 333) that can be moved by user operation. This movable member causes the locking member to move from a first position to a second position in response to user operation. Thus, the locking state achieved by the locking member can be released or released by user operation. This allows the user to easily remove the game controller from the main device.

In the above embodiment, a force is applied to the movable member so that the movable member is arranged in a predetermined reference position (for example, the state shown in FIG. 27 (a)), and the movable member can be moved from the reference position by a user's operation. The locking member is connected to the movable member, and when the movable member is arranged in the reference position, the locking member is located in the first position, and when the movable member moves from the reference position, the locking member is located in the second position. Accordingly, the position of the movable member changes depending on whether the locking member is in the first position or the second position, so that the user can identify the state of the locking member (i.e., whether it is in the first position or the second position) based on the position of the movable member.

In the above embodiment, at least a portion of the end portion of the locking member on one side in the sliding direction (for example, the end portion having the inclined surface 319a shown in FIG. 23 ) is formed so that the thickness thereof decreases toward the top end in the direction of movement from the first position to the second position. This prevents the locking member 319 from becoming stuck in the main device when the controller-side sliding member is inserted into the main device-side sliding member. This allows for smoother insertion of the controller-side sliding member relative to the main device-side sliding member.

In the above embodiment, the movable member is provided on the back side of the front surface (of the game controller) (see FIG14 ). Thus, a user can easily operate the movable member while holding the information processing device with the game controller attached to the main unit. This makes it possible to provide an information processing device with easy-to-operate movable members and high convenience.

Furthermore, in other embodiments, the movable member may be provided on the front surface (of the game controller). This allows the user to visually identify the movable member while holding the information processing device with the game controller attached to the main unit. This allows for a highly convenient information processing device with easy-to-operate movable members.

Furthermore, in other embodiments, the movable member may be provided on both the front surface (of the game controller) and the back surface of the front surface.

In the above-described embodiment, the game controller includes a protrusion (e.g., protrusion 314 or 334 and/or ZL button 39 or ZR button 61) disposed around the movable member and formed to protrude relative to the surface on which the movable member is disposed. This protrusion can thereby reduce the possibility of misoperation of the movable member. This can reduce the possibility of the locking member being released due to misoperation of the movable member, resulting in the game controller being detached from the main device.

As in the above embodiment, the protrusion may be a button (ie, the ZL button 39 or the ZR button 61 ).

In the above embodiment, the game controller includes a recess (e.g., recess H shown in FIG21 ), wherein the cross-sectional shape of the recess perpendicular to the sliding direction is concave due to the predetermined surface and the controller-side sliding member. In the protruding state, the locking member protrudes from at least one of the surfaces forming the recess ( FIG21 or FIG22 ). This reduces the possibility of the locking member being damaged by contact with other objects.

In the above embodiment, the locking member is arranged so as not to protrude outside the space in the recess in the protruding state ( FIG. 21 or FIG. 22 ). This can further reduce the possibility of the locking member coming into contact with other objects and being damaged.

In the above embodiment, the locking member is configured to protrude from the controller side sliding member in a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction and parallel to the predetermined surface (e.g., the z-axis direction shown in FIG. 21 ). This reduces the possibility of the locking member coming into contact with other objects and being damaged.

In the above embodiment, the locking member is provided at an end portion of the controller-side sliding member that is closer to the other end than the center portion in the sliding direction (e.g., the upper end portion of the slider 311 shown in FIG. 14 ). This facilitates smoother movement of the controller-side sliding member relative to the main device-side sliding member.

In the above embodiment, the game controller includes at least one terminal (e.g., terminal 42 or 46), which is located closer to one end (e.g., the lower end) than the locking member in the sliding direction and can be electrically connected to the main device. Accordingly, the possibility of the locking member contacting the terminal of the main device can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the terminal of the main device can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the terminal is provided at the end portion of the controller-side sliding member on the one end side. This can reduce the possibility of the controller-side sliding member contacting the terminal of the main device, thereby reducing the possibility of damage to the terminal of the main device.

(Operation and Effect Related to the Operation Section of the Sliding Member Provided in the Controller)

In the embodiment described above, the game controller (e.g., the left controller 3 or the right controller 4) can be installed on a main device (e.g., the main device 2), which can perform game processing and has a main device side sliding component (e.g., the left rail component 300).

The game controller has a controller side sliding member (for example, sliders 311, 331), which is configured to protrude from a specified surface of the game controller and can be engaged with the main device side sliding member in a manner that allows it to slide along a specified sliding direction (for example, the up and down direction shown in Figure 14, i.e., the y-axis direction).

The controller-side sliding member includes a lower surface (e.g., lower surface 311f shown in FIG. 24 ) and an upper surface (e.g., upper surface 311d shown in FIG. 24 ). The lower surface is a surface oriented substantially in the same direction as the predetermined surface, extending from one end to the other in a direction substantially perpendicular to the sliding direction. The distance from the lower surface to the predetermined surface is shorter than the distance from the upper surface to the predetermined surface.

The game controller includes a first operating portion (for example, the second L button 43 or 65 or the second R button 44 or 66 shown in FIG. 14 or FIG. 25 ) provided on the lower surface.

As described above, the input portion, which is not used when the game controller is mounted on the main device, is located in a position (i.e., the aforementioned lower surface) that is inaccessible when the game controller is mounted on the main device. This allows efficient use of the configuration space within the game controller, enabling efficient configuration of the input portion within the game controller. Furthermore, as described above, the first operating portion is located on the lower surface, allowing the controller-side sliding member to slide smoothly relative to the main device-side sliding member. Furthermore, the lower surface is arranged from one end to the other in a direction substantially perpendicular to the sliding direction, making the first operating portion easy for the user to operate.

In the above embodiment, the first operating portion is provided so as not to protrude from the upper surface, thereby enabling the controller-side sliding member to slide more smoothly relative to the main device-side sliding member.

In the above embodiment, the distance from the predetermined surface to the first operating portion is greater than the first distance from the predetermined surface to the lower surface and less than the second distance from the predetermined surface to the upper surface.

In the above embodiment, the controller-side sliding member has a first lower surface at a position closer to one end than the center in the sliding direction, and a second lower surface at a position closer to the other end than the center in the sliding direction (Figures 14 and 25). The first operating portion includes a first input portion (for example, the second L button 43 or 65) provided on the first lower surface and a second input portion (for example, the second R button 44 or 66) provided on the second lower surface. Accordingly, when the game controller is removed from the main device, the user can operate the first input portion with one hand and the second input portion with the other hand (Figure 35). As a result, the operability of the game controller can be improved.

In the above embodiment, the game controller further includes a light-emitting unit (e.g., notification LED 45 or 67) on the upper surface. This light-emitting unit is located between the first and second input units and is used to provide information to the user. Consequently, even when the user operates the first and second input units, the light-emitting unit is less likely to be obscured by the user's hand. This reduces the likelihood of reduced visual recognition of the light-emitting unit when separate input units are provided.

In the above embodiment, the controller-side sliding member has an inclined surface connecting the lower surface and the upper surface (for example, the inclined surface 311e shown in FIG24 ). This can reduce the discomfort felt by the user when operating the first operating portion.

In the above embodiment, the game controller can be mounted on the main device by engaging the controller-side sliding member with the main device-side sliding member.

Game controllers have:

a light-emitting portion, which is provided on the upper surface and is used to inform the user of information; and

The light control unit (for example, the communication control unit 101 or 111) controls the light emitting unit to be in a light emitting state at least under the condition that the game controller is not installed in the main device, and controls the light emitting unit to be in a non-light emitting state when the game controller is installed in the main device.

According to the above, by performing control so that the light emitting unit does not emit light when there is little need, it is possible to reduce power consumption in the game controller.

In the above embodiment, the game controller further includes a second operating portion (e.g., analog joysticks 32, 52, buttons 33-39, 47, 53-61) provided on a surface of the game controller different from the above-mentioned predetermined surface (e.g., the front surface or the upper side surface). Accordingly, the second operating portion can be operated regardless of whether the game controller is attached to the main device or detached from the main device. Therefore, by providing such a second operating portion in the game controller, the operability of the game controller can be improved.

In the above embodiment, the second operating portion is located on the front of the game controller. The aforementioned predetermined surface is a side surface relative to the front surface. Thus, a user can simultaneously operate the second operating portion located on the front (e.g., with a thumb) while operating the first operating portion located on the side surface (e.g., with an index finger). This allows for a game controller that is easily operable even when the game controller is detached from the main device.

(Effects related to the support device capable of mounting the controller)

In the embodiment described above, the supporting device (eg, the extended grip 350 shown in FIG. 54 ) is a device for supporting a first game controller (eg, the left controller 3 ) and a second game controller (eg, the right controller 4 ).

The first game controller has a first rail member (eg, slider 311 ) for mounting the first game controller on the support device.

The second game controller has a second rail member (eg, slider 331 ) for mounting the second game controller on the support device.

The supporting device has:

a support portion (e.g., support portion 352 shown in FIG. 54 ); and

A main body portion connected to the support portion (for example, the main body portion 351 shown in FIG54 ).

The support portion has:

A first sliding member (e.g., left rail member 356) is provided on one side of the support portion in a predetermined direction (e.g., the positive x-axis direction as shown in FIG. 54 ), and is engageable with the first rail member of the first game controller so as to be slidable in a predetermined first sliding direction; and

The second sliding member (for example, the right rail member 357), which is arranged on the other side of the support portion in the specified direction (for example, the negative direction side of the x-axis shown in Figure 54), can be engaged with the second rail member of the second game controller in a manner that can slide along the specified second sliding direction.

The first sliding member has:

A first facing portion (e.g., the facing portion in the left rail member 356), which is a portion provided on one side of the support portion or the first sliding member, having a first facing surface facing the other side; and

The first terminal (for example, the left terminal 367 provided on the left rail member 356) is provided on the first facing surface and can be electrically connected to the first game controller.

The second sliding member has:

A second facing portion (e.g., the facing portion in the right rail member 357), which is a portion provided on the other side of the support portion or a second sliding member, having a second facing surface facing one side; and

The second terminal (for example, the right terminal 368 provided on the right rail member 357) is provided on the second facing surface and can be electrically connected to the second game controller.

The main body has:

a first grip portion (eg, left grip portion 353 ), which is provided on one side of the support portion in a predetermined direction and is intended to be held by one hand of a user; and

The second grip portion (for example, the right grip portion 354 ) is provided on the other side of the support portion in a predetermined direction, and is used to be gripped by the user's other hand.

As described above, the first and second sliding members engage the track members of the two game controllers, respectively, thereby allowing the support device to mount the two game controllers. This reduces the possibility of the game controllers detaching from the support device. Furthermore, the support device includes two gripping portions, allowing the user to grasp the gripping portions while operating the two controllers, thereby improving operability. Furthermore, the terminals are disposed on opposing surfaces facing one side of the support portion, thereby reducing the possibility of the terminals coming into contact with objects other than the game controllers.

In the embodiment described above, the supporting device (eg, the extended grip 350 shown in FIG. 54 ) is a device for supporting a first game controller (eg, the left controller 3 ) and a second game controller (eg, the right controller 4 ).

The first game controller has a first rail member (eg, slider 311 ) for mounting the first game controller on the support device.

The second game controller has a second rail member (eg, slider 331 ) for mounting the second game controller on the support device.

The support device includes a support portion (for example, the support portion 352 shown in FIG54 ).

The support portion has:

A first sliding member (e.g., left rail member 356) is provided on one side of the support portion in a predetermined direction (e.g., the positive x-axis direction as shown in FIG. 54 ), and is engageable with the first rail member of the first game controller so as to be slidable in a predetermined first sliding direction; and

The second sliding member (for example, the right rail member 357), which is arranged on the other side of the support portion in the specified direction (for example, the negative direction side of the x-axis shown in Figure 54), can be engaged with the second rail member of the second game controller in a manner that can slide along the specified second sliding direction.

The first sliding member has:

A first facing portion (e.g., the facing portion in the left rail member 356), which is a portion provided on one side of the support portion or the first sliding member, having a first facing surface facing the other side; and

The first terminal (for example, the left terminal 367 provided on the left rail member 356) is provided on the first facing surface and can be electrically connected to the first game controller.

The second sliding member has:

A second facing portion (e.g., the facing portion in the right rail member 357), which is a portion provided on the other side of the support portion or a second sliding member, having a second facing surface facing one side; and

The second terminal (for example, the right terminal 368 provided on the right rail member 357) is provided on the second facing surface and can be electrically connected to the second game controller.

According to the above, the rail members of the two game controllers are respectively engaged by the first sliding member and the second sliding member, thereby mounting the two game controllers on the support device, thereby reducing the possibility of the game controllers being separated from the support device. In addition, the terminals are arranged on the facing surfaces facing the support portion, thereby reducing the possibility of the terminals contacting objects other than the game controllers.

In the embodiment described above, the supporting device (eg, the extended grip 350 shown in FIG. 54 ) is a device for supporting a first game controller (eg, the left controller 3 ) and a second game controller (eg, the right controller 4 ).

The first game controller has a first rail member (eg, slider 311 ) for mounting the first game controller on the support device.

The second game controller has a second rail member (eg, slider 331 ) for mounting the second game controller on the support device.

The supporting device has:

a support portion (e.g., support portion 352 shown in FIG. 54 ); and

A main body portion connected to the support portion (for example, the main body portion 351 shown in FIG54 ).

The support portion has:

A first sliding member (e.g., left rail member 356) is provided on one side of the support portion in a predetermined direction (e.g., the positive x-axis direction as shown in FIG. 54 ), and is engageable with the first rail member of the first game controller so as to be slidable in a predetermined first sliding direction; and

The second sliding member (for example, the right rail member 357), which is arranged on the other side of the support portion in the specified direction (for example, the negative direction side of the x-axis shown in Figure 54), can be engaged with the second rail member of the second game controller in a manner that can slide along the specified second sliding direction.

The first sliding member has a first opposing portion (for example, the opposing portion in the left rail member 356), which is arranged at one end of the first sliding member in the first sliding direction and has a first opposing surface facing the other side in the specified direction.

The second sliding member has a second opposing portion (for example, the opposing portion in the right rail member 357), which is arranged at an end portion of the second sliding member in the second sliding direction and has a second opposing surface facing one side in a prescribed direction.

The main body has:

a first grip portion (e.g., left grip portion 353), which is provided on one side of the support portion in a predetermined direction and is intended to be held by one hand of a user; and

The second grip portion (for example, the right grip portion 354 ) is provided on the other side of the support portion in a predetermined direction, and is used to be gripped by the user's other hand.

As described above, the first and second sliding members engage the rail members of the two game controllers, respectively, so that the two game controllers are mounted on the support device, thereby reducing the possibility of the game controllers being detached from the support device. In addition, the support device has two grips, so that the user can hold the grips when operating the two controllers, thereby improving operability.

In the above embodiment, the support portion includes:

Connectors (eg, power terminals 360 ); and

A power supply control unit (for example, the power supply control unit 366 shown in FIG57 ) is capable of supplying power supplied via the connector to the first game controller via the first terminal, and is capable of supplying power supplied via the connector to the second game controller via the second terminal.

According to the above, the support device can supply electric power to each game controller.

In the above embodiment, the support portion includes a light emitting portion (e.g., notification LED 361) that emits light to notify the user that at least one of the first and second game controllers is being charged by the power supply control portion. This allows the user to be notified that the game controller is being charged.

In the above embodiment, the light emitting unit notifies that charging is in progress until both the first and second game controllers are fully charged. This reduces the possibility of the user mistakenly stopping charging while one of the two controllers is not fully charged.

In the above embodiment, the main body has a third facing surface (for example, the first surface 353a or 354a), which is opposite to the bottom surface of the first sliding member and is arranged along a portion of the following surface: the first track member is engaged with the surface of the first game controller of the first sliding member, the surface on the opposite side of the surface on which the first track member is provided (for example, the left side of the left controller 3 or the right side of the right controller 4). Accordingly, the support device is arranged so that no large gap is generated on both sides of the game controller installed on itself. As a result, the user can hold the support device and the game controller installed on the support device as if holding an integrated game controller, thereby improving the operability of the game controller.

In the above embodiment, the support device includes a first elastic member (e.g., elastic member 362 or 363) disposed on the third facing surface, which applies a force toward the support portion to the first game controller so that the first rail member engages with the first sliding member. This reduces the shaking of the support device and the first game controller.

In the above embodiment, the main body has a connecting portion (e.g., connecting portion 355) connecting the first grip portion and the second grip portion. Thus, the two grip portions are connected by the connecting portion, thereby reducing shaking caused by changes in the positional relationship of the two grip portions.

In the above embodiment, the first game controller has a front surface (for example, the surface on the negative side of the z-axis shown in Figure 14), a side surface relative to the front surface on which the first rail member is provided, and a back surface opposite to the front surface.

The main body has a surface (e.g., third surface 353c or 354c) disposed along at least a portion of the back surface of the first game controller that engages the first rail member with the first slide member. This allows the support device and the game controller mounted thereon to be held as if they were an integrated game controller, thereby improving the operability of the game controller.

In the above embodiment, the first game controller has a front face, a side face relative to the front face on which the first rail member is provided, a back face opposite to the front face, and an operating portion (e.g., a ZL button 39 or a ZR button 61) protruding relative to the back face.

In the main body, a notch (for example, notch C2 or C3 shown in Figure 55) is formed at the end portion on the side where the first game controller is inserted along the sliding direction of the first sliding member, which is used to avoid the first rail member from being engaged with the operating part of the first game controller of the first sliding member.

According to the above, the game controller having the operating portion provided on the back surface can be attached to the support device, and the user can operate the operating portion provided on the back surface of the game controller attached to the support device.

In the above embodiment, the first game controller has a front surface, a first side surface opposite to the front surface on which the first rail member is provided, and a back surface opposite to the front surface.

The main body has:

a third surface (eg, third surface 353c or 354c shown in FIG. 54 ) disposed along a back surface of the first game controller that engages the first track member with the first slide member; and

A surface recessed relative to the third surface is formed at the end portion of the third surface in the sliding direction on the side where the first game controller is inserted (for example, fourth surface 353d or 354d shown in FIG. 54 ).

According to the above, the third surface is formed into a recessed shape, so that the game controller having an operating unit provided on the back surface can be mounted on the support device, and the user can operate the operating unit provided on the back surface of the game controller mounted on the support device.

In the above embodiment, the first game controller has a front surface, a first side surface relative to the front surface on which the first track member is provided, a second side surface opposite to the first side surface, and a back surface opposite to the front surface. The connecting portion between the second side surface and the back surface is formed by a curved surface with rounded corners (Figures 14 and 25).

The main body has:

a first surface (e.g., first surface 353a or 354a shown in FIG. 54 ) disposed along a second side surface of the first game controller that engages the first track member with the first slide member;

a second surface (e.g., second surface 353b or 354b shown in FIG. 54 ) continuous with the first surface and arranged along the curved surface of the connecting portion of the first game controller that engages the first rail member with the first slide member; and

The third surface (eg, third surface 353c or 354c shown in FIG. 54 ) is continuous with the second surface and is disposed along the back surface of the first game controller so that the first rail member engages with the first slide member.

According to the above, the support device and the game controller attached to the support device can be held as if holding an integrated game controller, thereby improving the operability of the game controller.

In the above embodiment, the first opposing portion is arranged at the end of one side in the first sliding direction (for example, the lower side, i.e., the negative direction side of the y-axis shown in Figure 54), and the sliding movement of the first track component is stopped by abutting against the first track component inserted from the other side of the first sliding direction.

The second opposing portion is arranged at the end of one side in the second sliding direction (for example, the lower side, i.e., the negative direction side of the y-axis shown in Figure 54), and stops the sliding movement of the second track component by abutting against the second track component inserted from the other side of the second sliding direction.

According to the above, the sliding movement of the game controller can be stopped by the facing portion. In addition, when the facing portion is provided with a terminal, the facing portion can be used as both a member for providing the terminal and a member for stopping the sliding movement of the game controller.

In the above embodiment, the first sliding member has:

a groove portion formed by a bottom surface of the first sliding member (e.g., a bottom surface portion in the left rail member 356) and side surfaces connected to both sides of the bottom surface (e.g., side surfaces in the left rail member 356); and

Two protrusions (for example, the top surface portion in the left rail member 356), which are arranged to protrude from each side surface and each have a surface facing the bottom surface of the first sliding member.

According to the above, the possibility that the first rail member is separated from the first sliding member in the direction perpendicular to the sliding direction can be reduced by the protrusion.

In the above embodiment, the first game controller has a locking component (for example, the locking component 319 or 339), which locks the sliding movement of the first rail member relative to the first sliding member when the first rail member is inserted into a specified position relative to the first sliding member (for example, the above-mentioned installation state), and the sliding movement is a sliding movement of the first sliding member in a direction opposite to the direction of insertion relative to the first rail member.

The first sliding member has a locking portion (for example, the locking portion in the left rail member 356), and the locking member can be locked to the locking portion when the first rail member of the first game controller is inserted to a specified position relative to the first sliding member.

According to the above, the possibility of the first rail member being separated from the first sliding member can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the first sliding member has an end on one side and an end on the other side in the sliding direction. The first terminal is provided at a portion of the first sliding member that is closer to one side (for example, the lower side) than the center of the first sliding member in the sliding direction. The locked portion is provided at a portion of the first sliding member that is closer to the other side (for example, the upper side) than the center of the first sliding member in the sliding direction. Accordingly, the locking member in the first game controller is provided at a portion of the first track member that is closer to the above-mentioned other side than the center in the sliding direction. Thus, as long as the first track member is not inserted to a certain extent relative to the first sliding member, the locking member will not contact the supporting device, and therefore the locking member can be made less likely to contact the supporting device. Thus, it is easy to make the first track member move smoothly relative to the first sliding member.

In the above embodiment, the first sliding member has an end on one side and an end on the other side in the sliding direction. The first game controller can be mounted on the supporting device by inserting the first track member into the end on the other side in the first sliding direction. The locked portion is provided at a portion of the first sliding member that is closer to the other side than the center. Accordingly, the locking member in the first game controller is provided at a portion of the first track member that is closer to the other side than the center in the sliding direction. Thus, the locking member can be made less likely to contact the supporting device, and as a result, it is easy for the first track member to move smoothly relative to the first sliding member.

In the above embodiment, the first sliding member has:

a groove portion formed by a bottom surface of the first sliding member (e.g., a bottom surface portion in the left rail member 356) and side surfaces connected to both sides of the bottom surface (e.g., side surfaces in the left rail member 356); and

Two protrusions (for example, the top surface portion in the left rail member 356), which are arranged to protrude from each side surface and each have a surface facing the bottom surface of the first sliding member.

The two protruding portions are each provided with a locked portion.

According to the above, the possibility of the first track member being separated from the first sliding member in a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction can be reduced by the protrusion. In addition, the two protrusions are respectively provided with the locked portion. Therefore, regardless of which side the game controller with the locking member is installed on the support device, the possibility of the first track member being separated from the first sliding member can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, an incident port is provided on the bottom surface of the first sliding member (for example, the side surface of the shell exposed from the hole 356a formed on the bottom surface of the left rail member 356) (refer to Figure 55).

The emission port is provided on a surface (for example, a front surface) of the support portion different from the bottom surface of the first sliding member.

The support portion further includes a light guide portion (for example, a light guide member 358 ) that guides light incident on the incident port to the emission port.

As described above, when a first game controller having a light-emitting portion (e.g., a notification LED) provided on the first rail member is mounted on the support device, the support device can emit light emitted by the light-emitting portion from the emission port. Thus, information notified by the notification LED of the controller mounted on the extended grip can be presented to the user using a simple structure.

In the above embodiment, the first game controller has a front surface and a side surface opposite to the front surface on which the first rail member is provided.

The emission port is provided on a surface of the support portion that faces the same direction as the front surface of the first game controller that engages the first rail member with the first slide member.

According to the above, the light outlet is provided at a position that is easily visible to the user who operates the first game controller by looking at the front surface.

In the above embodiment, the light guide has an incident surface that is recessed relative to the bottom surface of the first sliding member. This reduces the likelihood of contact between the light guide and the first game controller when the first rail member of the first game controller is inserted into the first sliding member. This allows for smooth installation of the first game controller onto the support device.

In the above embodiment, in the first sliding member, at least a portion of the member that engages with the first rail member is formed integrally with the first facing portion (for example, the top surface portion of the left rail member 356 is formed integrally with the facing portion). This simplifies the shape of the first sliding member and facilitates manufacturing of the sliding member.

In the above embodiment, the first sliding member and the second sliding member are made of metal, thereby increasing the strength of each sliding member.

In the above embodiment, the second sliding member is configured so that the second sliding direction is substantially parallel to the first sliding direction (Figure 54). Accordingly, each game controller mounted on the supporting device is supported by the supporting device in the same direction (Figure 56). Thus, the user can operate the two game controllers with the same feeling (for example, the upward input to the first game controller and the upward input to the second game controller are inputs in the same direction). Thus, the operability of the two game controllers mounted on the supporting device can be improved. In addition, the above-mentioned correction processing can be omitted, thereby reducing the processing burden of the information processing device.

In the above embodiment, the first and second facing portions are located at the same end portions (e.g., the lower end portions) in the first and second sliding directions. This allows the game controller to be inserted from the same side of the first and second sliding members, respectively. This improves the convenience of the support device.

In other embodiments, the support device may also include a second elastic member (e.g., leaf spring 305) disposed on the bottom surface of the first sliding member to apply a force to the first rail member engaged with the first sliding member in a direction away from the support portion. This can reduce the wobble of the support device and the first game controller.

In the embodiment described above, the charging device (eg, the extended grip 350 shown in FIG. 54 ) is a device for charging the first game controller (eg, the left controller 3 ).

The first game controller has a first track member (eg, slider 311 ) for mounting the first game controller on the charging device.

The charging device has:

a support portion (e.g., support portion 352 shown in FIG. 54 ); and

The first sliding member (for example, the left rail member 356 ) is provided at a portion on one side of the support portion in a prescribed direction and can be engaged with the first rail member in a manner that allows sliding along a prescribed first sliding direction.

The first sliding member has:

A first facing portion (for example, a facing portion in the left rail member 356 ) provided on the support portion or the first sliding member and having a first facing surface facing the other side in a predetermined direction; and

The first terminal (for example, the left terminal 367 provided on the left rail member 356) is provided on the first facing surface and can be electrically connected to the first game controller.

The charging device has:

a connector (eg, power terminal 360 ) disposed on the support portion; and

A power supply control unit (for example, the power supply control unit 366 shown in FIG57 ) is capable of supplying the power supplied via the connector to the first game controller via the first terminal.

According to the above, by providing each terminal on the facing surface facing the support portion, the possibility of the terminal coming into contact with objects other than the game controller can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the support unit includes a light emitting unit (eg, notification LED 361) that emits light to notify that the first game controller is being charged by the power supply control unit.

In the above embodiment, the charging device can charge the second game controller (for example, the right controller 4 ) that is different from the first game controller.

The second game controller has a second track member (eg, slider 331 ) for mounting the second game controller on the charging device.

The first sliding member is provided at a portion of the support portion on one side in a predetermined direction (for example, on the positive x-axis direction side shown in FIG. 54 ).

The charging device has a second sliding member (for example, the right rail member 357), which is arranged in a portion of the support portion on the other side of the specified direction (for example, the negative direction side of the x-axis shown in Figure 54), and can be engaged with the second rail member in a manner that allows it to slide along a specified second sliding direction.

The second sliding member has:

a second facing portion (e.g., the facing portion in the right rail member 357), which is provided on the support portion or the second sliding member and has a second facing surface facing one side; and

The second terminal (for example, the right terminal 368 provided on the right rail member 357) is provided on the second facing surface and can be electrically connected to the second game controller.

The power supply control unit can supply the power supplied via the connector to the first game controller via the first terminal, and to the second game controller via the second terminal.

According to the above, the support device can supply power to two game controllers.

In the above-described embodiment or its modified example, the accessory device is an accessory device (for example, the extended grip 210 ) to which the first operating device and the second operating device can be attached and detached, and the accessory device has the following structure.

A first sliding member that engages with a sliding member of a first operating device

A second sliding member that engages with a sliding member of a second operating device

A first gripping portion, which is provided on one side of the accessory device body in a predetermined direction

A second gripping portion, which is provided on the other side of the accessory device body in a predetermined direction

A first engaging hole for engaging with the protrusion of the first operating device may be formed in the first sliding member, and a second engaging hole for engaging with the protrusion of the second operating device may be formed in the second sliding member.

The first operating device may be mounted on the first sliding member at a position closer to one side than the center in a predetermined direction. The second operating device may be mounted on the second sliding member at a position closer to the other side than the center in a predetermined direction.

The first grip portion may be provided on one side of the portion where the first operating device is mounted in a predetermined direction. The second grip portion may be provided on the other side of the portion where the second operating device is mounted in a predetermined direction.

The auxiliary equipment may further include the following configuration.

A first connection terminal is provided at a position where it can be connected to a terminal of a first operating device installed on an auxiliary device.

A second connection terminal is provided at a position where it can be connected to a terminal of a second operating device installed on an auxiliary device.

The auxiliary equipment may further include the following configuration.

Power terminal

A charging unit that uses the power supplied to the accessory device via the power supply terminal to charge the first operating device via the first connection terminal and to charge the second operating device via the second connection terminal

In the above-described embodiment or its modified example, the accessory equipment is capable of attaching and detaching at least one operating device and has the following structure.

A sliding member that engages with a sliding member of an operating device

Connection terminals are located at positions where they can be connected to terminals on operating devices installed on accessory equipment.

Power terminal

A charging unit that uses the power supplied to the accessory device via the power supply terminal to charge the operating device via the connection terminal

In the above-described embodiment or its modified example, the game controller (eg, the left controller 3 or the right controller 4 ) is attachable and detachable to the main body of the game device and has the following structure.

Operation unit (e.g., analog joystick 32, operation buttons 33 to 36, etc.)

A sliding member (e.g., slider 40) that engages with the rail member of the main device in a manner that allows it to slide relative to and be detachable from the rail member of the main device.

A protrusion (e.g., protrusion 41) provided on the sliding member, which engages with the rail member of the main device when the game controller is mounted on the main device to fix the game controller to the main device

The game controller may further include a releasing mechanism that releases the state in which the game controller is fixed to the main device via the protrusion by housing the protrusion inside the sliding member in response to a user operation.

The release mechanism may also include a button that can be pressed by the user.

The protrusion can also be applied from the inner side of the sliding member to the outer side. Under the state where the game controller is fixed to the main device by the protrusion, the fixed state of the game controller and the main device can be released by applying the force that causes the game controller to slide.

The sliding member may be inserted downward from the upper end of the rail member of the main device. The game controller may further include a terminal provided on the sliding member below the protrusion and electrically connectable to a terminal of the main device.

In the above-described embodiment or its modified example, the game controller (eg, the left controller 3 or the right controller 4 ) is attachable and detachable to the main body of the game device and has the following structure.

A sliding member (e.g., slider 40) that engages with the rail member of the main device in a manner that allows it to slide relative to and be detachable from the rail member of the main device.

A first operating portion (e.g., the second L button 43, the second R button 44) and/or a light emitting portion (e.g., the notification LED 45), which are provided on a predetermined surface (e.g., the mounting surface) of the sliding member that faces the main device when the sliding member is mounted on the main device.

The first operating portion may be provided at a position recessed from the predetermined surface.

The first operating portion may be provided so as not to protrude relative to the predetermined surface.

A plurality of first operating portions may be provided on the predetermined surface.

The first operating portion may include a first button provided at a position closer to one side than the center in the sliding direction of the sliding member, and a second button provided at a position closer to the other side than the center.

A plurality of light emitting units may be provided on a predetermined surface.

The game controller may further include the following structure.

A housing having a main surface and a side surface on which a sliding member is disposed

The second operating unit (e.g., analog rocker 32, operating buttons 33-36, etc.) is provided on the main surface of the housing.

In the above-described embodiment or its modified example, the game controller (for example, the left controller 3 or the right controller 4 ) has the following structure.

A housing (e.g., housing 31) having a shape elongated in a predetermined direction, having a main surface, at least one first side surface along the predetermined direction, and at least one second side surface different from the first side surface

Directional input unit (e.g., analog joystick 32), which is provided on the main surface of the housing

A first operating portion (e.g., the second L button 43) and a second operating portion (e.g., the second R button 44) are two operating portions provided on one side of the first side surface, the first operating portion being provided on one side of the center of the first side surface in a predetermined direction, and the second operating portion being provided on the other side of the center of the first side surface in a predetermined direction.

A third operating unit (e.g., the first L button 38) and a fourth operating unit (e.g., the ZL button 39) are provided at a corner of one of the second side surfaces, on the opposite side of the first side surface where the first and second operating units are provided.

The housing may also be elongated in the vertical direction. The first and second operating portions may be disposed on the right side of the housing, with the first operating portion disposed above the center in the vertical direction and the second operating portion disposed below the center in the vertical direction. The third and fourth operating portions may also be disposed in the upper left portion of the side surface of the housing.

The housing may also be elongated in the vertical direction. The first and second operating portions may be disposed on the left side of the housing, with the first operating portion disposed above the center in the vertical direction and the second operating portion disposed below the center in the vertical direction. The third and fourth operating portions may also be disposed in the upper right portion of the side surface of the housing.

The corners of the side surface of the housing where the third operating portion and the fourth operating portion are provided may also have rounded corners. The third operating portion and the fourth operating portion may also have rounded corners corresponding to the rounded corners of the housing.

The fourth operating portion may be provided on the rear side of the third operating portion in the front-rear direction perpendicular to the main surface of the housing.

The fourth operating portion may also be provided so as to protrude from the rear surface of the housing.

In the above-described embodiment or its modified example, the game controller has the following structure.

A housing (for example, housing 31) having a shape that is long in a predetermined direction

Directional input unit (e.g., analog joystick 32), which is provided on the main surface of the housing

The first operating portion (e.g., the first L button 38, the ZL button 39) is located at a position on the side of the housing that can be operated by the user's index finger when the user holds the housing with one hand so that the longitudinal direction of the housing is oriented vertically and operates the direction input portion with the thumb.

The second operating portion (e.g., the second L button 43) and the third operating portion (e.g., the second R button 44) are arranged at positions on the side of the housing that can be operated by the user's left and right index fingers, respectively, when the user holds the housing with the longitudinal direction of the housing facing the horizontal direction and operates the direction input portion with the thumb.

In the above-described embodiment or its modified example, the game controller is capable of wireless communication and has the following structure.

A housing (for example, housing 31) having a shape that is long in a predetermined direction

The first operating unit (e.g., analog joystick 32, operating buttons 33-36, etc.) is provided on the main surface of the housing.

The second and third operating parts are provided on the side surfaces of the housing along a predetermined direction.

A pairing button (e.g., pairing button 46) is provided between the second and third operating sections and is used to perform settings related to wireless communication.

The second operating portion, the third operating portion, and the pairing button may also be arranged so as not to protrude relative to the side surface.

Industrial applicability

The above-described embodiment aims to reduce the possibility of the support device being separated from the information processing device, and can be used in a support device that supports a game controller, for example.

Claims (9)

1. A game controller removably mountable to a main unit having a main unit-side sliding member and configured to perform game processing, the game controller comprising: A controller-side sliding member protrudes from the first surface of the game controller and is used to engage with the main body-side sliding member in a manner that allows it to slide in the sliding direction. The controller-side sliding member has a first end and a second end, and includes a lower surface and an upper surface as surfaces facing substantially the same direction as the first surface. A first distance between the lower surface and the first surface is less than a second distance between the upper surface and the first surface. The lower surface extends from the first end to the second end of the controller-side sliding member in a direction substantially perpendicular to the sliding direction. The game controller includes a first operation control unit located on the lower layer of the controller-side sliding member. 2. The game controller according to claim 1, wherein, The first operation control unit is configured not to protrude beyond the upper layer. 3. The game controller according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the first operation control unit extends relative to the first surface by a distance greater than the first distance and less than or equal to the second distance. 4. The game controller according to claim 1, wherein, The controller-side sliding member includes a first lower layer at a position in the sliding direction closer to one end than the center of the controller-side sliding member, and includes a second lower layer at a position in the sliding direction closer to the other end than the center of the controller-side sliding member; and The first operation control unit includes a first input unit located on the first lower level and a second input unit located on the second lower level. 5. The game controller according to claim 4 further includes a light-emitting part located on the upper layer between the first input part and the second input part for informing the user of information. 6. The game controller according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the controller-side sliding member defines an inclined surface connecting the lower layer to the upper layer. 7. The game controller according to claim 1 or 2, wherein, The game controller is configured to be mounted on the main device via engagement between the controller-side sliding member and the main device-side sliding member, and the game controller includes: A light-emitting part, located on the upper layer, is used to inform the user of information; and The light-emitting control unit is configured to control the light-emitting unit to emit light, at least when the game controller is not installed on the main device, and to control the light-emitting unit to not emit light when the game controller is installed on the main device. 8. The game controller according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising a second operation control unit located on a side of the game controller different from the first side. 9. The game controller according to claim 8, wherein, The second operation control unit is located on the front of the game controller; and The first side is the side relative to the front.